Search Results for:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Students can Download Bio Botany Chapter 1 Living World Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Living World Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Choose the correct answer
Question 1.
Which one of the following statement about virus is correct?
(a) Possess their own metabolic system
(b) They are facultative parasites
(c) They contain DNA or RNA
(d) Enzymes are present
Answer:
(c) They contain DNA or RNA

Question 2.
Identify the incorrect statement about the Gram positive bacteria.
(a) Teichoic acid absent
(b) High percentage of peptidoglycan is found in cell wall
(c) Cell wall is single layered
(d) Lipopolysaccharide is present in cell wall
Answer:
(a) Teichoic acid absent

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 3.
Identify the Archaebacterium.
(a) Acetobacter
(b) Erwinia
(c) Treponema
(d) Methanobacterium
Answer:
(d) Methanobacterium

Question 4.
The correct statement regarding Blue green algae is
(a) lack of motile structures
(b) presence of cellulose in cell wall
(c) absence of mucilage around the thallus
(d) presence of floridean starch
Answer:
(a) lack of motile structures

Question 5.
Identify the correctly matched pair
(a) Actinomycete – 1. Late blight
(b) Mycoplasma – 2. Lumpy jaw
(c) Bacteria – 3. Crown gall
(d) Fungi – 4. Sandal spike
Answer:
(c) Bacteria – 3. Crown gall

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 6.
Differentiate Homoiomerous and Heteromerous lichens.
Answer:
Homoiomerous and Heteromerous Lichens:

Homoiomerous Heteromerous
1. Algal cells evenly distributed in the thallus 1. A distinct layer of algae and fungi present

Question 7.
Write the distinguishing features of Monera.
Answer:
Distinguishing Features of Monera:

  1. This kingdom includes all prokaryotic organisms. Example: Mycoplasma, bacteria, actinomycetes and cyanobacteria.
  2. These are microscopic. They do not have a true nucleus and membrane bound organelles.
  3. Many other bacteria like Rhizobium, Azotobacter and Clostridium can fix atmospheric nitrogen into ammonia.
  4. Some bacteria are parasites and others live as symbionts.

Question 8.
Why do farmers plant leguminous crops in crop rotations/mixed cropping?
Answer:
Rotations / Mixed Cropping:

  1. Legumes have bacteria on nodules which are on the roots of the plants. The bacteria on the nodules takes nitrogen from the air and fixes it into the soil, so that other plants that require nitrogen can use it as well.
  2. Rotation of crops improves the fertility of the soil and hence brings about an increase in the production of food grains.
  3. Rotation of crops helps in saving on nitrogenous fertilizers, because leguminous plants grown during the rotation of crops can fix atmospheric nitrogen in the soil with the help of nitrogen fixing bacteria.
  4. Crop rotation adds diversity to an operation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 9.
Briefly discuss on five kingdom classification. Add a note on merits and demerits.
Answer:
R.H. Whittaker, an American taxonomist proposed five kingdom classification in the year 1969. The kingdoms include Monera, Protista, Fungi, Plantae and Animalia. The criteria adopted for the classification include cell structure, thallus organization, mode of nutrition, reproduction and phylogenetic relationship. A comparative account of the salient features of each kingdom is given in table.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 1
Merits:

  • The classification is based on the complexity of cell structure and organization of thallus.
  • It is based on the mode of nutrition.
  • Separation of fungi from plants.
  • It shows the phylogeny of the organisms

Demerits:

  • The kingdom monera and protista accommodate both autotrophic and heterotrophic organisms, cell wall lacking and cell wall bearing organisms thus making these two groups more heterogeneous.
  • Viruses were not included in the system.

Question 10.
Give a general account on lichens.
Answer:
The symbiotic association between algae and fungi is called lichens. The algal partner is called Phycobiont and the fungal partner is called Mycobiont. Algae provide nutrition for fungal partner and also help in fixing the thallus to the substratum through rhizinae. Asexual reproduction takes place through fragmentation, Soredia and Isidia. Phycobionst reproduce by akinetes, hormogonia, aplanospore, etc. Mycobionts undergo sexual reproduction and produce ascocarps.
Classification:

  1. Based on the habitat lichens are classified into following types: Corticolous (on bark) Lignicolous (on wood) Saxicolous (on rocks) Terricolous (on ground) Marine (on siliceous rocks of sea) and Fresh water (on siliceous rock of fresh water).
  2. On the basis of morphology of the thallus they are divided into Leprose (a distinct fungal layer is absent) Crustose – crust like; Foliose – leaf like; Fruticose – branched pendulous shrub like.
  3. The distribution of algal cells distinguishes lichens into two forms namely Homoiomerous (Algal cells evenly distributed in the thallus) and Fleteromerous (a distinct layer of algae and fungi present).
  4. If the fungal partner of lichen belongs to ascomycetes, it is called Ascolichen and if it is basidiomycetes it is called Basidiolichen.

Textbook Activity Solved

Get a button mushroom. Draw diagram of the fruit body. Take a thin longitudinal section passing through the gill and observe the section under a microscope. Record your observations.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Living World Additional Questions and Answers

I. Multiple Choice Questions
Choose the correct answer
Question 1.
Earth was formed around billion years ago …………… .
(a) 3.3
(b) 5.6
(c) 4.6
(d) 5.9
Answer:
(c) 4.6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 2.
According to Mora et al., in 2011, the number of estimated species on Earth is …………… .
(a) 8.7 million
(b) 9.7 million
(c) 7.7 million
(d) 9.7 billion
Answer:
(a) 8.7 million

Question 3.
Which of the following is NOT a prokaryote?
(a) Bacteria
(b) Blue green algae
(c) Oedogonium
(d) Nostoc
Answer:
(c) Oedogonium

Question 4.
Which of the following organism undergoes regeneration?
(a) Spirogyra
(b) Planaria
(c) Yeast
(d) Aspergillus
Answer:
(b) Planaria

Question 5.
Vaccination for small pox was discovered by …………… .
(a) W.M. Stanley
(b) Adolf Mayer
(c) Robert Koch
(d) Edward Jenner
Answer:
(d) Edward Jenner

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 6.
Who coined the term ‘Bacteriophage’?
(a) F.W. Twort
(b) d’Herelle
(c) Ivanowsky
(d) Robert Gallo
Answer:
(b) d’Herelle

Question 7.
The size of TMV is …………… .
(a) 300 × 20 mm
(b) 300 × 200 µm
(c) 300 × 20 nm
(d) 300 × 20 Å
Answer:
(c) 300 × 20 nm

Question 8.
One nanometer equals to metres …………… .
(a) 10-9
(b) 10-6
(c) 10-5
(d) 10-12
Answer:
(a) 10-9

Question 9.
Which is a non – living character of viruses?
(a) Undergoes mutation
(b) Host – specific
(c) Crystallized
(d) Irritability
Answer:
(c) Crystallized

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 10.
According to David Baltimore, the viruses are classified …………… into classes.
(a) 6
(b) 5
(c) 7
(d) 8
Answer:
(c) 7

Question 11.
Identify the criteria not used in classifying viruses by Baltimore …………… .
(a) ss (or) ds
(b) use of RT
(c) capsid
(d) sense or antisense
Answer:
(c) capsid

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 12.
Viruses with dsRNA is …………… .
(a) Toga viruses
(b) Retro viruses
(c) Reo viruses
(d) Rhabdo viruses
Answer:
(c) Reo viruses

Question 13.
Which of the plant virus contains DNA as genome?
(a) Tobacco mosaic virus
(b) Cauliflower mosaic virus
(c) Sugarcane mosaic virus
(d) Cucumber mosaic virus
Answer:
(b) Cauliflower mosaic virus

Question 14.
Parvo viruses have …………… .
(a) ssDNA
(b) dsDNA
(c) ssRNA
(d) dsRNA
Answer:
(a) ssDNA

Question 15.
Molecular weight of TMV is dalton …………… .
(a) 39 × 106
(b) 39 × 10-6
(c) 39 × 109
(d) 39 × 10-9
Answer:
(a) 39 × 106

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 16.
Approximate number of capsomeres in TMV is …………… .
(a) 3120
(b) 1203
(c) 2130
(d) 3021
Answer:
(c) 2130

Question 17.
The empty protein coat left outside after penetration is …………… .
(a) host
(b) ghost
(c) capsid
(d) capsomeres
Answer:
(b) ghost

Question 18.
The genome of viroid is …………… .
(a) linear ssRNA
(b) dumb – bell shaped ssRNA
(c) circular ssRNA
(d) linear dsRNA
Answer:
(c) circular ssRNA

Question 19.
Viroids were discovered by …………… .
(a) Ivanowsky
(b) Robert Gallo
(c) Diener
(d) d’Herelle
Answer:
(c) Diener

Question 20.
Mad cow disease is caused by …………… .
(a) viroids
(b) virusoids
(c) prions
(d) viruses
Answer:
(c) prions

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 21.
Match the Following:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 3
(a) 1- d, 2 – b, 3 – a, 4 – c
(b) 1 – c, 2 – d, 3 – a, 4 – b
(c) 1 – c, 2 – a, 3 – b, 4 – d
(d) 1 – d, 2 – a, 3 – b, 4 – c
Answer:
(c) 1- c, 2 – a, 3 – b, 4 – d

Question 22.
Identify the correct sequence regarding lytic cycle of viruses …………… .
(A) Penetration
(B) Adsorption
(C) Assembly
(D) Synthesis

(a) BADC
(b) CABD
(c) BDAC
(d) ADBC
Answer:
(a) BADC

Question 23.
Mycophages infect …………… .
(a) blue green algae
(b) bacteria
(c) fungi
(d) cyanobacteria
Answer:
(c) fungi

Question 24.
Rice tungro is caused by …………… .
(a) fungi
(b) bacteria
(c) mycoplasma
(d) viruses
Answer:
(d) viruses

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 25.
Father of Botany …………… .
(a) Aristotle
(b) Theophrastus
(c) Lederberg
(d) Whittaker
Answer:
(b) Theophrastus

Question 26.
Three kingdom classification was proposed by …………… .
(a) Copeland
(b) Theophrastus
(c) Linnaeus
(d) Haeckel
Answer:
(d) Haeckel

Question 27.
Which Is not a part of five kindgom classification?
(a) Viruses
(b) Monera
(c) Protista
(d) Mycoplasma
Answer:
(a) Viruses

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 28.
Six kingdom classification was proposed by …………… .
(a) Haeckel
(b) Copeland
(c) Woese
(d) Cavalier – Smith
Answer:
(d) Cavalier – Smith

Question 29.
Ruggerlo et al., in 2015 proposed …………… kingdom classification.
(a) 5
(b) 6
(c) 7
(d) 8
Answer:
(c) 7

Question 30.
…………… is a new kingdom in seven kingdom classification.
(a) Eubactena
(b) Plantae
(c) Chromista
(d) Archaebacteria
Answer:
(c) Chromista

Question 31.
Actinomycetes comes under …………… kindgom.
(a) fungi
(b) chromista
(c) monera
(d) protista
Answer:
(c) monera

Question 32.
The sourness of curd is due to …………… .
(a) acetic acid
(b) galactic acid
(c) lactic acid
(d) lactone
Answer:
(c) lactic acid

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 33.
Who is the founder of Modern Bacteriology …………… ?
(a) Aristotle
(b) Robert Koch
(c) Pasteur
(d) Linnaeus
Answer:
(b) Robert Koch

Question 34.
The term bacterium was coined by …………… .
(a) Stanley
(b) Ehrenberg
(c) Gram
(d) Koch
Answer:
(b) Ehrenberg

Question 35.
Plasmids were discovered by …………… .
(a) Ehrenberg
(b) H.Bergy
(c) Joshua Lederberg
(d) Koch
Answer:
(c) Joshua Lederberg

Question 36.
Genophore is seen in …………… .
(a) Amoeba
(b) Cyanobacteria
(c) Chlamydomonas
(d) Euglena
Answer:
(b) Cyanobacteria

Question 37.
Number of domains of life are there according to Carl Woese …………… .
(a) 3
(b) 2
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 38.
Which is not a component of bacterial cell?
(a) Mesosomes
(b) Glycocalyx
(c) Polysomes
(d) Histones
Answer:
(d) Histones

Question 39.
The most abundant polypeptide in bacterial cell wall is …………… .
(a) chitin
(b) amylopectin
(c) porin
(d) pectin
Answer:
(c) porin

Question 40.
Extra chromosomal element in bacterial cells are …………… .
(a) plasmids
(b) mesosomes
(c) histones
(d) genophores
Answer:
(a) plasmids

Question 41.
Bacteriocins are found in …………… .
(a) genophore
(b) plasmids
(c) nucleoids
(d) mesosomes
Answer:
(b) plasmids

Question 42.
Colour revealed by Gram positive bacteria after Gram staining is …………… .
(a) red
(b) indigo
(c) dark violet
(d) blue
Answer:
(c) dark violet

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 43.
How many number of basal body rings seen in the flagella of Gram negative bacteria?
(a) 2
(b) 9
(c) 4
(d) 1
Answer:
(c) 4

Question 44.
Capnophilic bacteria require for growth …………… .
(a) C2
(b) CO
(c) CO2
(d) O3
Answer:
(c) CO2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 45.
The pigment present in green sulphur bacteria is …………… .
(a) bacterioviridin
(b) bacteriochlorophyll
(c) chlorophyll a
(d) xanthophyll
Answer:
(b) bacteriochlorophyll

Question 46.
The hydrogen donor of purple sulphur bacteria is …………… .
(a) H2S
(b) thiosulphate
(c) ethanol
(d) acetic acid
Answer:
(b) thiosulphate

Question 47.
Campylobacter is a …………… .
(a) obligate aerobe
(b) obligate anaerobe
(c) capnophilic
(d) aerobe
Answer:
(c) capnophilic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 48.
Mycobacterium is a …………… .
(a) parasite
(b) symbiont
(c) saprophyte
(d) free – living
Answer:
(a) parasite

Question 49.
Which is the most common mode of asexual reproduction in bacteria?
(a) Endospore formation
(b) Fission
(c) Budding
(d) Conidia
Answer:
(b) Fission

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 50.
…………… are thick walled resting spores.
(a) Aplanospores
(b) Endospores
(c) Conidia
(d) Zoospores
Answer:
(b) Endospores

Question 51.
In which of the following method genetic recombination does not occur?
(a) Generalised transduction
(b) Conjugation
(c) Transformation
(d) Fission
Answer:
(d) Fission

Question 52.
During conjugation in bacteria, which of the following is transferred from donor to recipient cell?
(a) R factor
(b) F factor
(c) Ti factor
(d) Ri factor
Answer:
(b) F factor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 53.
Griffith used …………… for his experiment.
(a) rat
(b) rabbit
(c) mice
(d) monkey
Answer:
(c) mice

Question 54.
Transformation in bacteria was demonstrated by …………… .
(a) Lederberg
(b) Zinder
(c) Edward
(d) Griffith
Answer:
(d) Griffith

Question 55.
Lederberg studied transduction in bacterium …………… .
(a) Diplococcus pneumoniae
(b) Streptococcus
(c) Salmonella typhi
(d) Escherichia coil
Answer:
(c) Salmonella typhi

Question 56.
Bacteria used in the curing of tea is …………… .
(a) Mycococcus candisans
(b) Eseherichia coli
(c) Acetobacter aceti
(d) Streptococcus lactis
Answer:
(a) Mycococcus candisans

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 57.
Syphilis k caused by …………… .
(a) Mycococcus candisans
(b) Treponema pallidum
(c) Yersinia pestis
(d) Mycohacterium leprae
Answer:
(b) Treponema pallidum

Question 58.
Methanobacterium is …………… .
(a) Cyanobacteria
(b) Malobacteria
(c) Eubacteria
(d) Archaebacteria
Answer:
(d) Archaebacteria

Question 59.
…………… is NOT a phycobiont in lichens.
(a) Gloeocapsa
(b) Dermacarpa
(c) Scytonema
(d) Nostoc
Answer:
(b) Dermacarpa

Question 60.
Red sea is red colour due to …………… .
(a) Dermacarpa sps.
(b) Trichodesmium sps.
(c) Scytonema sps.
(d) Gloeocapsa sps.
Answer:
(b) Trichodesmium sps.

Question 61.
Filamentous trichome is the plant body of …………… .
(a) Chroococcus
(b) Gloeocapsa
(c) Nostoc
(d) Oscillatoria
Answer:
(c) Nostoc

Question 62.
Stromatolites are the colonies of cyanobacteria bind with …………… .
(a) calcium carbonate
(b) calcium hydroxide
(c) magnesium sulphate
(d) calcium silicate
Answer:
(a) calcium carbonate

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 63.
…………… sps. is an endophyte in coralloid roots of Cycas.
(a) Gioeocapsa
(b) Scytonerna
(c) Nostoc
(d) Azolla
Answer:
(c) Nosloc

Question 64.
Myxophyceae refers to …………… .
(a) Algae
(b) Fungi
(c) Archaebacteria
(d) Cyanobacteria
Answer:
(d) Cyanobacteria

Question 65.
…………… is used in single cell protein.
(a) Spirulina
(b) Azolla
(c) Dermacarpa
(d) Nostoc
Answer:
(a) Spirulina

Question 66.
…………… is a pleomorphic organism.
(a) Fungi
(b) Mycoplasma
(c) Bacteria
(d) Algae
Answer:
(b) Mycoplasma

Question 67.
Pleuropneumonia is caused by …………… .
(a) bacteria
(b) fungi
(c) mycoplasma
(d) viruses
Answer:
(c) mycoplasma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 68.
…………… is also called as Ray fungi.
(a) Basidiomycetes
(b) Ascomycetes
(c) Actinomycetes
(d) Deuteromycetes
Answer:
(c) Actinomycetes

Question 69.
Earthy odour of soil after rain is due to …………… .
(a) Basidiomycetes
(b) Ascomycetes
(c) Actinomycetes
(d) Deuteromycetes
Answer:
(c) Actinomycetes

Question 70.
Viruses that attack blue green algae are called as …………… .
(a) Mycophages
(b) Phycophages
(c) Cyanophages
(d) Bacteriophages
Answer:
(c) Cyanophages

Question 71.
Cell membrane of Archaebacteria has …………… .
(a) glycine and isopropyl ethers
(b) glycerol and isobutyl ethers
(c) glycerol and isopropyl ethers
(d) cellulose and isobutyl ethers
Answer:
(c) glycerol and isopropyl ethers

Question 72.
Which is a true bacteria?
(a) Halobacterium
(b) Thermoplasma
(c) Methanobacteriurn
(d) Azotobacter
Answer:
(d) Azolobacter

Question 73.
Study of fungus is called as …………… .
(a) phycology
(b) mycology
(c) algology
(d) biology
Answer:
(b) mycology

Question 74.
Who is considered as the founder of mycology?
(a) K.C.Mehta
(b) G.C.Ainsworth
(c) P.A.Micheli
(d) T.S.Sadasivan
Answer:
(c) P.A.Micheli

Question 75.
Asexual phase of fungi is called as …………… .
(a) telomorph
(b) holomorph
(c) metamorph
(d) anamorph
Answer:
(d) anamorph

Question 76.
In which mycelium, the hyphae are arranged loosely?
(a) Prosenchyma
(b) Plectenchyma
(c) Pseudoparenchyrna
(d) Arenchyma
Answer:
(a) Prosenchyma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 77.
Number of nuclei in coenocytic mycelium …………… .
(a) 2
(b) many
(c) nil
(d) 9
Answer:
(b) many

Question 78.
Thallospores are produced by …………… .
(a) Aspergillus
(b) Erysiphe
(c) Saccharomyces
(d) Fusarium
Answer:
(b) Erysiphe

Question 79.
In Agaricus, …………… type of sexual reproduction occurs.
(a) spermatization
(b) somatogamy
(c) oogamy
(d) isogamy
Answer:
(b) somatogamy

Question 80.
Albugo belongs to …………… .
(a) oomycetcs
(b) zygomycetes
(c) ascomycetes
(d) deuteromycetes
Answer:
(a) oomycetes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 81.
Fungi growing on dung is called as …………… .
(a) Mold fungus
(b) Saprophytes
(c) Capnophilous
(d) Coprophilous
Answer:
(d) Coprophilous

Question 82.
Coprophilous belongs to …………… group.
(a) basidiomycetes
(b) ascomycetes
(c) zygomycetes
(d) oomycetes
Answer:
(c) zygomycetes

Question 83.
Which of the following is a coprophilous fungi?
(a) Albugo
(b) Entomophthora
(c) Rhizopus
(d) Pilobolus
Answer:
(d) Pilobolus

Question 84.
Cup fungus belongs to …………… .
(a) zygomycetes
(b) oomycetes
(c) ascomycetes
(d) actinomycetes
Answer:
(c) ascomycetes

Question 85.
Which group of fungus is called as Sac fungi?
(a) Deuteromycetes
(b) Zygomycetes
(c) Ascomycetes
(d) Oomycetes
Answer:
(c) Ascomycetes

Question 86.
Number of ascospores in an asci is …………… .
(a) 2
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8
Answer:
(d) 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 87.
Shape of perithecium is …………… .
(a) cup shaped
(b) flask shaped
(c) completely closed
(d) open type
Answer:
(b) flask shaped

Question 88.
…………… are called as Club fungi.
(a) Ascomycetes
(b) Zygomycetes
(c) Basidiomycetes
(d) Deuteromycetes
Answer:
(c) Basidiomycetes

Question 89.
Parasexual cycle is observed in …………… .
(a) basidiomycetes
(b) zygomycetes
(c) deuteromycetes
(d) ascomycetes
Answer:
(c) deuteromycetes

Question 90.
Which is called as imperfect fungi?
(a) Basidiomycetes
(b) Zygomycetes
(c) Deuteromycetes
(d) Ascomycetes
Answer:
(c) Deuteromycetes

Question 91.
In basidiomycetes, clamp connections are formed to maintain …………… condition.
(a) monokaryotic
(b) coenocytic
(c) dikaryotic
(d) zygotic
Answer:
(c) dikaryotic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 92.
…………… is a single celled fungus used in dairy industry.
(a) Volvariella
(b) Agaricus
(c) Penicillin
(d) Yeast
Answer:
(d) Yeast

Question 93.
Ergot alkaloids are produced by …………… .
(a) Penicillium notatum
(b) Acremonium chrysogenum
(c) Claviceps purpurea
(d) Penicillium griseofulvum
Answer:
(c) Claviceps purpurea

Question 94.
Kojic acid is produced by …………… .
(a) Aspergillus terreus
(b) Aspergillus niger
(c) Aspeigillus oryzae
(d) Agaricus hisporus
Answer:
(c) Aspergillus oryzae

Question 95.
…………… infest dried foods and produce carcinogenic toxin.
(a) Aspergillus flavus
(b) Amanita verna
(c) Amanita phalloides
(d) Rhizopus
Answer:
(a) Aspergillus flavus

Question 96.
Rust of wheat is produced by …………… .
(a) Albugo candida
(b) Puccinia graminis tritici
(c) Candida albicans
(d) Colletotrichum sps
Answer:
(b) Puccinia graminis tritici

Question 97.
VAM is a type of …………… .
(a) Endomycorrhiza
(b) Ectomycorrhiza
(c) Ectendomycorrhiza
(d) Endectomycorrhiza
Answer:
(a) Endomycorrhiza

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 98.
Algal partner of lichen is …………… .
(a) phycobiont
(b) phytobiont
(c) mycobiont
(d) both (a) & (c)
Answer:
(a) phycobiont

Question 99.
Asexual reproduction by Soredia is seen in …………… .
(a) fungi
(b) lichen
(c) mycorrhiza
(d) algae
Answer:
(b) lichen

Question 100.
Saxicolous lichen grow on …………… .
(a) ground
(b) bark
(c) wood
(d) rock
Answer:
(d) rock

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 101.
In leprose form of lichen distinct …………… layer is absent.
(a) fungal
(b) algal
(c) both
(d) none
Answer:
(a) fungal

Question 102.
…………… are used as pollution indicators.
(a) Algae
(b) Lichen
(c) Fungi
(d) Mycorrhiza
Answer:
(b) Lichen

Question 103.
…………… acid is obtained from lichen acting as antibiotics.
(a) Alginic
(b) Acetic
(c) Oxalic
(d) Usnic
Answer:
(d) Usnic.

II. Very Short Answer Type Questions 

Question 1.
Differentiate plant growth from animal growth.
Answer:
Plant Growth From Animal Growth:

S. No. Plant growth Animal growth
1. 1. Growth is indefinite. 1. Growth is definite.
2. 2. It occurs throughout life. 2. It occurs for some period.

Question 2.
Define Growth.
Answer:
Growth is an intrinsic property of all living organisms through which they can increase cells both in number and mass.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 3.
Growth of living thing is an intrinsic property – Justify.
Answer:
Living cells grow by the addition of new protoplasm within the cells. Therefore, growth in living thing is intrinsic.

Question 4.
Define reproduction and Mention its types.
Answer:
Reproduction is the tendency of a living organism to perpetuate its own species. There are two types of reproduction namely asexual and sexual.

Question 5.
What is metabolism? Mention its types.
Answer:
The sum total of all the chemical reactions taking place in a cell of living organism is called metabolism. It is broadly divided into anabolism and catabolism.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 6.
What is consciousness and irritability?
Answer:
Animals sense their surroundings by sense organs. This is called consciousness. Respond of plants to the stimuli is called irritability.

Question 7.
List out few attributes of living organisms.
Answer:
The attributes of living organisms are growth, metabolism, movement, reproduction, nutrition, excretion, etc.

Question 8.
Define cyclosis.
Answer:
The movement of cytoplasm inside the cell is called cytoplasmic streaming or cyclosis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 9.
How will you define viruses?
Answer:
Viruses are sub – microscopic, obligate intracellular parasites. They have nucleic acid core surrounded by protein coat.

Question 10.
Mention the size of Bacteriophage and tobacco mosaic virus (TMV).
Answer:
Bacteriophage measures about 10 – 100 nm in size. The size of TMV is 300 × 20 nm.

Question 11.
Classify viruses based on nature of nucleic acid with example.
Answer:
On the basis of nature of nucleic acid viruses are classified into four categories. They are viruses with ssDNA (Parvo viruses), dsDNA (Bacteriophages), ssRNA (TMV) and dsRNA (wound tumour virus).

Question 12.
Distinguish between deoxyviruses and riboviruses.
Answer:
Deoxyviruses and Riboviruses:

  1. Deoxyviruses: Viruses having DNA are called deoxyviruses. E.g. Animal viruses except HIV
  2. Riboviruses: Viruses having RNA are called riboviruses. E.g. Plant viruses except cauliflower mosaic virus (CMV)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 13.
Write the constituents of virions.
Answer:
The virion is made up of two constituents, a protein coat called capsid and a core called nucleic acid.

Question 14.
What are capsomeres?
Answer:
The protein coat of viruses is made up of approximately 2130 identical protein subunits called capsomeres.

Question 15.
Name the two types of phage multiplication.
Answer:
Phages multiply through two different types of life cycle:

  1. Lytic or Virulent cycle
  2. Lysogenic or Avirulent life cycle

Question 16.
What do you mean by a ‘ghost’ in virology?
Answer:
The empty protein coat left outside by the phage after penetrating the host cell is called as ghost.

Question 17.
What do you understand by “pinning” of phage?
Answer:
Once the contact is established between tail fibres of phase and bacterial cell, tail fibres bend to anchor the pins and base plate to the cell surface. This step is called pinning.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 18.
What is prophage?
Answer:
As soon as the phage injects its linear DNA into the host cell, it becomes circular and integrates into the bacterial chromosome by recombination. The integrated phage DNA is now called prophage.

Question 19.
When does a prophage enters lytic cycle?
Answer:
On exposure to UV radiation and chemicals the excision of phage DNA may occur and results in lytic cycle.

Question 20.
Define virion?
Answer:
Virion is an intact infective virus particle which is non – replicating outside a host cell.

Question 21.
What are viroids?
Answer:
Viroid is a circular molecule of ssRNA without a capsid. RNA is of low molecular weight.

Question 22.
Name any two disease caused by viroids.
Answer:
Two Disease:

  1. Citrus exocortis
  2. Potato spindle tuber disease

Question 23.
What are virusoids?
Answer:
Virusoids are the small circular RNAs which are similar to viroids but they are always linked with larger molecules of the viral RNA.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 24.
Who discovered viroids and virusolds?
Answer:
Viroids were discovered by T.O. Diener in 1971. Virusoids were discovered by J.W.Randles in 1981.

Question 25.
Name the causative organism for mad cow disease.
Answer:
Prions are the causative organisms for mad cow disease, Prions are the proteinaceous infectious particles.

Question 26.
What are cyanophages? Who reported it first?
Answer:
Viruses infecting blue green algae are called Cyanophages and are first reported by Safferman and Morris in the year 1963.

Question 27.
Name any two disease caused by Prions.
Answer:
Two Disease:

  1. Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy (BSE) (mad cow disease)
  2. Creutzfeldt – Jakob Disease (CJD)

Question 28.
What are mycophages? Who first reported it?
Answer:
Viruses infecting fungi are called mycophages or mycoviruses. Mycophages were first reported by Hollings in 1962.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 29.
Expand the following acronyms: (a) SARS and (b) AIDS.
Answer:
Acronyms:
(a) SARS: Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome
(b) AIDS: Acquired Immuno Deficiency Syndrome

Question 30.
Name the two groups of aninmals according to Aristotle.
Answer:
Two Groups of Aninmals:

  1. Enaima – animals with red blood.
  2. Anaima – animals without red blood.

Question 31.
Which are the major setbacks of Linnaeus classification?
Answer:
Linnaeus classification faced major setback because prokaryotes and eukaryotes were grouped together. Similarly fungi, heterotrophic organisms were placed along with the photosynthetic plants.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 32.
Name the viruses which are employed as potential insecticides?
Answer:
Cytoplasmic polyhedrosis Granulo viruses and Entomopox virus were employed as potential insecticides.

Question 33.
Who proposed five kingdom classification? Mention the five kingdoms.
Answer:
R.H. Whittaker proposed the five kingdom classification. It includes Monera, Protista, Fungi, Plantae and Animalia.

Question 34.
List out the criteria undertaken for Whittaker’s classification.
Answer:
The criteria adopted for the classification include cell structure, thallus organization, mode of nutrition, reproduction and phylogenetic relationship.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 35.
Point out the demerits of five kingdom classification.
Answer:
(a) The kingdom Monera and Protista accommodate both autotrophic and heterotrophic organisms, cell wall lacking and cell wall bearing organisms thus making these two groups more heterogeneous.
(b) Viruses were not included in the system.

Question 36.
Who proposed six kingdom classification? Mention the kingdoms.
Answer:
Thomas Cavalier – Smith proposed six kingdom classification.
The kingdom includes:

  1. Archaebacteria
  2. Eubacteria
  3. Protista
  4. Fungi
  5. Plantae and
  6. Animalia.

Question 37.
How milk is changed into curd, if a few drops of curd is added to it? What is the reason for its sourness?
Answer:
The change is brought by Lactobacillus lactis, a bacterium present in the curd. The sourness is due to the formation of lactic acid.

Question 38.
Define bacteria and bacteriology.
Answer:
Bacteria are prokaryotic, unicellular, ubiquitous, microscopic organisms. The study of bacteria is called bacteriology.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 39.
What is Porin? How it helps the bacteria?
Answer:
Porin is an abundant polypeptide present in bacterial cell walls. It helps in the diffusion of solutes.

Question 40.
List out the cytoplasmic inclusions of bacterial cell.
Answer:
Glycogen, poly-β-hydroxybutyrate granules, sulphur granules and gas vesicles.

Question 41.
Define Genophore.
Answer:
The bacterial chromosome is a single circular DNA molecule, tightly coiled and is not enclosed in a membrane as in Eukaryotes. This genetic material is called nucleoid or genophore.

Question 42.
Write the chemical composition of bacterial cell wall.
Answer:
The chemical composition of cell wall is rather complex and is made up of peptidoglycan or mucopeptide (N – acetyl glucosamine, N – acetyl muramic acid and peptide chain of 4 or 5 aminoacids).

Question 43.
What are polysomes?
Answer:
During protein synthesis, the ribosomes are held together by mRNA and form the polysomes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 44.
What are Pili?
Answer:
Pili or fimbriae are hair like appendages found on surface of cell wall of gram – negative bacteria.

Question 45.
What are capnophilic bacteria? Give an example.
Answer:
Bacteria which require CO2 for their growth are called as capnophilic bacteria.
Example: Campylobacter.

Question 46.
Distinguish between Photolithotrophs and Photoorganotrophs.
Answer:
Between Photolithotrophs and Photoorganotrophs:

  1. Photolithotrophs: In photolithotrophs, the hydrogen donor is an inorganic substance. E.g. Chlorobium
  2. Photoorganotrophs: In Photoorganotrophs, the hydrogen donor is an organic acid or alcohol. E.g. Rhodospirillum

Question 47.
Name the hydrogen donor of green sulphur bacteria and purple sulphur bacteria.
Answer:
Hydrogen donor of green sulphur bacteria is H2S. Hydrogen donor of purple sulphur bacteria is thiosulphate.

Question 48.
Name the bacterial pigment of green sulphur bacteria and purple sulphur bacteria.
Answer:
Bacteria’s:

  1. Green sulphur bacteria – Bacterioviridin
  2. Purple sulphur bacteria – Bacteriochlorophyll

Question 49.
What are endospores?
Answer:
Endospores are thick walled resting spores developed by bacteria during unfavourable condition.
E.g. Clostridium tetani produces endospores.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 50.
Mention the various ways by which genetic recombination occurs.
Answer:
Genetic recombination in bacteria occurs by conjugation, transduction and transformation.

Question 51.
Name the eminent persons who demonstrated the conjugation process.
Answer:
J. Lederberg and Edward L. Tatum.

Question 52.
What is transformation? Name the bacteriologist who described it.
Answer:
The Bacteriologist Who Described it:

  1. Transfer of DNA from one bacterium to another is called transformation.
  2. Fredrick Griffith demonstrated the transformation process.

Question 53.
Which organism and bacterial species was used in Griffith’s transformation experiment?
Answer:
Mice and Diplococcus pneumoniae.

Question 54.
List out the asexual modes of reproduction of bacteria.
Answer:
Asexual reproduction in bacteria includes binary fission, conidia formation and endospore formation.

Question 55.
Who discovered transduction? Define it.
Answer:
Zinder and Lederberg (1952) discovered transduction in Salmonella typhimurum. Phage mediated DNA transfer is called transduction.

Question 56.
Name any two bacterial species and the antibiotic produced by them.
Answer:

Bacteria Antibiotic
1. Streptomyces griseus 1. Streptomycin
2. Bacillus polymyxa 2. Polymyxin

Question 57.
How bacteria helps in vinegar production?
Answer:
Acetobacter aceti bacteria oxidises ethanol obtained from molasses by fermentation to form vinegar.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 58.
Name any two ammonifying bacteria.
Answer:
Two Ammonifying Bacteria:

  1. Bacillus ramosus and
  2. Bacillus mycoides.

Question 59.
What do you mean by retting of fibres?
Answer:
The fibres from the fibre yielding plants are separated by the action of Closiridium is called retting of fibres.

Question 60.
Name any two plant disease caused by the bacteria and mention the host.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 5

Question 61.
Name any four animal disease caused by bacteria.
Answer:
Four Animal Disease:

  1. Anthrax
  2. Brucellosis
  3. Bovine tuberculosis and
  4. black leg.

Question 62.
Name any four human disease caused by bacteria.
Answer:
Four Human Disease:

  1. Cholera
  2. Typhoid
  3. Tuberculosis and
  4. Leprosy.

Question 63.
What are Archaebacteria?
Answer:
Archaebacteria are primitive prokaryotes and are adapted to thrive in extreme environments like hot springs, high salinity and low pH.
E.g., Thermoplasma.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 64.
How stromatolites are formed?
Answer:
Stromatolites are deposits formed when colonies of cyanobacteria bind with calcium carbonate.

Question 65.
What is the reason for the colour of Red Sea?
Answer:
A cyanobacteria called Trichodesmium erythraeum imparts red colour to sea.

Question 66.
Mention the cyanobacteria leading endophytic relation with Cycas roots.
Answer:
Nostoc and Anabaena.

Question 67.
Define Cyanobacteria.
Answer:
Cyanobacteria are popularly called as ‘Blue green algae’ or ‘Cyanophyceae’. They are photosynthetic, prokaryotic organisms. Cyanobacteria are primitive forms and are found in different habitats.

Question 68.
Blue green algae can also be called as Myxophyceae. How?
Answer:
The presence of mucilage around the thallus is characteristic feature of cyanobacteria group. Therefore, this group is also called Myxophyceae.

Question 69.
Define mycoplasma?
Answer:
The mycoplasma are very small (0.1 – 0.5 μm), pleomorphic gram negative microorganisms.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 70.
Name few plant disease caused by mycoplasma.
Answer:
Little leaf of brinjal, witches broom of legumes, phyllody of cloves and sandal spike are some plant diseases caused by mycoplasma.

Question 71.
Draw and label the structure of mycoplasma.
Answer:
The Structure of Mycoplasma:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 6

Question 72.
What is the reason behind the earthy odour after raining?
Answer:
Streptomyces is a mycelial forming Actinobacteria which lives in soil, they impart “earthy odour” to soil after rain which is due to the presence of geosmines (volatile organic compound).

Question 73.
When and by whom the penicillin was discovered?
Answer:
Penicillin was discovered by Alexander Flemming in 1928.

Question 74.
Define Fungi.
Answer:
Fungi are ubiquitous, eukaryotic, achlorophyllous heterotrophic organisms. They exist in unicellular or multicellular forms.

Question 75.
Define mycology. Who is the founder of mycology?
Answer:
Study of fungi is called mycology. P.A. Micheli is considered as the founder of mycology.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 76.
Name few eminent Mycologists.
Answer:
John Webster, G.C. Ainsworth, T.S. Sadasivan and C.V. Subramanian.

Question 77.
With example define coenocytic mycelium.
Answer:
In lower fungi the hypha is aseptate, multinucleate and is known as coenocytic mycelium (Example: Albugo).

Question 78.
What is plectenchyma? Mention its types.
Answer:
The mycelium is organised into loosely or compactly interwoven fungal tissues called plectenchyma. It is further divided into two types: prosenchyma and pseudoparenchyma.

Question 79.
Distinguish between Anamorph and Telomorph.
Answer:
Between Anamorph and Telomorph:

Anamorph Telomorph
The asexual phase of fungi is called anamorph. The sexual phase of fungi is called telomorph.

Question 80.
What is holomorph?
Answer:
Fungi showing both sexual and asexual phases are called holomorph.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 81.
What is planogametic copulation? Mention its types.
Answer:
Fusion of motile gamete is called planogametic copulation.
Types:

  1. Isogamy
  2. Anisogamy and
  3. Oogamy.

Question 82.
List out the asexual spores produced by fungus.
Answer:
Zoospores, conidia, oidia and chlamydospores.

Question 83.
What are coprophilous fungi? Give an example.
Answer:
Fungi growing on dung are called coprophilous fungi.
Example: Pilobolus.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 84.
Ascomycetes are called sac fungi. Give reason.
Answer:
In ascomycetes the ascospores are found inside a bag like structure called ascus. Due to the presence of ascus, this group is popularly called “Sac fungi”.

Question 85.
Name the four types of ascocarps produced by ascomycetes.
Answer:
Four Types Of Ascocarps Produced By Ascomycetes:

  1. Cleistothecium
  2. Perithecium
  3. Apothecium and
  4. Pseudothecium.

Question 86.
Basidiomycetes are called club fungi. Give reason.
Answer:
In basidiomycetes the basidium is club shaped with four basidiospores, thus this group of fungi is popularly called “Club fungi”. The fruit body formed is called Basidiocarp.

Question 87.
Name the special structures in deuteromycetes that produces conidia.
Answer:
Pycnidium, acervulus, sporodochium and synnemata.

Question 88.
Deuteromycetes are imperfect fungi – Justify.
Answer:
The fungi belonging to deuteromycetes lack sexual reproduction and are called imperfect fungi.

Question 89.
List out the antibiotics produced by fungi.
Answer:
Penicillin, cephalosporins and griseofiilvin.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 90.
Name some toxins produced by Fungus.
Answer:
Alfatoxin, Patulin and Ochratoxin – A.

Question 91.
Name 2 fungal species employed as Biopesticides.
Answer:
Two Fungal Species Employed As Biopesticides:

  1. Beauveria bassiana and
  2. Metarhizium anisopliae.

Question 92.
Name few fungal diseases in plants.
Answer:
Blast of paddy, rust of wheat, red rot of sugarcane and white rust of crucifers.

Question 93.
Name few fungal diseases in Humans?
Answer:
Fungal Diseases in Humans:

S. No. Human Diseases Causative Fungi
1. Athlete’s foot Epidermophyton floccosum
2. Candidiasis Candida albicans
3. Coccidioidomycosis Coccidioides immitis
4. Aspergillosis Aspergillus fumigatus

Question 94.
What is mycorrhiza?
Answer:
The symbiotic association between fungal mycelium and roots of plants is called as mycorrhiza.

Question 95.
What are 3 types of mycorrhiza?

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World
Answer:
3 types of mycorrhiza:

  1. Ectomycorrhiza
  2. Endomycorrhiza and
  3. Ectendomycorrhiza

Question 96.
Define lichen.
Answer:
Lichen is a symbiotic association between algae and fungi.

Question 97.
What is a phycobiont and mycobiont?
Answer:
Fungal partner of lichen is called as mycobiont. Algal partner of lichen is called as phycobiont.

Question 98.
How symbiosis workout in lichen?
Answer:
In lichens, algae provide nutrition for fungal partner in turn fungi provide protection and also help to fix the thallus to the substratum through rhizinae.

Question 99.
Classify lichens based on morphology.
Answer:
Morphology:

  1. Leprose – Absence of distinct fungal layer
  2. Crustose – Crust-like
  3. Foliose – Leaf-like
  4. Fruticose – Branched pendulous shrub-like

Question 100.
What is homoiomerous and heteromerous?
Answer:
In homoiomerous (algal cells evenly distributed in the thallus) and heteromerous (a distinct layer of algae and fungi present).

Question 101.
Define ascolichen and basidiolichen.
Answer:
If the fungal partner of lichen belongs to ascomycetes, it is called ascolichen and if it is basidiomycetes it is called basidiolichen.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 102.
Lichens are pollution indicators. How?
Answer:
Lichens are sensitive to air pollutants especially to sulphur-di-oxide. Therefore, they are considered as pollution indicators.

Question 103.
Classify lichens based on habitat.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 7

III. Short Answer Type Questions (3 Marks)

Question 1.
Distinguish between Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes.
Answer:
Between Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 8

Question 2.
List out various types of asexual reproduction in living organisms.
Answer:
Reproduction in Living Organisms:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 9

Question 3.
Define Homeostasis. Why it is essential?
Answer:
Property of self – regulation and tendency to maintain a steady state within an external environment which is liable to change is called homeostasis. It is essential for the living organism to maintain internal condition to survive in the environment.

Question 4.
Viruses are considered as biological puzzle – Justify.
Answer:
Viruses are considered as biological puzzle since they exhibit both living and non – living characters.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 5.
State the 3 types of viral symmetry.
Answer:
3 Types Of Viral Symmetry:

  1. Cuboid symmetry – Example: Adenovirus and Herpes virus.
  2. Helical symmetry – Example: Influenza virus and TMV.
  3. Complex or Atypical – Example: Bacteriophage and Vaccinia virus.

Question 6.
List out the non – living characters of viruses.
Answer:
The non – living characters of viruses:

  • Can be crystallized.
  • Absence of metabolism.
  • Inactive outside the host.
  • Do not show functional autonomy.
  • Energy producing enzyme system is absent.

Question 7.
Name any one RNA animal virus and DNA plant virus.
Answer:
RNA animal virus and DNA plant virus:L

  1. RNA animal virus is HIV.
  2. DNA plant virus is Cauliflower mosaic virus.

Question 8.
What are the prominent symptoms of TMV affected tobacco plants?
Answer:
The first visible symptom of TMV is discoloration of leaf colour along the veins and show typical yellow and green mottling which is the mosaic symptom. The downward curling and distortion of young apical leaves occurs, plant becomes stunted and yield is affected.

Question 9.
What are bacteriophages? Where can we find it?
Answer:
Viruses infecting bacteria are called bacteriophages. It literally means ‘eaters of bacteria’. Phages are abundant in soil, sewage water, fruits, vegetables and milk.

Question 10.
Sequencely mention the types of lytic cycle.
Answer:
Types of Lytic Cycle:

  1. Adsorption
  2. penetration
  3. synthesis
  4. assembly
  5. maturation and
  6. release.

Question 11.
Why classification of organisms is important?
Answer:
Classification is essential to achieve following needs:

  1. To relate things based on common characteristic features.
  2. To define organisms based on the salient features.
  3. Helps in knowing the relationship amongst different groups of organisms.
  4. It helps in understanding the evolutionary relationship between organisms.

Question 12.
List out the merits of five kingdom classification.
Answer:
Five kingdom Classification:

  1. The classification is based on the complexity of cell structure and organization of thallus.
  2. It is based on the mode of nutrition.
  3. Separation of fungi from plants.
  4. It shows the phylogeny of the organisms.

Question 13.
Who is called as founder of modern bacteriology? Mention his contribution?
Answer:
Robert Heinrich Hermann Koch is considered as the founder of modern bacteriology. He identified the causal organism for Anthrax. Cholera and Tuberculosis. He proved experimental evidence for the concept of infection (Koch’s postulates).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 14.
Draw Amphitrichous, Lophotrichous and Peritrichous flagellation in bacteria.
Answer:
Amphitrichous, Lophotrichous and Peritrichous flagellation in bacteria:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 10

Question 15.
What are the three layers of bacterial cell?
Answer:
The bacterial cell reveals three layers:

  1. capsule / glycocalyx
  2. cell wall and
  3. cytoplasm.

Question 16.
What is a capsule? Mention its role.
Answer:
Some bacteria are surrounded by a gelatinous substance which is composed of polysaccharides or polypeptide or both. A thick layer of glycocalyx bound tightly to the cell wall is called capsule. It protects cell from desiccation and antibiotics. The sticky nature helps them to attach to substrates like plant root surfaces, Human teeth and tissues. It helps to retain the nutrients in bacterial cell.

Question 17.
What are plasmids? How it helps the bacteria?
Answer:
Plasmids are extrachromosomal double stranded, circular, self-replicating, autonomous elements. They contain genes for fertility, antibiotic resistant and heavy metals. It also help in the production of bacteriocins and toxins which are not found in bacterial chromosome.

Question 18.
Classfiy plasmids based on function.
Answer:
Plasmids are classified into different types based on the function. Some of them are F (Fertility) factor, R (Resistance) plasmids, Col (Colicin) plasmids, Ri (Root inducing) plasmids and Ti (Tumor inducing) plasmids.

Question 19.
Give a brief note on Mesosomes.
Answer:
Mesosomes are localized infoldings of plasma membrane produced into the cell in the form of vesicles, tubules and lamellae. They are clumped and folded together to maximize their surface area and helps in respiration and in binary fission.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 20.
How Gram positive and Gram negative bacteria react on Gram staining process?
Answer:
The Gram positive bacteria retain crystal violet and appear dark violet, whereas Gram negative type loose the crystal violet and when counterstained by safranin appear red under a microscope.

Question 21.
Name the three components of gram negative cell wall.
Answer:
Three Components Of Gram Negative Cell Wall:

  1. Lipoprotein
  2. outermembrane and
  3. lipopolysaccharide.

Question 22.
What are Magnetosomes?
Answer:
Intracellular chains of 40 – 50 magnetite (Fe3O4) particles are found in bacterium Aquaspirillum magnetotacticum and it helps the bacterium to locate nutrient rich sediments.

Question 23.
Write a note on binary fission.
Answer:
Under favourable conditions the cell divides into two daughter cells. The nuclear material divides first and it is followed by the formation of a simple median constriction which finally results in the separation of two cells.

Question 24.
How do archaebacteria thrive at extreme temperatures and against lytic agents?
Answer:
The unique feature of archaebacteria is the presence of lipids like glycerol and isopropyl ethers in their cell membrane. Due to the unique chemical composition the cell membrane show resistance against cell wall antibiotics and lytic agents.
E.g. Methanobacterium.

Question 25.
Name few members of cyanobacteria which act as phycobiont in lichen thalli.
Answer:
Gloeocapsa, Nostoc and Scytonema.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 26.
Describe in brief about Actinomycetes.
Answer:
Actinomycetes are also called ‘Ray fungi’ due to their mycelia like growth. They are anaerobic or facultative anaerobic microorganisms and are Gram positive. They do not produce an aerial mycelium. Their DNA contain high guanine and cytosine content (E.g., Streptomyces).

Question 27.
Mention few antibiotics produced by Streptomyces group of fungi.
Answer:
Streptomycin, Chloramphenicol and Tetracycline.

Question 28.
Explain in brief about the plant body of fungi?
Answer:
Majority of fungi are made up of thin, filamentous branched structures called hyphae. A number of hyphae get interwoven to form mycelium. The cell wall of fungi is made up of a polysaccharide called chitin (polymer of N – acetyl glucosamine).

Question 29.
Point out the steps involved in sexual reproduction of fungi.
Answer:
Sexual reproduction in fungi includes three steps:

  1. Fusion of two protoplasts (plasmogamy)
  2. Fusion of nuclei (karyogamy) and
  3. Production of haploid spores through meiosis.

Question 30.
Differentiate between Anisogamy and Oogamy with an example of fungus.
Answer:
Between Anisogamy and Oogamy with an example of fungus:

Anisogamy

Oogamy

Fusion of morphologically or physiologically dissimilar gametes.
E.g. Allomyces
Fusion of both morphologically and physiologically dissimilar gametes.
E.g. Monoblepharis

Question 31.
Define Spermatization.
Answer:
In spermatization method a uninucleate pycniospore / microconidium is transferred to receptive hyphal cell (Example: PuccinialNeurospora).

Question 32.
Draw a simple diagram showing the budding of yeast.
Answer:
Diagram showing the budding of yeast:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 11

Question 33.
Write a simple note on Oomycetes.
Answer:
Coenocytic mycelium is present. The cell wall is made up of glucan and cellulose. Zoospore with one whiplash and one tinsel flagellum is present. Sexual reproduction is Oogamous.
Example: Albugo.

Question 34.
Give a brief account on fungal food.
Answer:
Mushrooms like Lentinus edodes. Agaricus bisporus and Volvariella volvaceae are consumed for their high nutritive value. Yeasts provide vitamin B and Eremothecium ashbyii is a rich source of vitamin B12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 35.
List out the importance of mycorrhiza.
Answer:
The Importance Of Mycorrhiza:

  1. Helps to derive nutrition in Monotropa, a saprophytic angiosperm.
  2. Improves the availability of minerals and water to the plants.
  3. Provides drought resistance to the plants.
  4. Protects roots of higher plants from the attack of plant pathogens.

Question 36.
How symbiotic relationship is executed in mycorrhiza?
Answer:
In mycorrihiza, relationship fungi absorbs nutrition from the root and in turn the hyphal network of mycorrhiza forming fungi helps the plant to absorb water and mineral nutrients from the soil.

IV. Long Answer Type Questions (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Define metabolism. List out the differences between the types of metabolism.
Answer:
Metabolism: The sum total of all the chemical reactions taking place in a cell of living organism is called metabolism. It is broadly divided into anabolism and catabolism. The difference between anabolism and catabolism is given in table.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 12

Question 2.
Draw a flow chart representing the various levels of organisation and integration in living organisms.
Answer:
A flow chart representing the various levels of organisation and integration in living organisms:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 13

Question 3.
Enumerate the living and non – living characters of viruses.
Answer:
Living characters:

  1. Presence of nucleic acid and protein.
  2. Capable of mutation.
  3. Ability to multiply within living cells.
  4. Able to infect and cause diseases in living beings.
  5. Show irritability.
  6. Host – specific.

Non – living characters:

  1. Can be crystallized.
  2. Absence of metabolism.
  3. Inactive outside the host.
  4. Do not show functional autonomy,
  5. Energy producing enzyme system is absent.

Question 4.
Draw and describe the structure of tobacco mosaic virus.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 14
Electron microscopic studies have revealed that TMV is a rod shaped helical virus measuring about 280 × 150 pm with a molecular weight of 39 × 106 Daltons. The virion is made up of two constituents, a protein coat called capsid and a core called nucleic acid. The protein coat is made up of approximately 2130 identical protein subunits called capsomeres which are present around a central single stranded RNA molecule. The genetic information necessary for the formation of a complete TMV particle is contained in its RNA. The RNA consists of 6,500 nucleotides.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 5.
Write a note on David Baltimore’s classification of viruses.
Answer:
David Baltimore (1971) classification is based on mechanism of RNA production, the nature of the genome (single stranded -ss or double stranded – ds ), RNA or DNA, the use of reverse transcriptase (RT), ss RNA may be (+) sense or (-) antisense. Viruses are classified into seven classes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 15

Question 6.
Give an account of viral genome.
Answer:
Each virus possesses only one type of nucleic acid either DNA or RNA. The nucleic acid may be in a linear or circular form. Generally nucleic acid is present as a single unit but in wound tumour virus and in influenza virus it is found in segments. The viruses possessing DNA are called ‘Deoxyviruses’ whereas those possessing RNA are called ‘Riboviruses’.

Majority of animal and bacterial viruses are DNA viruses (HIV is the animal virus which possess RNA). Plant viruses generally contain RNA (Cauliflower Mosaic virus possess DNA). The nucleic acids may be single stranded or double stranded. On the basis of nature of nucleic acid viruses are classified into four categories. They are viruses with ssDNA (Parvo viruses), dsDNA (Bacteriophages), ssRNA (TMV) and dsRNA (wound tumour virus).

Question 7.
Explain the structure of T4 bacteriophage with a labelled diagram.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 16
The T4 phage is tadpole shaped and consists of head, collar, tail, base plate and fibres (figure). The head is hexagonal which consists of about 2000 identical protein subunits. The long helical tail consists of an inner tubular core which is connected to the head by a collar. There is a base plate attached to the end of tail The base plate contains six spikes and tail fibres. These fibres are used to attach the phage on the cell wall of bacterial host during replication. A dsDNA molecule of about 50 μm is tightly packed inside the head. The DNA is about 1000 times longer than the phage itself.

Question 8.
Describe in detail about the lytic cycle of phages with diagram.
Answer:
Lytic cycle: During lytic cycle of phage, dis integration of host bacterial cell occurs and the progeny virions are released.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 17
The steps involved in the lytic cycle are as follows:
(i) Adsorption: Phage (T4) particles interact with cell wall of host (E. coli). The phage tail makes contact between the two, and tail fibres recognize the specific receptor sites present on bacterial cell surface. The lipopolysaccharides of tail fibres act as receptor in phages. The process involving the recognition of phage to bacterium is called landing. Once the contact is established between tail fibres of phage and bacterial cell, tail fibres bend to anchor the pins and base plate to the cell surface. This step is called pinning.

(ii) Penetration: The penetration process involves mechanical and enzymatic digestion of the cell wall of the host. At the recognition site phage digests certain cell wall structure by viral enzyme (Jysozyrne). After pinning the tail sheath contracts (using ATP) and appears shorter and thicker. After contraction of the base plate enlarges through which DNA is injected into the cell wall without using metabolic energy. The step involving injection of DNA particle alone into the bacterial cell is called Transfection. The empty protein coat leaving outside the cell is known as ‘ghost’.

(iii) Synthesis: This step involves the degradation of bacterial chromosome, protein synthesis and DNA replication. The phage nucleic acid takes over the host biosynthetic machinery. Host DNA gets inactivated and breaks down. Phage DNA suppresses the synthesis of bacterial protein and directs the metabolism of the cell to synthesis the proteins of the phage particles and simultaneously replication of phage DNA also takes place.

(iv) Assembly and Maturation: The DNA of the phage and protein coat are synthesized separately and are assembled to form phage particles. The process of assembling the phage particles is known as maturation. After 20 minutes of infection about 300 new phages are assembled

(v) Release: The phage particle gets accumulated inside the host cell and are released by the lysis of the host cell wall

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World.

Question 9.
Explain the lysogenic multiplication of phages.
Answer:
In the lysogenic cycle the phage DNA gets integrated into host DNA and gets multiplied along with nucleic acid of the host. No independent viral particle is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 18
As soon as the phage injects its linear DNA into the host cell, it becomes circular and integrates into the bacterial chromosome by recombination. The integrated phage DNA is now called prophage. The activity of the prophage gene is repressed by two repressor proteins which are synthesized by phage genes. This checks the synthesis of new phages within the host cell. However, each time the bacterial cell divides, the prophage multiplies along with the bacterial chromosome. On exposure to UV radiation and chemicals the excision of phage DNA may occur and results in lytic cycle.

Question 10.
Draw a tabular column and compare the characters of five kingdoms.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 19

Question 11.
List out the general characters of bacteria.
Answer:
The General Characters of Bacteria:

  1. They are prokaryotic organisms and lack nuclear membrane and membrane bound organelles.
  2. The genetic material is called nucleoid or genophore or incipient nucleus.
  3. The cell wall is made up of polysaccharides and proteins.
  4. Most of them lack chlorophyll, hence they are heterotrophic (Vibrio cholerae) but some are autotrophic and possess Bacteriochlorophyll (Chromatium).
  5. They reproduce vegetatively by binary fission and endospore formation.
  6. They exhibit variations which are due to genetic recombination and is achieved through conjugation, transformation and transduction.

Question 12.
Draw and label the ultra structure of a bacterium.
Answer:
The ultra structure of a bacterium:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 22

Question 13.
Write in detail about Plasmids.
Answer:
Plasmids are extrachromosomal double stranded, circular, self – replicating, autonomous elements. They contain genes for fertility, antibiotic resistant and heavy metals. It also help 1 in the production of bacteriocins and toxins which are not found in bacterial chromosome.

The size of a plasmid varies from 1 to 500 kb usually plasmids contribute to about 0.5 to 5% of the total DNA of bacteria. The number of plasmids per cell varies. Plasmids are classified into different types based on the function. Some of them are F (Fertility) factor, R (Resistance) plasmids, Col (Colicin) plasmids, Ri (Root inducing) plasmids and Ti (Tumour inducing) plasmids.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 14.
Describe the structure of Gram positive and Gram negative bacterial cell wall using diagram.
Answer:
Most of the gram positive cell wall contain considerable amount of teichoic acid and teichuronic acid. In addition, they may contain polysaccharide molecules. The gram negative cell wall contains three components that lie outside the peptidoglycan layer:

  1. Lipoprotein
  2. Outer membrane and
  3. Lipopolysaccharide.

Thus the different results in the gram stain are due to differences in the structure and composition of the cell wall.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 21

Question 15.
Tabulate the differences between Gram positive and Gram negative bacteria.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 23

Question 16.
Give an account on respiration types of bacteria.
Answer:
Two types of respiration is found in bacteria.
They are:

  1. Aerobic respiration
  2. Anaerobic respiration

1. Aerobic respiration: These bacteria require oxygen as terminal acceptor and will not grow under anaerobic conditions (i.e. in the absence of O2) Example: Streptococcus.

(i) Obligate aerobes: Some Micrococcus species are obligate aerobes (i.e. they must have 1 oxygen to survive).

2. Anaerobic respiration:
These bacteria do not use oxygen for growth and metabolism but obtain their energy from fermentation reactions. Example: Clostridium.

(i) Facultative anaerobes: There are bacteria that can grow either using oxygen as a terminal electron acceptor or anaerobically using fermentation reaction to obtain energy. When a facultative anaerobe such as E. coli is present at a site of infection like an abdominal abscess, it can rapidly consume all available O2 and change to anaerobic metabolism producing an anaerobic environment and thus allow the anaerobic bacteria that are present to grow and cause disease.
Example: Escherichia coli and Salmonella.

(ii) Capnophilic bacteria: Bacteria which require CO2 for their growth are called as capnophilic bacteria.
Example: Campylobacter.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 17.
Explain the mode of nutrition in bacteria.
Answer:
On the basis of their mode of nutrition bacteria are classified into two types namely autotrophs and heterotrophs.
I. Autotrophic bacteria:
Bacteria which can synthesis their own food are called autotrophic bacteria. They may be further subdivided as

A. Photoautotrophic bacteria – Bacteria use sunlight as their source of energy to synthesize food. They may be:

  1. Photolithotrophs: In Photolithotrophs the hydrogen donor is an inorganic substance.
    • Green sulphur bacteria: In this type of bacteria the hydrogen donor is H2S and possess pigment called Bacterioviridin. Example: Chlorobium.
    • Purple sulphur bacteria: For bacteria belong to this group the hydrogen donor is thiosulphate, Bacteriochlorophyll is present. Chlorophyll containing chlorosomes are present. Example: Chromatium.
  2. Photoorganotrophs: They utilize organic acid or alcohol ‘as hydrogen donor. Example: Purple non-sulphur bacteria – Rhodospirillum.

B. Chemoautotrophic bacteria – They do not have photosynthetic pigment hence they cannot use sunlight energy. These type of bacteria obtain energy from organic or inorganic substance.

1. Chemolithotrophs: This type of bacteria oxidize inorganic compound to release energy.
Examples:

  • Sulphur bacteria – Thiobacillus thiooxidans
  • Iron bacteria – Ferrobacillus ferrooxidans
  • Hydrogen bacteria – Hydrogenomonas and
  • Nitrifying bacteria – Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter.

2. Chemoorganotrophs: This type of bacteria oxidize organic compounds to release energy.
Examples:

  • Methane bacteria – Methanococcus
  • Acetic acid bacteria – Acetobacter and
  • Lactic acid bacteria – Lactobacillus

II. Heterotrophic bacteria:
They are parasites (Clostridium and Mycobacterium), Saprophytes (Bacillus mycoides) or symbiotic (Rhizobium in root nodules of leguminous crops).

Question 18.
Describe the process of transformation.
Answer:
The process of transformation:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 24
Transfer of DNA from one bacterium to another is called transformation. In 1928, the bacteriologist Fredrick Griffith demonstrated transformation in mice using Diplococcus pneumoniae. Two strains of this bacterium are present. One strain produces smooth colonies and are virulent in nature (S type), in addition another strain produced rough colonies and are avirulent (R type). When S-type of cells were injected into the mouse, the mouse died. When R-type of cells were injected, the mouse survived. He injected heat killed S-type cells into the mouse the mouse did not die.

When the mixture of heat killed S-type cells and R-type cells were injected into the mouse. The mouse died. The avirulent rough strain of Diplococcus had been transformed into S-type cells. The hereditary material of heat killed S-type cells had transformed R-type cell into virulent smooth strains. Thus the phenomenon of changing the character of one strain by transferring the DNA of another strain into the former is called transformation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 19.
Define conjugation and its mechanism.
Answer:
J. Lederberg and Edward L Tatum demonstrated conjugation in E. coil in the year 1946. In this method of gene transfer the donor cell gets attached to the recipient cell with the help of pili.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 25
The pilus grows in size and forms the conjugation tube. The plasmid of donor cell which has the F+ (fertility factor) undergoes replication. Only one strand of DNA is transferred to the recipient cell through conjugation tube. The recipient completes the structure of double stranded DNA by synthesizing the strand that complements the strand acquired from the donor.

Question 20.
Write in detail about transduction and its types.
Answer:
Zinder and Lederhcrg (1952) discovered transduction in Salmonella typhimurum. Phage mediated DNA transfer is called transduction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 26
Transduction is of two types:

  1. Generalized transduction and
  2. Specialized or restricted transduction.

1. Generalized transduction: The ability of a bacteriophage to carryr genetic material of any region of bacterial DNA is called generalised transduction.

2. Specialized or restricted transduction: The ability of the bacteriophage to carry only a specific region of the bacterial DNA is called specialized or restricted transduction.

Question 21.
List out the uses of bacteria in industries.
Answer:
The uses of bacteria in industries:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 27

Question 22.
Explain the role of bacteria in antibiotic production and medicines.
Answer:
The role of bacteria in antibiotic production and medicines:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 28

Question 23.
Explain the role of bacteria in soil fertility.
Answer:
The role of bacteria in soil fertility:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 30

Question 24.
List out the salient features of cyanobacteria.
Answer:
The Salient Features Of Cyanobacteria:

  • The members of this group are prokaryotes and lack motile reproductive structures.
  • The thallus is unicellular in Chroococcus, colonial in Gloeocapsa and filamentous trichome in Nostoc.
  • Gliding movement is noticed in some species (Oscillatoria).
  • The protoplasm is differentiated into central region called centroplasm and peripheral region bearing chromatophore called chromoplasm.
  • The photosynthetic pigments include c-phyocyanin and c-phycoerythrin along with myxoxanthin and myxoxanthophyll.
  • The reserve food material is cyanophycean starch.
  • In some forms a large colourless cell is found in the terminal or intercalary position called heterocysts. They are involved in nitrogen fixation.
  • They reproduce only through vegetative methods and produce akinetes (thick wall dormant cell formed from vegetative cell), hormogonia (a portion of filament get detached and reproduce by cell division), fission and endospores.
  • The presence of mucilage around the thallus is characteristic feature of this group. Therefore, this group is also called Myxophyceae.
  • Sexual reproduction is absent.
  • Microcystis aeruginosa and Anabaena flos-aquae cause water blooms and release toxins and affect the aquatic organism. Most of them fix atmospheric nitrogen and are used as biofertilizers (Example: Nostoc and Anabaena). Spirulina is rich in protein hence it is used as single cell protein.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 25.
Explain the various types of asexual reproduction in fungi.
Answer:
The Various Types Of Asexual Reproduction In Fungi:

  1. Zoospores: They are flagellate structures produced in zoosporangia (Example: Chytrids)
  2. Conidia: The spores produced on condiophores (Example: Aspergillus)
  3. Oidia / Thallospores / Arthrospores: The hypha divide and develop into spores called oidia (Example: Erysiphe).
  4. Fission: The vegetative cell divide into 2 daughter cells. (Example: Schizosaccharomyces – yeast).
  5. Budding: A small outgrowth is developed on parent cell, which gets detached and become independent. (Example: Saccharomyces-yeast).
  6. Chlamydospore: Thick walled resting spores are called chlamydospores. (Example: Fusarium).

Question 26.
Explain the various types of sexual reproduction in fungi.
Answer:
The Various Types Of Sexual Reproduction In Fungi:

  1. Planogametic copulation: Fusion of motile gamete is called planogametic copulation.
    • Isogamy – Fusion of morphologically and physiologically similar gametes. (Example: Synchytrium).
    • Anisogamy – Fusion of morphologically or physiologically dissimilar gametes (Example: Allomyces).
    • Oogamy – Fusion of both morphologically and physiologically dissimilar gametes. (Example: Monoblepharis).
  2. Gametangial contact: During sexual reproduction a contact is established between antheridium and oogonium (Example: Albugo).
  3. Gametangial copulation: Fusion of gametangia to form zygospore. (Example: Mucor and Rhizopus).
  4. Spermatization: Auninucleate pycniospore/microconidium is transferred to receptive hyphal cell (Example: Puccinia / Neurospora)
  5. Somatogamy: Fusion of two somatic cells of the hyphae (Example: Agaricus).

Question 27.
List out the salient features of zygomycetes.
Answer:
The salient features of zygomycetes:

  1. Most of the species are saprophytic and live on decaying plant and animal matter in the soil. Some lead parasitic life (Example: Entomophthora on housefly)
  2. Bread mold fungi (Example: Mucor and Rhizopus) and Coprophilous fungi (Fungi growing on dung Example: Pilobolus) belong to this group.
  3. The mycelium is branched and coenocytic.
  4. Asexual reproduction by means of spores produced in sporangia.
  5. Sexual reproduction is by the fusion of the gametangia which results in thick walled zygospore. It remains dormant for long periods. The zygospore undergoes meiosis and produce spores.

Question 28.
List out the salient features of ascomycetes.
Answer:
Features of Ascomycetes:

  1. Ascomycetes include a wide range of fungi such as yeasts, powdery mildews, cup fungi, morels and so on.
  2. Although majority of the species live in terrestrial environment, some live in aquatic environments both fresh water and marine.
  3. The mycelium is well developed, branched with simple septum.
  4. Majority of them are saprophytes but few parasites are also known. (Powdery mildew – Erysiphe).
  5. Asexual reproduction takes place by fission, budding, oidia, conidia and chlamydospore.
  6. Sexual reproduction takes place by the fusion of two compatible nuclei.
  7. Plasmogamy is not immediately followed by karyogamy, instead a dikaryotic condition is prolonged for several generations.
  8. A special hyphae called ascogenous hyphae is formed.
  9. A crozier is formed when the tip of the ascogenous hyphae recurves forming a hooked cell. The two nuclei in the penultimate cell of the hypha fuse to form a diploid nucleus. This cell form young ascus.
  10. The diploid nucleus undergo meiotic division to produce four haploid nuclei, which further divide mitotically to form eight nuclei. The nucleus gets organised into 8 ascospores.
  11. The ascospores are found inside a bag-like structure called ascus. Due to the presence of ascus, this group is popularly called “Sac fungi”.
  12. Asci gets surrounded by sterile hyphae forming fruit body called ascocarp.
  13. There are 4 types of ascocarps namely Cleistothecium (Completely closed), Perithecium (Flask shaped with ostiole), Apothecium (Cup shaped and open type) and Pseudothecium.

Question 29.
List out the salient features of Basidiomycetes.
Answer:
Features of Basidiomycetes:

  1. Basidiomycetes include puffballs, toad stools, Bird nest’s fungi, Bracket fungi, stink horns, rusts and smuts.
  2. The members are terrestrial and lead a saprophytic and parasitic mode of life.
  3. The mycelium is well developed, septate with dolipore septum (bracket like). Three types of mycelium namely primary (Monokaryotic), secondary (Dikaryotic) and tertiary are found.
  4. Clamp connections are formed to maintain dikaryotic condition.
  5. Asexual reproduction is by means of conidia, oidia or budding.
  6. Sexual reproduction is present but sex organs are absent. Somatogamy or spermatisation results in plasmogamy. Karyogamy is delayed and dikaryotic phase is prolonged. Karyogamy takes place in basidium and it is immediately followed by meiotic division.
  7. The four nuclei thus formed are transformed into basidiospores which are borne on sterigmata outside the basidium (Exogenous). The basidium is club shaped with four basidiospores, thus this group of fungi is popularly called “Club fungi”. The fruit body formed is called Basidiocarp.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 30.
Compare the characters of different types of Mycorrhiza.
Answer:
The characters of different types of Mycorrhiza:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World 31

Question 31.
List out the beneficial aspects of lichens.
Answer:
The Beneficial Aspects of Lichens:

  1. Lichens secrete organic acids like oxalic acids which corrodes the rock surface and helps in weathering of rocks, thus acting as pioneers in Xerosere.
  2. Usnic acid produced from lichens show antibiotic properties.
  3. Lichens are sensitive to air pollutants especially to sulphur-di-oxide. Therefore, they are considered as pollution indicators.
  4. The dye present in litmus paper used as acid base indicator in the laboratories is obtained from Roccella montagnei.
  5. Cladonia rangiferina (Reindeer moss) is used as food for animals living in Tundra regions.

V. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTs)

Question 1.
Viruses and viroids are infectious particles. How do you differentiate one from other?
Answer:
Viruses and viroids are infectious particles:

S.No. Viruses Viroids
1. Viruses may have DNA or RNA as genetic material. Viroids has ssRNA as genetic material
2. Capsid is present Capsid is absent

Question 2.
In R.H. Whittaker’s classification, how many kingdoms come under prokaryotes and how many kingdoms come under eukaryotes.
Answer:
Monera is the only prokaryotic kingdom in Whittaker’s classification, whereas protista, fungi, plantae and animalia comes under eukaryotes.

Question 3.
Arrange the following in a proper sequence with respect to fungal sexual cycle. Karyogamy, protoplasmic fusion, meiosis and spores production.
Answer:
Protoplasmic fusion → Karyogamy → Meiosis → Spores production.

Question 4.
List out major attributes and features that a cell must possess to call it as a living one.
Answer:
Growth, reproduction, metabolism, nutrition, movement and irritability, etc.

Question 5.
In five kingdom classification, actinomycetes and mycoplasma belongs to same kingdom.
(a) Name the kingdom.
(b) Which level of body organization does they exhibit.
Answer:
Actinomycetes and Mycoplasma belongs to kingdom Monera. Moneras are unicellular organisms.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 6.
Viruses are useful to us – Justify. Majority of viruses are harmful, causing wide range of diseases among organisms. But certain viruses of Baculoviridae group are commercially used as insecticides.
Answer:
E.g. Cytoplasmic polyhedrosis granulo viruses and Entomopox viruses.

Question 7.
Write the appropriate term for each of the following:
(a) Complex sugar that makes fungal cell wall.
(b) Blue green algae
Answer:
(a) Chitin
(b) Cyanobacteria.

Question 8.
Why fungi is not placed under kingdom plantae, though it has cell wall?
Answer:
Though fungi has cell wall, it differs from plants in their mode of nourishment. Fungi shows heterotropic mode of nutrition, whereas plants are autotrophs.

Question 9.
Which organisms is more complex and highly evolved among blue green algae, mushroom and maize? Give reason.
Answer:
Maize plant is more complex and highly evolved as it is a eukaryotic and autotrophic organism, showing tissue grade organisation. The blue green algae is a unicellular prokaryote and mushroom is a fungus, which is heterotrophic with no tissue grade of organisation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 10.
Why viruses are not included in the category of microorganisms?
Answer:
Viruses possess characters of both living and non – living and also they does not have well defined body organisation. Hence they are not included in the category of microorganism.

Question 11.
Generally nucleic acid in viruses is present as single unit. Name any two viruses that possess segmented nucleic acid.
Answer:

  1. Wound tumour virus
  2. Influenza virus

Question 12.
Name any two recent viral diseases that threaten human life.
Answer:

  1. Ebola
  2. Nipah

Question 13.
When does a prophage enter lytic cycle?
Answer:
On exposure to UV radiation and chemicals, the prophage enters the lytic cycle.

Question 14.
Capsule layer helps the bacterium. How?
Answer:
Capsule in bacteria protects the cell from desiccation and antibiotics.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 1 Living World

Question 15.
Imagine yourself as Carl Woese and explain your colleagues about your classification.
Answer:
I (Carl Woese) classified the living organisms into three domains based on the differences in rRNA nucleotide sequence and lipid structure of the cell membrane. The three domains are Bacteria, Archae and Eukarya.

Question 16.
Name the strains used in Gram staining procedure.
Answer:
Crystal violet and safranin.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Students can Download Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4 Pdf, Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Papers helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

TN State Board 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Time: 2 1/2 Hours
Maximum Marks: 90

General Instructions:

  • The question paper comprises of four parts.
  • You are to attempt all the sections in each part. An internal choice of questions is provided wherever applicable.
  • All questions of Part I, II, III, and IV are to be attempted separately.
  • Question numbers 1 to 20 in Part I are Multiple Choice Questions of one mark each. These are to be answered by writing the correct answer along with the corresponding option code.
  • Part II has got two sections. The questions are of two marks each. Question numbers 21 to 26 in Section I and Question numbers 27 to 30 in Section II are to be answered in about one or two sentences each.
  • Question numbers 31 to 40 in Part III are of three marks each and have been divided in three sections. These are to be answered as directed.
  • Question numbers 41 and 47 in Part IV are of five marks each. These are to be answered as directed.

Part -1

I. Answer all the questions. [20 x 1= 20]

Choose the correct synonyms for the underlined words from the options given:

Question 1.
They had tangled hair.
(a) shiny (b) matted (c) straight (d) smooth
Answer:
(b) matted

Question 2.
The best manner of making it is the subject of violent disputes.
(a) agreements (b) applauses (c) conflicts (d) discussions
Answer:
(c) conflicts

Question 3.
Suffering seems cruelly prevalent in the world today.
(a) unique (b) uncommon (c) common (d) fair
Answer:
(c) common

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Choose the correct antonyms for the underlined words from the options given:

Question 4.
They wear over-sized high altitude boots.
(a) height (b) light (c) depth (d) sound
Answer:
(c) depth

Question 5.
I felt a sense of freedom.
(a) liberty (b) slavery (c) equality (d) fraternity
Answer:
(b) slavery

Question 6.
They were now frozen solid.
(a) thick (b) liquid (c) concrete (d) firm
Answer:
(b) liquid

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 7.
Choose the correct combination for the compound word “bleaching Powder”.
(a) Noun+ Verb (b) Verb + Noun (c) Gerund + Noun (d) Preposition + Noun
Answer:
(c) Gerund + Noun

Question 8.
Choose the correct expansion of CMO.
(a) Chief Marketing Officer (b) Chief Managing Officer (c) Chief Mediocre Officer (d) Chief Maritime Organisation
Answer:
(a) Chief Marketing Officer

Question 9.
Choose the meaning of the foreign word in the sentence:
‘Tina really loves to make croissants because they taste better than other types of bread’.
(a) sweater (b) pastry (c) beverage (d) soup
Answer:
(b) pastry

Question 10.
Choose the correct combination for the blended word “Brunch”.
(a) Break + lunch (b) Post + lunch (c) breaking + lunch (d) Breakfast + lunch
Answer:
(d) Breakfast + lunch

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 11.
Choose the clipped form of the word diskette.
(a) disk (b) disc (c) dike (d) kette
Answer:
(b) disc

Question 12.
A collection of selected literary passages is called
(a) Eulogy (b) Arthrology (c) Analogy (d) Anthology
Answer:
(d) Anthology

Question 13.
Form a derivative by adding the right prefix to the word experienced.
(a) re (b) in (c) un (d) dis
Answer:
(b) in

Question 14.
Fill in the blanks with a suitable relative pronoun.
Most of the girl students Mrs. Jeyaseela had informed came for the special class.
(a) which (b) who (c) whom (d) that
Answer:
(c) whom

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 15.
Fill in the blanks with a suitable preposition.
Shankar has been absent Tuesday.
(a) from (b) for (c) since (d) till
Answer:
(c) since

Question 16.
Choose the correct question tag for the following statement.
Amanda would like to get a scholarship,?
(a) wouldn’t she (b) was she (c) can’t she (d) has she
Answer:
(a) wouldn’t she

Question 17.
Choose the suitable meaning or idiom found in the following sentence.
I have given my bike to a new mechanic for service. Hope he delivers the goods!
(a) produce bike (b) to create a bike (c) give the bike (d) do what is expected or promised
Answer:
(d) do what is expected or promised

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 18.
Substitute the underlined word with the appropriate polite alternative. Sam is buying a used car.
(a) pre-loved (b) tried (c) different (d) challenged
Answer:
(a) pre-loved

Question 19.
Choose the correct sentence pattern for the following sentence.
They were selling wild strawberries.
(a) SVOA (b) SVCO (c) SVIODO (d) SVIODOA
Answer:
(b) SVCO

Question 20.
Fill in the blank with a suitable phrasal verb.
Jacopo to the door handle of the car.
(a) looked at (b) brought forth (c) sent out (d) came up
Answer:
(d) came up

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Part II
Section -1

Read the following sets of poetic lines and answer any four from it. [4 x 2 = 8]

Question 21.
“All through the summer at ease we lay,
And daily from the turret wall
We watched the mowers in the hay”
(a) How did the soldiers spend the summer days?
(b) What could they watch from the turret wall?
Answer:
(a) They spent the summer days gazing out of the castle. They were ready to shoot the enemy at sight who were at half-a kilometer distance. But none came near. So, they were relaxed.
(b) They could watch the farmers mowing at a distance from inside their turret walls.

Question 22.
“But not because of its magnificence Dear is the Casuarina to my soul:
Beneath it we have played; though years may roll,”
(a) What is not the cause for Toru Dutt’s love for the Casuarina tree?
(b) What makes the tree dear to the poet?
Answer:
(a) The magnificence or the impressive appearance of the tree is not the cause for Toru Dutt’s love for the Casuarina tree.
(b) As children, the poet and her friends had played under the tree. This experience has made the tree dear to the poet.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 23.
“And then the justice,
In fair round belly with good capon lin’d,
With eyes severe and beard of formal cut,
Full of wise saws and modern instances; ”
(а) Whom does justice refer to?
(b) Describe his appearance.
Answer:
(a) Justice refers to a man in his fifth stage when he becomes critical of everyone else’s opinion in life.
(b) He has a pot belly and is fond of eating delicacies.

Question 24.
“…I mete and dole
Unequal laws unto a savage race,
That hoard, and sleep, and feed, and know not me. ”
(a) What does Ulysses do?
(b) Did he enjoy what he was doing? Give reasons.
Answer:
(a) Ulysses, like a grocery shop owner, measures and delivers rewards and punishments unto a large number of uncivilized citizens.
(b) No, he did not enjoy his work. He does not like the idea of ministering variable justice to people who like “drones” or animals just eat, sleep and multiply their kind. He wants to leave such work to his son.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 25.
“Life is hard; be steel; be a rock.”
(а) How should one face life?
(b) Identify the figure of speech in the above line.
Answer:
(a) One should face life like a steel.
(b) Metaphor

Question 26.
“Legs wide, arms locked behind,
As if to balance the prone brow
Oppressive with its mind.”
(а) Whose action is described here?
(b) What is meant by prone brow?
Answer:
(a) Napoleon Bonaparte’s action is described here.
(b) “Prone brow” means brow accustomed or inclined down to contemplate on serious matters.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

SECTION – 2

Answer any three of the following questions. [3 x 2 = 6]

Question 27.
Report the following dialogue:
Answer:
Michael: “What are you doing here, Shil? I haven’t seen you since June.”
Shil : “I’ve just come back from my holiday in Ireland.” .
Michael asked Shil what she was doing there and that he hadn’t seen her since June. Shil said that she had just come back from her holiday in Ireland.

Question 28.
Sheena must consult a dermatologist. Otherwise she will not know what her problem is. (Combine using ‘if’)
Answer:
If Sheena does not consult a dermatologist, she will not know what her problem is.

Question 29.
Rewrite the sentence making an inversion in the conditional clause.
Answer:
If you should require any further information, please contact us at our office in Madley Street.
Should you require any further information, please contact us at our office in Madley street.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 30.
Leonardo da Vinci, who was a renowned painter and sculptor, was also an inventor and scientist. (Change the following into a simple sentence)
Answer:
Leonardo da Vinci, a renowned painter and sculptor, was also an inventor and scientist.

Part-III
Section -1

Explain any two of the following with reference to the context [2 x 3 = 6]

Question 31.
How can this shameful tale be told?
Answer:
Reference: This line is from Edwin Muir’s poem “The Castle”.

Context: The narrator feels disgraced that their strong castle was overtaken without a groan.

Explanation: There was no fight. They were helpless because under the cover of darkness, they were sold for gold by the aged warder. It was a shameful and treacherous act of betrayal. The castle had fallen due to the greed of an aged warder. The narrator is hesitant to disclose the shameful betrayal to outsiders.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 32.
When first my casement is wide open thrown At dawn, my eyes delighted on it rest;
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Our Casuarina Tree” written by Torn Dutt.

Context: The poet says these words while talking about the early influences of the Casuarina tree in her life.

Explanation: The young poet’s day started with seeing the tree with delight. The very first thing she used to see was the Casuarina tree through her casement (i.e.) door like window. The emotional bonding between herself and the giant Casuarina tree is beyond reason.

Question 33.
I cannot rest from travel: I will drink Life to the lees:
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.

Context: Ulysses says these words after settling down in his kingdom. He feels restless as he has stopped travelling and having adventures.

Explanation: Ulysses, after spending many years in the seas returns to Ithaca and starts ruling his country. However, his heart is not in the administration of his kingdom. He wants to sail again. At this context he says these words. He wishes to enjoy life to the fullest and so he can’t afford to idle away his remaining life as a king.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Section – 2

Answer any two of the following questions in about 30 words. [2 x 3 = 6]

Question 34.
Describe the appearance of Nicola and Jacopo.
Answer:
One boy had worn Jersey and cut-off khaki pants. The other had a shortened army tunic gathered in loose folds about his skinny frame. They had tangled hair and dark earnest eyes.

Question 35.
What thoughts troubled Dr. Christiaan Barnard as he neared the end of his career as a heart surgeon?
Answer:
Towards the end of his career, Dr. Christiaan Barnard was troubled by the suffering of people and especially of young children. He could not accept the fact that twelve million children are unlikely to reach the age of one and about six million children die annually before reaching the age of five.

Question 36.
How did the firm snow at the higher regions fill them with hope?
Answer:
They were a little perturbed by slippery soft snow. As they reached higher up, they felt better. As one bottle of oxygen got exhausted, their load was now less. As Hillary’s axe bit into the first steep slope of the ridge, his high hopes were realized. The snow was crystalline and film. They were able to make comfortable belays to haul themselves up slowly.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Section – 3

Answer any three of the follow ing questions in about 30 words each.

Question 37.
Study the pie chart given and answer the questions that follow.
Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4 1
(a) Name the drug which has the least sale record in the store.
(b) How many types of drugs are being sold at this store?
(c) Which drug is twice the sale of analgesics?
Answer:
(a) Sedatives have the least sale record in the store.
(b) Five types of drugs are sold in the store.
(c) Antibiotics is sold twice as much as analgesics.

Question 38.
Write a dialogue of minimum 3 exchanges between a tourist and a guide.
Answer:
Tourist: Could you please tell me which are the important locations in Kanchipuram to be seen?
Guide: Of course yes, you must visit Kailasanathar Temple and Thennangur Panduranga Temple.
Tourist: Could I cycle to those locations?
Guide: Yes of course, let me bring my bicycle too. I will show you important things just for a price of Rs. 1000/
Tourist: Don’t you think your price is a bit high?
Guide: Okay. Last price Rs. 750/-

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 39.
Describe the process of making a cup of tea.
Answer:
Boil water in a bowel. Add tea leaves. Wait till the water turns red or black. Now turn off the stove. Use a filter to remove the tea leaves from the essence. Now add hot milk and sugar to your taste. Those who prefer black tea need not add milk.

Question 40.
Complete the proverbs using the word given below.
Answer:
(a) A soft answer turns away ……………….. (villain, wrath, friend)
(b) A picture is worth a ……………….. words, (beautiful, thousand, describe)
(c) A bird in hand is worth ……………….. (hundreds, the freedom, two in the bush)
Answer:
(a) wrath (b) thousand (c) two in the bush

PART – IV

Answer the following questions: [7 x 5 = 35]
Answer in a paragraph in about 150 words.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 41.
What message is conveyed through the story, ‘Two Gentlemen of Verona’?
Answer:
Adversity is a touchstone of virtue. Both the little boys resemble tea leaves. Their best essence comes to limelight when they find themselves in hot waters. But they don’t complain. One does not give up on family relations when misfortune strikes. The bond becomes strong as the bond demands selfless sacrifice. The nobility of human life emerges from the precious lessons one learns from the supreme sacrifices of Nicola and Jacopo. One who shoulders the responsibility of taking care of the loved ones, irrespective of age, is an exemplary gentleman worthy of emulation. The primary motivational force of an individual is to find meaning in life. Both the little boys had a specific purpose for their life. They had made up their minds to do what ever work possible to earn money to save their sister and restore her singing career.

Or

How did Hillary and Tenzing prepare themselves before they set off to the summit?
Answer:
They started up their cookers and drank lots of lemon juice and sugar. Then they took sardines and biscuits. Hillary cleaned the ice off the oxygen sets. He rechecked and tested them. He had removed his boots which had become wet the day before. They were now frozen solid. It would be very challenging to start climbing ice-cold Himalayas with such wet and chilling boots.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

So, he cooked them over the fierce flame of Primus and managed to soften them up. They were also conscious of the probability of braving snow storms during the ascent. They fortified their clothing with wind proof and also pulled three pairs of gloves silk, woollen, and windproof on to their hands. At 6.30 a.m. they crawled out of their tent into the snow. They hoisted their 30 lb. of oxygen gear on their backs. Connecting their oxygen masks they turned on the valves to bring life-giving oxygen into their lungs. Taking a few deep breaths, they got ready to go.

Question 42.
Describe the reminiscences of the poet, when she sees the casuarina tree.
Answer:
The poet remembers how her days started with the sight of the Casuarina tree from her casement. She remembers how her loving companions played under the giant Casuarina tree. The memory of her beloved companions bring hot tears because they had succumbed to cruel tuberculosis. She remembers how well the tree accommodated birds to sing songs during days and nights. The tree had allowed the creeper to embrace it like a lady love. Though it sapped its vitality, like a gallant lover, allowed the creeper to stay around its neck like a scarf. She remembers how a baboon seated at the crest of the tree had watched beautiful sunrise while her young ones were leaping and playing in the lower branches of the giant tree.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Or

Explain how the poet guides his son who is at the threshold of manhood, to face the challenges of life.

The poet shares his wisdom with his son who is at the threshold of manhood. He persuades his son to be hard like steel or rock to withstand challenges and unforeseen betrayals in life. A person with soft heart will crumble before a breach of trust. Similarly he wants his son to be discerning enough to be soft when needed to grow like a frail flower plant splitting a rock. Occasionally one has to go with the current because life is at times fertile with a lot of opportunities to grow even among the harshest circumstances. ‘Rich soft wanting’ can help a person to win against all odds. He reiterates this idea by explaining how gentleness can reform a hardened criminal when lashes would, in contrast, harden them further.

Question 43.
Write a paragraph of about 150 words by developing the following hints:
Martha and John – grudge – underpaid two decades – punishment – condemned the bribe – abusive language – one hundred thousand dollars – changed attitude – testify – three words – corrupt practices.
Answer:
Martha and John cherished a grudge against Gresham for having underpaid Baldwin for about two decades. They openly said that he deserved punishment. Initially Gresham condemned the bribe claimed as a difference in salary paid. Had he been made a similar offer he claimed he would have asked him to go to the devil. Baldwin said that having been a friend he couldn’t use such an abusive language. Casually John asked how much he offered.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Baldwin said that it was one hundred thousand dollars. Suddenly Martha and John changed their attitude towards Gresham. John viewed a shame if Gresham got indicted because he shared his name. Martha also desperately tried to convince him not to testify against Gresham. John even suggested that he could say those three words “I don’t remember” as the depositor would not lose a cent. Baldwin felt miserable because the family members who he wanted to feel proud of his uprightness wanted him to crossover to the side of corrupt practices because of the generous offer made by Gresham.

Or

“Remember Caesar” – light hearted comedy – tragic hero – rose tree planting-great loss to England – great impartial judge – Mrs. Weston’s entry – eating a game pie – immediate worry – French and Dutch – assassinate – pepper – bread – judge and his assistant – pet dishes – handful of candles – stay underground – infernal machine – doctor disapproves of excitement – nonsense and whimsical behavior – 15th March.
Answer:
Remember Caesar is a light hearted comedy. The name Caesar is the name of a. tragic hero Julius Caesar in one of the plays of William Shakespeare. Weston gives an appointment to Mr. Caesar to discuss rose tree planting work in his garden. Just to remind him of the proffered appointment, he scribbles two words “Remember Caesar” and keeps that scrap of paper in his coat pocket. Roger, the assistant of the judge elevates him to the level of a tragic hero. He flatters the judge that his death could be a great loss to England as he was a great impartial judge whose integrity could not be bargained or bribed. Mrs. Weston’s entry lightens up the whole drama and the tragedy transitions into a dark comedy.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Lady Weston keeps hinting about earlier attempts when he was eating a game pie. She becomes seriously playful when she says, “you’ve always wanted to be a great man and now you’ve got your wish. They don’t assassinate nobodies.” She cool-headedly tells her husband that he can stay indoors and have drinks. Lady Weston asks her husband if someone was planning to murder him. He says, “obviously”. She gives a curt retort, “I wonder someone hasn’t done it long ago. A great many people must hate judges. And you are a strict judge, they say.”

When Weston says he has instructed Roger to barricade all doors, her immediate worry is about the grocery awaited. She asks if he was expecting both French and Dutch together in the attempt to assassinate. When Weston asks if a little pepper was more important to her than her husband’s life, she says that he would be the first person to complain if the bread was short and the gravy thin. The cook disobeys the order. She has never been “behind the bars”. She will handle any one who enters by the kitchen. A judge and his assistant want the door locked but a cook is not afraid. Lady Weston doesn’t want to send away the cook. She is practical. She wants her to stay back to cook his pet dishes.

Lady Weston brings a handful of candles to keep the room lit if Mr. Weston has to stay underground for a while. A velvet coat is construed as an infernal machine that could blow up the whole place is smothered with books inside a pail of water to the great annoyance of Lady Weston. She casually reminds her husband that doctor disapproves of excitement. It was only on this account, Lady Weston bears the nonsense and whimsical behaviour of Mr. Weston. The arrival of Mr. Caesar only sorts out the knot. The judge remembers to meet Mr. Caesar on 15th March.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Question 44.
Write a summary or Make notes of the following passage.
Answer:
The greatness of a country depends upon its people. India is fortunate to have vast human resources. Our countrymen are second to none in intelligence and in doing hard work. From the ancient period, Indians excelled in art architecture, knowledge of metals, medicines, literature etc. After our independence in 1947, the government took steps to improve our country in all spheres. By the five-years plans, provisions are made for the development of the country.

The first five-year plan was specially designed to improve irrigational methods. By the green revolution, we attained self-sufficiency in the field of agricultural production. The present age is the atomic age. India too established an Atomic Energy Commission under the guidance of Dr. Bhabha. India made the first successful nuclear explosion on 18th May, 1974. This made India the sixth member of the world nuclear club. It was purely the efforts of the Indian Scientists alone. We have sent our Indian Cosmonaut to space also on 3rd April, 1984. Shri Rakesh Sharma, the best pilot of the India Air Force travelled.into space with two Soviet Spaceman in Soyuz I Spaceship.

Summary

No. of words given in the original passage: 185
No. of words to be written in the summary: 185/3 = 62 ± 5

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Rough draft
Indians have been great human resources. Since ancient times, the have excelled in various fields such as metallugry nedicineand architecture in ancient period itself. After 1947, the Government through five year plan attend selfi-sufficiency in agricultural production. Gradually the Government focused on developing atoimic energy andspace technology. Atomic implosion in 1974 and conquest of space in 1984 are best examples of Indians success in joining space club and energy development.

Fair draft True Indians
Ancient Indians proved their expertise in metallurgy, medicine and architecture. After 1947, the country focused on agricultural self-sufficiency through five year plans. She attained it in, agricultural production. Then India joined the small band of atomic energy producing countries and by atomic explosion in 1974 proved her power. She also joined space club, in 1984 by sending Rakesh Sharma to space.

No. of words in the summary: 61

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Or

Notes
Title: True Indians

Indians
best human resources
excelled in architecture, metallurgy and medicine

Five year plans
initial agriculture development
Energy development focus

Drive future
atomic energy nuclear implosion on 18th may 1974.

Space
Indian Cosmonaut on 3rd April 1984 – Rakesh Sharma I Cosmonaut.

Question 45.
As Cultural Secretary of your school, write a letter to the Cultural Program Coordinator, DAV Public School requesting him/her for details regarding the inter¬school competitions to be held on 20.3.2020.
Answer:
05 Jan, 2019
From
B. Amrita
Chettinad School
Ramapuram
Chennai

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

To
Cultural Program
Co-ordinator
DAV Public School
Perambur
Chennai
Sir,

Sub: Information regarding inter-school competitions

We have received the notification about the inter-school competitions to be held in your school. Kindly confirm the details that is mentioned in the poster.

  • Participants from school: 30 No.’s
  • Registration fees : Rs. 500/- (DD attached)
  • Time of entry: 8.30 a.m.
  • No. of competitions a participant can take part in: 3
  • No. of teachers to accompany students: 3
  • Last date for registration: 10.02.2020

The specific conditions and eligibility criteria may please be intimated to us.
I hope you will provide the necessary information at the earliest.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Yours faithfully
B. Amrita

Sports Secretary

Address on the envelope
To :
The Cultural Programme Co-ordinator
DAV Public School, Perambur
Chennai

[OR]

Write a paragraph in about 150 words on “The Importance Of Education That Gives Power To An Individual.”

Education Gives Power

Education provides us knowledge. It trains our mind and sharpens our skills and abilities. Education refines our tastes and temperaments and builds our thought process. Vocational courses help young boys to earn and learn together. They provide means of earning livelihood and open the route to employment. Professional courses, as is evident from the name itself, equip us for adopting various professions. Some of these highly skilled professionals seek placements or jobs in esteemed companies and business concerns. Thus education is important for our survival.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Decent living is impossible without good income or high salary. Education improves the quality of our life and frees us of superstition, foolish, meaningless mind-blocks and rituals. If women are educated the whole family benefits as the food is hygienically prepared, children are healthy, well-mannered and disciplined. Education gives us power over our environment. We can control the situation and shape our destiny. Education spreads awareness among people and gives them freedom from socialills. It makes people independent by providing them means to earn their living. They become responsible citizens and realise their rights and duties. In short, education gives one power.

Question 46.
Spot the errors and rewrite the sentences correctly.
(a) The collection ‘Fragrant flowers’ are quite interesting.
(b) It is an great honour to welcome you.
(c) Beside tennis, I play Cricket.
(d) The Chief Manager along with his deputies are visiting the factory tomorrow.
(e) Many have arrested at the meeting.
Answer:
(a) The collection ‘Fragrant flowers’ is quite interesting.
(b) It is a great honour to welcome you.
(c) Besides tennis, I play Cricket.
(d) The Chief Manager along with his deputies is visiting the factory tomorrow.
(e) Many have been arrested at the meeting.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

[OR]

Fill in the blanks correctly.
(а) This ………………. is made out of plaster of Paris ………………. and painted after it solidifies. (flower/flour)
(b) I ………………. speak two languages. (Use a modal in the given blank.)
(c) I am so tired! I ………………. take a nap. (use a semi-modal)
(d) I ………………. (sing) since I was four years old. (use a proper tense)
Answer:
(a) flower/flour (b) can (c) need to (d) have been singing

Question 47.
Identify each of the following sentences with the fields given below
(a) The flight was cancelled due to fog.
(b) Spicy food can cause acidity in the stomach.
(c) Meena stumbled upon a chance to practice running a race.
(d) The company has recommended a dividend of 75 percent.
(e) The monitor is not working. Get it repaired.
[Sports, Weather, Commerce, Nutrition and Dietetics, Computer]
Answer:
(a) Weather (b) Nutrition and Dietetics (c) Sports (d) Commerce (e) Computer

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

[OR]

Read the following passage and answer the questions in your own words.
During the holidays, many people hang mistletoes over doorways. People share kisses under this evergreen plant, which is a popular Christmas tradition. However, one should never let the image of a romantic plant used during the happy times of the holidays fool. In the forests where they’re from, mistletoes can do some real damage. Let’s see the different ways in which they do harm others.

The mistletoe plant is evergreen. This means it has leaves that remain green throughout the year. It is poisonous and has white berries and small, yellow flowers. The mistletoe lives on other plants, taking water and nutrients from these plants. For this reason, mistletoes are considered parasites.

The white berries of the mistletoes contain seeds. Some birds and mammals like to feed on these berries. When they do, the seeds may attach to the animal eating the berries. The animal may carry the seeds to another part of the tree or shrub. They may also carry the seeds to another plant altogether. The seeds start to grow roots that dig through the bark of the tree or shrub. The roots grow into the tissues of the plant they’ve taken over.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

That’s how mistletoes take nutrients and water away from the host plants. Mistletoe can be hard to remove once it infects a plant. The best way to fight off a mistletoe infestation is to cut off the infected branch completely. If the mistletoe takes over more parts of the plant, it can start to weaken the plant and make it harder for it to grow.

As mistletoes grow in the trees, they become a thick mix of branches and stems. This big mass is sometimes called a “witch’s broom.” Some animals nest in these witches’ brooms. These animals include chickadees, house wrens, and most Cooper’s hawks.

Questions:
(a) What is a popular Christmas tradition?
(b) Why is mistletoes considered a parasite?
(c) What is the best way to ward off the mistletoe infestation? id) What is called a ‘witch’s broom’?
(ie) Which animals nest in the witches’ brooms?
Answers:
(a) During Christmas holidays, many people hang mistletoes over doorways. People share kisses under mistletoes, an evergreen plant hung over doorways. This is a popular Christmas tradition.
(b) The mistletoe lives on other plants, taking water and nutrients from these plants. Hence, mistletoes are considered parasites.
(c) Mistletoe can be hard to remove once it infects a plant. The best way to fight off a mistletoe infestation is to cut off the infected branch completely.
(d) Mistletoes that grow in the trees become a thick mix of branches and stems. This big mass is called a “witch’s broom.”
(e) Some animals like chickadees, house wrens, and most Cooper’s hawks nest in the witches’ brooms.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Students can Download Accountancy Chapter 5 Trial Balance Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Trial Balance Text Book Back Questions and Answers

I. Multiple Choice Questions
Choose the Correct Answer

Question 1.
Trial balance is a ………………
(a) Statement
(b) Account
(c) Ledger
(d) Journal
Answer:
(a) Statement

Question 2.
After the preparation of ledger, the next step is the preparation of ………………
(a) Trading account
(b) Trial balance
(c) Journal
(d) Profit and loss account
Answer:
(b) Trial balance

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 3.
The trial balance contains the balances of ………………
(a) Only personal accounts
(b) Only real accounts
(c) Only nominal accounts
(d) All accounts
Answer:
(d) All accounts

Question 4.
Which of the following is/are the objective(s) of preparing trial balance?
(a) Serving as the summary of all the ledger accounts
(b) Helping in the preparation of final accounts
(c) Examining arithmetical accuracy of accounts
(d) (a), (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) (a), (b) and (c)

Question 5.
While preparing the trial balance, the accountant finds that the total of the credit column is short by ₹ 200. This difference will be ………………
(a) Debited to suspense account
(b) Credited to suspense account
(c) Adjusted to any of the debit balance
(d) Adjusted to any of the credit balance
Answer:
(b) Credited to suspense account

Question 6.
A list which contains balances of accounts to know whether the debit and credit balances are matched is ………………
(a) Journal
(b) Day book
(c) Trial balance
(d) Balance sheet
Answer:
(c) Trial balance

Question 7.
Which of the following method(s) can be used for preparing trial balance?
(a) Balance method
(b) Total method
(c) Total and Balance method
(d) (a), (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) (a), (b) and (c)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 8.
The account which has a debit balance and is shown in the debit column of the trial balance is ………………
(a) Sundry creditors account
(b) Bills payable account
(c) Drawings account
(d) Capital account
Answer:
(c) Drawings account

Question 9.
The difference of totals of both debit and credit side of trial balance is transferred to ………………
(a) Trading account
(b) Difference account
(c) Suspense account
(d) Miscellaneous account
Answer:
(c) Suspense account

Question 10.
Trial balance is prepared ………………
(a) At the end of the year
(b) On a particular date
(c) For a year
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) On a particular date

II. Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is trial balance?
Answer:
Trial balance is a statement containing the debit and credit balances of all ledger accounts on a particular date. It is arranged in the form of debit and credit columns placed side by side and prepared with the object of checking the arithmetical accuracy of entries made in the books of accounts and to facilitate preparation of financial statements.

Question 2.
Give the format of trial balance.
Answer:
Trial balance is prepared in the following format under the balance method:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 3.
What are the methods of preparation of trial balance?
Answer:

  1. Balanced method
  2. Total method
  3. Total and balance method

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 4.
State whether the balance of the following accounts should be placed in the debit or the credit column of the trial balance:

  1. Carriage outwards
  2. Carriage inwards
  3. Sales
  4. Purchases
  5. Bad debts vi. Interest paid
  6. Interest received
  7. Discount received
  8. Capital
  9. Drawings
  10. Sales returns
  11. Purchase returns

Answer:
Trial balance as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
III. Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are the objectives of preparing trial balance?
Answer:
Trial balance is prepared with the following objectives:
1. Test of arithmetical accuracy:
Trial balance is the means by which the arithmetical accuracy of the book – keeping work is checked. When the totals of debit column and credit column in the trial balance are equal, it is assumed that posting from subsidiary books, balancing of ledger accounts, etc. are arithmetically correct. However, there may be some errors which are not disclosed by trial balance.

2. Basis for preparing final accounts:
Financial statements, namely, trading and profit and loss account and balance sheet are prepared on the basis of summary of ledger balances obtained from the trial balance.

3. Location of errors:
When the trial balance does not tally, it is an indication that certain errors have occurred. The errors may have occurred at one or more of the stages of accounting process, namely, journalising or recording in subsidiary books, totalling subsidiary books, posting in ledger accounts.

Balancing the ledger accounts, carrying ledger account balances to the trial balance and totalling the trial balance columns, etc. Hence, the errors should be located and rectified before preparing the financial statements.

4. Summarised information of ledger accounts:
The summary of ledger accounts is shown in the trial balance. Ledger accounts have to be seen only when details are required in respect of an account.

Question 2.
What are the limitations of trial balance?
Answer:
The following are the limitations of trial balance:

  1. It is possible to prepare trial balance of an organisation, only if the double entry system is followed.
  2. Even if some transactions are omitted, the trial balance will tally.
  3. Trial balance may tally even though errors are committed in the books of account,
  4. If trial balance is not prepared in a systematic way, the final accounts prepared on the basis of trial balance may not depict the actual state of affairs of the concern.
  5. Agreement of trial balance is not a conclusive proof of arithmetical accuracy of entries made in the accounting records. This is because there are certain errors which are not : disclosed by trial balance such as complete omission of a transaction, compensating errors and error of principle.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 3.
‘A trial balance is only a prima facie evidence of the arithmetical accuracy of records’. Do you agree with this statement? Give reasons.
Answer:
Yes, I agree with the statement. ‘A trial balance is only a prima facie evidence of the arithmetical accuracy of records.

Reasons:
Trial balance is the means by which the arithmetical accuracy of the book – keeping. work is checked. When the totals of debit column and credit column in the trial balance are equal, it is assumed that porting from subsidiary books, balancing of ledger accounts, etc.

IV. Exercises

Question 1.
Prepare a trial balance with the following information: (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 2.
Prepare the trial balance from the following information: (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial Balance
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 3.
Prepare the trial balance from the following balances of Chandramohan as on 31st March, 2017. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Chandramohan as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 4.
Prepare the trial balance from the following balances of Babu as on 31st March, 2016. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Babu as on 31st March, 2016
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 5.
From the following balances of Aijun, prepare the trial balance as on 31st March, 2018. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Arjun as on 31st March, 2018
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 6.
Prepare the trial balance from the following balances of Rajesh as on 31st March, 2017. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Rajesh as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 7.
Prepare the trial balance from the following balances of Karthik as on 31st March, 2017. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Karthik as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 8.
From the following balance of Rohini, Prepare the trial balance as on 31st March, 2016. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Rohini as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 9.
Balan who has a car driving school gives you the following ledger balances. Prepare trial balance as on 31st December, 2016. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Balan as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 10.
The following balances are extracted from the books of Ravichandran on 31st December, 2016. Prepare the trial balance. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Rohini as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 11.
From the following balances, Prepare trial balanceof Baskar as on 31st March 2017. Transfer the difference, if any, to suspense account. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Rohini as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 12.
From the following balances extracted from the books of Rajeshwari as on 31st March, 2017, prepare the trial balance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
Trial balance of Rajeshwari as on 31st March, 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Question 13.
Correct the following trail balance:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Answer:
The Corrected Trial balance
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Textbook Case Study Solved

Question 1.
Mary runs a textile store. She has prepared the following trial balance from her ledger balances. Her trial balance does not tally. She needs your help to check whether what she has done is correct.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance
Solution:
There are some errors in Mary’s Trial balance. The corrected trial balance has been written below:
The Corrected Trial balance of Mary
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 5 Trial Balance

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Students can Download Computer Applications Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker Text Book Back Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1.
DTP stands for ………………………..
(a) Desktop Publishing
(b) Desktop Publication
(c) Doctor To Patient
(d) Desktop Printer
Answer:
(a) Desktop Publishing

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
……………………….. is a DTP software.
(a) Lotus 1-2-3
(b) PageMaker
(c) Doctor To Patient
(d) Lotus 1-2-3
Answer:
(b) PageMaker

Question 3.
Which menu contains the New option?
Answer:
(a) File menu
(b) Edit menu
(c) Layout menu
(d) Type menu
Answer:
(a) File menu

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 4.
In PageMaker Window, the area outside of the dark border is referred to as ……………………………
(a) page
(b) pasteboard
(c) blackboard
(d) dashboard
Answer:
(b) pasteboard

Question 5.
Shortcut to close a document in PageMaker is ……………………………
(a) Ctrl + A
(b) Ctrl + B
(c) Ctrl + C
(d) Ctrl + W
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + W

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 6.
A …………………………… tool is used for magnifying the particular portion of the area.
(a) Text tool
(b) Line tool
(c) Zoom tool
(d) Hand tool
Answer:
(c) Zoom tool

Question 7.
…………………………… tool is used for drawing boxes.
(a) Line
(b) Ellipse
(c) Rectangle
(d) Text
Answer:
(c) Rectangle

Question 8.
Place option is present in …………………………… menu.
(a) File
(b) Edit
(c) Layout
(d) Window
Answer:
(a) File

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 9.
To select an entire document using the keyboard, press ……………………………
(a) Ctrl + A
(b) Ctrl + B
(c) Ctrl + C
(d) Ctrl + D
Answer:
(a) Ctrl + A

Question 10.
Character formatting consists of which of the following text properties?
(a) Bold
(b) Italic
(c) Underline
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 11.
Which tool lets you edit text?
(a) Text tool
(b) Type tool
(c) Crop tool
(d) Hand tool
Answer:
(a) Text tool

Question 12.
Shortcut to print a document in Pagemaker is ……………………………
(a) Ctrl + A
(b) Ctrl + P
(c) Ctrl + C
(d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + P

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 13.
Adobe PageMaker is a …………………………… software.
Answer:
Page layout

Question 14.
…………………………… Bar is the topmost part of the PageMaker window.
Answer:
TItle

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 15.
…………………………… is the process of moving up and down or left: and right through the document window.
Answer:
Scrolling

Question 16.
…………………………… tool is used to draw a circle.
Answer:
Ellipse

Question 17.
The Insert pages option is available on clicking the …………………………… menu.
Answer:
Layout

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 18.
Match the following.
(a) Cut – (i) Ctrl + Z
(b) Copy – (ii) Ctrl + V
(c) Paste – (iii) Ctrl + X
(d) Undo – (iv) Ctrl + C
Answer:
(iii), (iv), (ii), (i)

Question 19.
Choose the odd man out.
(i) Adobe PageMaker, QuarkXPress, Adobe InDesign, Audacity
(ii) File, Edit, Layout, Type, Zip
(iii) Pointer Tool, Line tool, Hide Tool, Hand Tool
(iv) Bold, Italic, Portrait, Underline
Answer:
(i) Audacity, (ii) Zip, (iii) Hide Tool, (iv) Potrait

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 20.
Choose the correct statement.
(i) (a) Text can be selected using mouse only.
(b) Text can be selected using mouse or the keyboard.
(ii) (a) DTP is an abbreviation for Desktop publishing.
(b) DTP is an abbreviation for Desktop publication.
Answer:
(i) (b) & (ii) (a)

Question 21.
Choose the correct pair.
Answer:
(a) Edit and Cut
(b) Edit and New
(c) Undo and Copy
(d) Undo and Redo
Answer:
(d) Undo and Redo

PART – II
II. Short Answer:

Question 1.
What is desktop publishing?
Answer:
Desktop publishing (abbreviated DTP) is the creation of page layouts for documents using DTP software.

Question 2.
Give some examples of DTP software?
Answer:
Some of the popular DTP software are Adobe PageMaker, Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
Write the steps to open PageMaker?
Answer:
In the Windows 7 operating system, we can open Adobe PageMaker using the command sequence Start →All Programs → Adobe → Pagemaker 7.0 → Adobe PageMaker 7.0.

Question 4.
How do you create a New document in PageMaker?
Answer:
To create a new document

  1. Choose File > New in the menu bar. (or) Press Ctrl + N in the keyboard. Now Document Setup dialog box appears.
  2. Enter the appropriate settings for your new document in the Document Setup dialog box.
  3. Click on OK.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
What is a Pasteboard in PageMaker?
Answer:
A document page is displayed within a dark border. The area outside of the dark border is referred to as the pasteboard. Anything that is placed completely in the pasteboard is not visible when you print the document.

Question 6.
Write about the Menu bar of PageMaker?
Answer:
Below the title bar is the Menu bar. It contains the following menus File, Edit, Layout, Type, Element, Utilities, View, Window, Help. When you click on a menu item, a pulldown menu appears.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 7.
Differentiate Ellipse tool from Ellipse frame tool?
Answer:
Ellipse tool:
Used to draw circles and ellipses.
Ellipse frame tool:
Used to create elliptical placeholders for text and graphics.

Question 8.
What is text editing?
Answer:
Editing meAnswer:Answer:Answer:Answer:making changes to the text. Editing encompasses many tasks, such as inserting and deleting words and phrases, correcting errors, and moving and copying text to different pfaces in the document.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 9.
What is text block?
Answer:
A text block contains text you type, paste, or import. You can’t see the borders of a text block until you select it with the pointer tool.

Question 10.
What is threading text blocks?
Answer:
All text in PageMaker resides inside containers called text blocks. A Text block can be connected to other text block so that the text in one text block can flow into another text block. Text blocks that are connected in this way are threaded.

Question 11.
What is threading text?
Answer:
A Text block can be connected to other text block so that the text in one text block can flow into another text block. Text blocks that are connected in this way are threaded. The process of connecting text among Text blocks is called threading text.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 12.
How do you insert a page in PageMaker?
Answer:

  1. Go to the page immediately before the page you want to insert.
  2. Choose Layout > Insert Pages in the menu bar. The Insert Pages dialog box appears.
  3. Type the number of pages you want to insert.
  4. To insert pages after the current page, choose ‘after’ from the pop-up menu.
  5. Click on Insert.
  6. The new pages are inserted in your publication.

PART – III
III. Explain in Brief Answer:

Question 1.
What is PageMaker? Explain its uses?
Answer:
Adobe PageMaker is a page layout software. It is used to design and produce documents that can be printed. You can create anything from a simple business card to a large book.
Page layout software includes tools that allow you to easily position text and graphics on document pages. For example, using PageMaker, you could create a newsletter that includes articles and pictures on each page. You can place pictures and text next to each other, on top of each other, or beside each other wherever you want them to go.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
Mention three tools in PageMaker and write their keyboard shortcuts?
Answer:
Tools:

  1. Printer Tool
  2. Rotating Tool
  3. Line Tool

Keyboard Short Cut:

  1. F9
  2. Shift + F2
  3. Shift + F3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
Write the use of any three tools in PageMaker along with symbols?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 4.
How do you rejoin split blocks?
Answer:
Rbjoining split blocks
To rejoin the two text blocks

  1. Place the cursor on the bottom handle of the second text.block, click and drag the bottom handle up to the top.
  2. Then place the cursor on the bottom handle of the first text block, and click and drag the bottom handle down if necessary.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
How do you link frames containing text?
Answer:
Linking Frames containing Text
A single frame may not be large enough to hold an entire story when you are using a large amount of text, you can link frames together so that an entire story is visible.
To link Frames containing text

  1. Draw a second frame With the Frame tool of your choice.
  2. Click the first frame to select it.
  3. Click on the red triangle to load the text icon.
  4. Click the second frame. PageMaker flows the text into the second frame.

Question 6.
What is the use of Master Page?
Answer:
Any text or object that you place on the master page will appear on the entire document pages to which the master is applied. It shortens the amount of time because you don’t have to create the same objects repeatedly on subsequent pages. Master Pages commonly contain repeating logos, page numbers, headers, and footers. They also contain non printing layout guides, such as column guides, ruler guides, and margin guides.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 7.
How to you insert page numbers in Master pages?
Answer:
Inserting Page Numbers in Master Pages
To make page numbers appear on every page

  1. Click on Master Pages icon.
  2. Then click on Text Tool. Now the cursor changes to I – beam.
  3. Then Click on the left Master page where you want to put the page number.
  4. Press Ctrl + Alt + P.
  5. The page number displays as ‘LM’ on the left master page.
  6. Similarly click on the right Master page where you want to put the page number.
  7. O Press Ctrl + Alt + P.
  8. The page number displays as ‘RM’ on the right master page, but will appear correctly on the actual pages.

PART – IV
IV. Explain in detail.

Question 1.
Explain the tools in PageMaker toolbox?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
Write the steps to place the text in a frame?
Answer:
Placing Text in a Frame
You can also use frames to hold text in place of using text blocks.
To place text in a Frame

  1. Click on one of a Frame tool from the Toolbox.
  2. Draw a frame with one of PageMaker’s Frame tools (Rectangle frame tool or Ellipse Frame Tool or Polygon frame Tool). Make sure the object remains selected.
  3. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
  4. Click on Place. The Place dialog box will appear.
  5. Locate the document that contains the text you want to place, select it.
  6. Click on Open.
  7. Click in a frame to place the text in it. The text will be placed in the frame.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
How can you convert text in a text block to a frame?
Answer:
Converting text in a Text block to a Frame
After created text in a text block, if you want to convert it to a frame. You can do this by using these steps.

  1. Draw the frame of your choice using one of the PageMaker’s Frame tool.
  2. Select the text block you want to insert in the frame.
  3. Click the frame while pressing the Shift key. Now both elements will be selected.
  4. Choose Element > Frame > Attach Content on the Menu bar.
  5. Now the text appears in the frame.

Question 4.
Write the steps to draw a star using polygon tool?
Answer:
Drawing a Star using Polygon tool
To draw a Star
(i) Click on the Polygon tool from the toolbox.
The cursor changes to a crosshair.

(ii) Click and drag anywhere on the screen. As you drag, a Polygon appears.

(iii) Release the mouse button when the Polygon is of the desired size.

(iv) Choose Element > Polygon Settings in the menu bar.
Now Polygon Settings dialogue box appears.

(v) Type 5 in the Number of sides text box.

(vi) Type 50% in Star inset textbox.

(vii) Click OK. Now the required star appears on the screen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Drawing a star with given number of sides and required inset
1. The value of ‘Star inset’ is 50%. The number of sides is 15.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

2. The value of ‘Star inset’ is 25%. The number of sides is 25.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

3. The value of ‘Star inset’ is 35%. The number of sides is 70.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker Additional Question and Answers

I. Choose the Best Answer:

Question 1.
How will you get Document setup dialog box?
(a) Document → setup
(b) File → New
(c) File → Document
(d) File → setup
Answer:
(b) File → New

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
…………………………. is the shortcut key to create a new document.
Answer:
Ctrl + N

Question 3.
………………………… is used to temporarily hold elements while designing.
Answer:
Pasteboard

Question 4.
How many control buttons are present in the title bar?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
The default name of the new document created is …………………………..
(a) untitled 1
(b) doc 1
(c) default 1
(d) untitled
Answer:
(a) untitled 1

Question 6.
When you move the mouse pointer on a button in the toolbar, a short text that appears is called ……………………………..
(a) Tool tip
(b) Text
(c) Show text
(d) Short text
Answer:
(a) Tool tip

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 7.
Match the following.
(i) polygon – (a) Shift + alt + F4
(ii) cropping – (b) Shift + F6
(iii) constrained line – (c) Shift + alt + F2
(iv) Rectangle Frame – (d) Shift + alt + F4
(a) (i)-(a) (ii)-(b) (iii)-(c) (iv)-(d)
(b) (i)-(d) (;ii)-(b) (iii)-(c) (z’v)-(a)
(c) (z’)-(c) (ii)-(b) (iii)-(d) (iv)-(a)
(d) (i)-(b), (ii)-(c), (iii)-(d), (iv)-(a)
Answer:
(d) (i)-(b), (ii)-(c), (iii)-(d), (iv)-(a)

Question 8.
……………………. is the shortcut for the pointer tool.
Answer:
F9

Question 9.
Choose the correct pair.
(a) Zoom tool
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker
(b) Polygon
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker
(c) Ellipse
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker
(d) line
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker
Answer:
(a) Zoom tool
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 10.
……………………….. tool is used to trim imported graphics.
(a) Text
(b) Rotating
(c) Trim
(d) Crop
Answer:
(d) Crop

Question 11.
How many scroll bars are there?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 12.
How many ruler bars are there?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

Question 13.
The rulers are present at the ………………….. and …………………
(a) top, right
(b) right, left
(c) top, left
(d) bottom, top
Answer:
(c) top, left

Question 14.
…………………………. tool is used for creating text blocks.
(a) Block
(b) Text
(c) Footer
(d) Insertion point
Answer:
(b) Text

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 15.
The flashing verticle bar is called ……………………………
(a) sroll bar
(b) ruler
(c) Footer
(d) Insertion point
Answer:
(d) Insertion point

Question 16.
Which key should be pressed at the end of the paragraph or when a blank line is to be inserted?
(a) Enter
(b) Tab
(c) Spacebar
(d) esc
Answer:
(a) Enter

Question 17.
Choose the correct statement.
(i) double click with I-beam to select a word.
(ii) double click with I beam to select a paragraph
Answer:
(i) double click with I-beam to select a word.

Question 18.
Which key is used to select the text with keyboard?
(a) Ctrl
(b) alt
(c) shift
(d) ctrl+tab
Answer:
(c) shift

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 19.
Identify the statement which is wrong?
(a) One line down – alt + ↓
(b) Beginning of current line – shift + home
(c) One character to the left – shift + ←
Answer:
(a) One line down – alt + ↓

Question 20.
Which key deletes the character to the left?
(a) Delete
(b) Backspace
(c) Remove
(d) Escape
Answer:
(a) Delete

Question 21.
To delete the characters to the right of the insertion point, key is used.
(a) delete
(b) backspace
(c) alt
(d) ctrl
Answer:
(b) backspace

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 22.
To delete a block of text, press
(a) delete
(b) Backspace
(c) Edit → clear
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 23.
Undo option is present in ………………………….. menu.
(a) File
(b) Edit
(c) Help
(d) Insert
Answer:
(b) Edit

Question 24.
Which command is not present in the Edit menu?
(a) Cut
(b) Paste
(c) Copy
(d) place
Answer:
(d) place

Question 25.
How many methods of creating text blocks are there?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 26.
While selecting a text block with the pointer tool, there will be a dark ……………………….. on both ends of the handle.
(a) rectangle
(b) circle
(c) square
(d) polygon
Answer:
(c) square

Question 27.
A red triangle in the bottom window shade meAnswer:Answer:Answer:Answer:…………………………..
(a) there is more text in the text block
(b) there is no text in the text block
(c) text block is deleted
(d) new text block appears
Answer:
(a) there is more text in the text block

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 28.
Rearrange the sentences
(i) It has squiggly arrow
(ii) place the loaded text icon, click then page will automatically flow
(iii) Select Layout → Autoflow
(iv) Import the text
(a) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii)
(b) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)
(c) (iv), (iii), (ii), (i)
(d) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii)
Answer:
(a) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii)

Question 29.
Text that flows through one or more threaded blocks is
(a) blocks
(b) story
(c) thread
(d) unthread
Answer:
(b) story

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 30.
A threaded block is identified by …………………….. sign in the handles.
(a) +
(b) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker
(c) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker
(d) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker
Answer:
(a) +

Question 31.
In page maker, text and graphics that you draw or import are called ……………………………
(a) event
(b) handle
(c) tool
(d) objects
Answer:
(d) objects

Question 32.
Choose the wrong statement.
(a) An object can be on a page
(b) An object can be on the pasteboard
(c) An object cannot be on the pasteboard
(d) An object can be on a page or pasteboard
Answer:
(c) An object cannot be on the pasteboard

Question 33.
Which command is used to convert text into frame?
(a) Element → Frame → Attach Content
(b) Element → Frame → add content
(c) Add → Frame
(d) Add → content
Answer:
(a) Element → Frame → Attach Content

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 34.
Which dialog box appears when File → Save command is given?
(a) Save
(b) Save as
(c) Save page
(d) Save publication
Answer:
(d) Save publication

Question 35.
Instead of File → Save as, we can use the shortcut key
(a) Ctrl + S
(b) alt + S
(c) shift + alt + S
(d) Ctrl + shift + S
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + shift + S

Question 36.
How will you get open publication dialog box?
(a) Ctrl + O
(b) Alt + O
(c) Shift + 0
(d) Shift + O + P
Answer:
(a) Ctrl + O

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 37.
Find the wrong pair?
(a) Beginning of line – Home
(b) End of line – end
(c) One character to left-left arrow
(d) Up one line – Ctrl + up arrow
Answer:
(d) Up one line – Ctrl + up arrow

Question 38.
To toggle between magnification and reduction, press …………………………………. key.
(a) alt
(b) Ctrl
(c) shift
(d) esc
Answer:
(b) Ctrl

Question 39.
Find the wrong statement.
(a) Press Ctrl + spacebar to zoom in
(b) Press alt + spacebar to zoom out
(c) Press alt + Ctrl + spacebar to zoom out
Answer:
(b) Press alt + spacebar to zoom out

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 40.
………………………… is the process of changing the general arrangement of text
(a) Text
(b) Alignment
(c) Formatting
(d) Editing
Answer:
(c) Formatting

Question 41.
To apply character formatting
(i) choose type → character
(ii) choose format → character
(iii) press Ctrl → T
(iv) Open character specification dialog box
(a) (i), (iv) are wrong
(b) (i), (iii) are wrong
(c) (ii) is wrong
(d) All are correct
Answer:
(c) (ii) is wrong

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 42.
How will you get control palette?
(a) alt + ’
(b) shift + ’
(c) esc
(d) Ctrl + ’
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + ’

Question 43.
How many line tools are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 44.
When a line tool is selected to draw a line, cursor becomes …………………………..
(a) +
(b) –
(c) double arrow
(d) cross hair
Answer:
(d) cross hair

Question 45.
Find the false statement.
(a) Custom Stroke dialog box is used to draw dotted line.
(b) Rounded comers dialog box is used to draw rounded comer rectangle.
(c) Both are correct.
Answer:
(c) Both are correct.

Question 46.
The constrained line tool draws line only at the increments of ………………………. degrees.
(a) 30
(b) 45
(c) 60
(d) 90
Answer:
(b) 45

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 47.
Press the ………………………….. key while you are drawing to constrain the shape to a square or circle.
(a) alt
(b) shift
(c) del
(d) Ctrl
Answer:
(b) shift

Question 48.
Which menu has polygon settings options?
(a) Tools
(b) Layout
(c) Element
(d) Place
Answer:
(c) Element

Question 49.
To get color palette, press
(a) shift + J
(b) alt + J
(c) del + J
(d) Ctrl + J
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + J

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 50.
Press alt + Ctrl + G to open go to page dialog box.
(a) true
(b) false
Answer:
(a) true

Question 51.
What are the two letters associated with master page option?
(a) L and R
(b) S R
(c) RT
(d) TB
Answer:
(a) L and R

Question 52.
By default, all the page maker document have a master page already created
(a) Master page
(b) Document Master
(c) Document Page
(d) Page Master
Answer:
(b) Document Master

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 53.
Find the correct statement. .
(а) A master item can be selected on a document page.
(b) A master item cannot be selected on a document page.
Answer:
(b) A master item cannot be selected on a document page.

Question 54.
A sign or special character that can be inserted in the page maker document is on ………………………
(a) Symbol
(b) Menu
(c) Formula
(d) Sign
Answer:
(a) Symbol

Question 55.
…………………………. is the text that is repeated at the top of each page.
Answer:
Header

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 56.
A ……………………………. is a set of letters, numbers or symbols in a certain style.
Answer:
Font

Question 57.
When the publication has reached its maximum magnification or reduction level, center becomes …………………………………
Answer:
Blank

Question 58.
To Scroll a relative distance …………………………… is used.
Answer:
Scroll box

Question 59.
To down one paragraph, …………………………. is used.
Answer:
ctrl+down arrow

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 60.
……………………….. can be contained in text blocks or text frames.
Answer:
Text

Question 61.
Press ………………………….. for rotating tool.
Answer:
Shift+F2

II. Short Answer:

Question 1.
When will you get the cursor like this Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker Find the name of the tool & write its uses.?
Answer:
It is hand tool which is used to scroll the page (an alternative to the scroll bar).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
Write note on scroll bars?
Answer:
Scrolling is the process of moving up and down or left and right through the document window. There are two scroll bars namely Vertical and Horizontal scroll bars for scrolling the document vertically or horizontally.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
What is meant by wrapping the text?
Answer:
When the text being typed reaches the end of the text block, PageMaker will automatically wrap the text to the next line.

Question 4.
What is the use of enter key?
Answer:
The Enter key should be pressed only at the end of a paragraph or when a blank line is to be inserted.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
How will you select the word and a paragraph?
Answer:
To select:

  1. A word
  2. A paragraph

Press:

  1. Double click with I – beam
  2. Triple click with I – beam

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 6.
Name the tools where you get cursor with *+’ symbol?
Answer:
Line tool, Constrained line tool, Rectangle tool, Rectangle frame tool, Ellipse tool, Ellipse frame tool, Polygon tool, and Polygon frame tool.
A Paragraph Triple-click with I-beam

Question 7.
What are the two ways of creating text blocks?
Answer:

  1. Click or drag the text tool on the page or pasteboard, and then type
  2. Click a loaded text icon in an empty column or page.

Question 8.
Define Windowshades?
Answer:
When you select a text block with the Pointer tool, the block’s boundaries become visible. Two handles are seen above and below the text block. These handles are called Windowshades.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 9.
How will you separate the text from the frame?
Answer:
To separate text from a frame

  1. Click the frame with the Pointer tool.
  2. Choose Element > Frame > Delete Content in the menu bar. The text will not appear in the frame.

Question 10.
Define font?
Answer:
A font is a set of letters, numbers or symbols in a certain style. Each font looks different from other fonts.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 11.
What are the two line tools in page maker?
Answer:
PageMaker has two Line tools. The first one creates a straight line at any orientation. The second is a constrained Line tool that draws only at increments of 45 degrees.

Question 12.
How will you change text colors in page maker?
Answer:
To color characters

  1. Select the text you want to colour.
  2. Choose Window > Show Colors in Menu bar. The Colors palette appears. Click the color you want to apply to the selected text.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 13.
Name any 4 options from the layout menu?
Answer:

  1. Go to pages
  2. Insert pages
  3. Remove pages
  4. Sort pages

Question 3.
How wOl you Show / hide the rulers?
Answer:
To show the ruler

  1. Click on View. The View menu will appear.
  2. Click on Show Rulers. Rulers appear along the top and left sides of the document window. To hide the ruler
  3. Click on View. The View menu will appear.
  4. Click on Hide Rulers to hide the rulers.

Question 4.
Differentiate moving and copying text?
Answer:
The Copy and Paste commands of PageMaker can be used to copy text from one location in a document and paste it at another location. The Copy command creates a duplicate of the selected text, leaving the original text unchanged. The Paste command pastes the copied text at the position where the insertion point is placed. The Cut and Paste commands can be used to move text from one position in a document to the other. The Cut command deletes the selected text from its original position. The Paste command then places this text at the position where the insertion point is placed.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
How will you create a text block with text tool?
Answer:
To create a text block with the text tool:
(i) Select the text tool (T) from the toolbox. The pointer turns into an I-beam.

(ii) On an empty area of the page or pasteboard, do one of the following:
Click the I-beam where you want to insert text. This creates a text block the width of the column or page. By default, the insertion point jumps to the left side of the text block.

(iii) Type the text you want.
Unlike with a text frame, you do not see the borders of a text block until you click the text with the pointer tool.

Question 6.
How will you Split a text block into two?
Answer:
To split a text block into two

  1. Place the cursor on the bottom handle, click and drag upwards. When you release the bottom handle will contain a red triangle.
  2. Click once on this, and the cursor changes to a loaded text icon.

Question 7.
How will you save a document with a new name or in a different location?
Answer:
To save a document with a new name or in a different location:

  1. Choose File > Save As in the menu bar.
  2. Press Shift + Ctrl + S in the keyboard.

Now Save Publication dialog box will appear:

  1. Type a new name or specify a new location.
  2. Click the Save button.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 8.
Give the functions of those keys give below?
Answer:

  1. Left arrow
  2. right arrow
  3. Ctrl + left arrow
  4. Ctrl + right arrow
  5. up arrow
  6. down arrow

Press:

  1. Left Arrow
  2. Right Arrow
  3. Ctrl + Left Arrow
  4. Ctrl + Right Arrow
  5. Up Arrow
  6. Down Arrow

Move:

  1. One character to the left
  2. One character to the right
  3. One word to the left
  4. One word to the right
  5. Up one line
  6. Down one line

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 9.
How will you go to a specific page? (or) what are the 3 methods to go to a particular page?
Answer:
Pagemaker provides several methods for navigating the pages in your publication.
Method 1:
You can move from one page to another by using the Page up and Page down keys on your keyboard.

Method 2:
You can move from one page to another by using the page icons at the left bottom of the screen.

Method 3:
Using the Go to Page dialog box.

IV. Answer in Detail.

Question 1.
What are the different ways of selecting the text?
Answer:
Selecting Text:
Text can be selected using the mouse or the keyboard.
Selecting Text using the mouse:
To select text using a mouse, follow these steps :

  1. Place the Insertion point to the left of the first character to be selected.
  2. Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse to a position where you want to stop selecting.
  3. Release the mouse button.
  4. The selected text gets highlighted.

To Select Press:

  1. A Word Double-click with I-beam
  2. A Paragraph Triple-click with I-beam

Selecting Text using the Keyboard:
To select text using a keyboard, follow these steps :

  1. Place the Insertion point to the left of the first character you wish to select.
  2. The Shift key is pressed down and the movement keys are used to highlight the required text.
  3. When the Shift key is released, the text is selected.

To Select – Press
One character to the left – Shift + ←
One character to the right – Shift + →
One line up – Shift + ↑
One line down – Shift + ↓
To the end of the current line – Shift +End
To the beginning of the current line – Shift + Home,
Entire Document – Ctrl + A

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
How will import (place) the text from other software programs in the page maker?
Answer:
You can insert text from other software program like MS-Word in the PageMaker documents.

  1. Choose File > Place. The Place dialog box will appear.
  2. Locate the document that contains the text you want to place and select it.
  3. Click on Open in the Place dialog box. The pointer changes to the loaded text icon ( )
  4. Make a text block to place the text. (Or) Click in the page to place the text.

The text will be placed in the page.
If the text to be placed is too big to fit on one page, PageMaker allows you to place it on several pages. This can be done manually or automatically.

Manual text flow:

1. Position the loaded text icon at a comer of the area where you want to place text, hold down the mouse button, and drag to define the text block. Release the mouse button.

2. Text flows into the defined area. If there is more text than fits in the text block you defined, a red triangle appears in the bottom windowshade handle.

3. Click once on this and the loaded text icon reappears. Now generate a new text block and # click. Repeat this process until there is no more text to place.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
Explain how will you draw a rounded corner rectangle?
Answer:
Drawing a Rounded Corner Rectangle
To draw a rounded-comer rectangle:

  1. Double-click the Rectangle tool in the toolbox.
  2. The Rounded Comers dialog box appears.
  3. Choose a comer setting from the preset shapes.
  4. Click on OK. The cursor changes to a cross hair.
  5. Click and drag anywhere on the screen.
  6. Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the desired size.
  7. Press the Shift key as you draw to constrain the shape to a rounded-comer square.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 4.
Explain how will you draw a dotted line?
Answer:
To draw a Dotted line:

  1. Double click the Line tool from the toolbox. A Custom Stroke dialogue box appears.
  2. Select the required Stroke style in the drop-down list box.
  3. Then click OK button. Now the cursor changes to a cross hair.
  4. Click and drag on the screen to draw your dotted line. As you drag, the line appears.
  5. Release the mouse button and the line will be drawn and selected, with sizing handles on either end.
    Resize the line by clicking and dragging the handles, if necessary.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
Explain how will you print a document in the page maker?
Answer:
Print a document:

(i) Choose File > Print in the menu bar (or) Press Ctrl + P in the keyboard. The Print Document dialog box appears
(ii) Choose the settings in the Print Document dialog box as

  • Select the printer from the Printer drop-down list box.
  • Choose the pages to be printed in the Pages group box by selecting one of the following available options:

All:
This option prints the whole document.

Ranges:
This option prints individual pages by the page number or a range of pages.
You can use commas to separate the page numbers (e.g., 5,7,19).
Use a hyphen to print page ranges(e.g., 10-17; this will print all pages from page numbers 10 . to 17).
To print from a particular page to the end of the document, enter the starting page number followed by a hyphen (e.g., 5 -).
You may also combine individual page numbers and a range of pages (e.g., 5, 9, 15-26).
Print: You can also print only odd-numbered or even-numbered pages. Select the Odd pages or Even pages Option from the Print drop-down list box.

  • Type the number of copies you want in the Copies text box.
  • You can choose whether to collate the pages or not. Suppose you want to print 4 copies of a 5 pages document

If the Collate option is not selected. PageMaker will first print 4 copies of page 1, then 4 copies of page 2, and so on.
If the Collate option is selected, PageMaker will print a complete set of pages 1 to 5, then a second set, and so on.

(iii) After choosing from the options in the Print Document dialog box, click Print button to print the document. Make sure the printer is switched on.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Students can Download Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1 Pdf, Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Papers helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

TN State Board 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Time: 2 1/2 Hours
Maximum Marks: 90

General Instructions:

  • The question paper comprises of four parts.
  • You are to attempt all the sections in each part. An internal choice of questions is provided wherever applicable.
  • All questions of Part I, II, III, and IV are to be attempted separately.
  • Question numbers 1 to 20 in Part I are Multiple Choice Questions of one mark each. These are to be answered by writing the correct answer along with the corresponding option code.
  • Part II has got two sections. The questions are of two marks each. Question numbers 21 to 26 in Section I and Question numbers 27 to 30 in Section II are to be answered in about one or two sentences each.
  • Question numbers 31 to 40 in Part III are of three marks each and have been divided in three sections. These are to be answered as directed.
  • Question numbers 41 and 47 in Part IV are of five marks each. These are to be answered as directed.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Part -1

I. Answer all the questions. [20 x 1= 20]
Choose the correct synonyms for the underlined words from the options given:

Question 1.
There was little hope for his recovery.
(a) discovery
(b) loss
(c) damage
(d) recuperation
Answer:
(d) recuperation

Question 2.
If used sparingly, the newly found cylinders could get us down to south.
(a) extravagantly
(b) lavishly
(c) economically
(d) sufficiently
Answer:
(c) economically

Question 3.
Individual liberty would become social anarchy.
(a) vanity
(b) civility
(c) lawlessness
(d) cooperation
Answer:
(c) lawlessness

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Choose the correct antonyms for the underlined words from the options given:

Question 4.
The driver disapproved of their shabby appearance.
(a) dirty
(b) unkempt
(c) smart
(d) untidy
Answer:
(c) smart

Question 5.
which are not to be despised.
(a) liked
(b) defeated
(c) hated
(d) dare
Answer:
(a) liked

Question 6.
“Don’t buy,” warned Luigi, our cautious driver.
(a) sloppy
(b) repulsive
(c) reckless
(d) proud
Answer:
(c) reckless

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 7.
Choose the correct combination for the compound word “outlaw”.
(a) Noun + Verb
(b) Verb + Noun
(c) Gerund + Noun
(d) Preposition + Noun
Answer:
(d) Preposition + Noun

Question 8.
Choose the correct expansion of “DSLR” camera.
(a) Digital Single Lens Refraction
(b) Digital Single Light Reflex
(c) Digital Service Lens Reflex
(d) Digital Single Lens Reflex
Answer:
(d) Digital Single Lens Reflex

Question 9.
Choose the meaning of the foreign word in the sentence:
Alan is going to travel to Europe this summer, but he’s planning on only taking one rucksack.
(a) rug
(b) quilt
(c) back pack
(d) suitcase
Answer:
(c) back pack

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 10.
Choose the correct combination for the blended word “edutainment”.
(a) education + entertainment
(b) edn + ment
(c) edu + tent
(d) ed + tenant
Answer:
(a) education + entertainment

Question 11.
Choose the clipped form for “necktie”.
(a) entie
(b) tie
(c) neckie
(d) necty
Answer:
(b) tie

Question 12.
A passion for writing is known as …………………… .
(a) genocide
(b) philosophy
(c) graphomania
(d) cardiologist
Answer:
(c) graphomania

Question 13.
Form a derivative by adding the right suffix to the word ‘devote’.
(a) -tion
(b) -ly
(c) -ness
(d) -ment
Answer:
(a) -tion

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 14.
Fill in the blanks with a suitable relative pronoun.
Nicola …………………… was glaring at his young brother was in vexation.
(a) whose
(b) who
(c) when
(d) which
Answer:
(b) who

Question 15.
Fill in the blanks with a suitable preposition.
This material is different …………………… that.
(a) to
(b) with
(c) of
(d) from
Answer:
(d) from

Question 16.
Choose the correct question tag for the following statement.
Everybody was very happy ……………………?
(a) wasn’t they
(b) haven’t they
(c) weren’t they
(d) isn’t they
Answer:
(c) weren’t they

Question 17.
Choose the suitable meaning or idiom found in the following sentence.
My class teacher examined my paper with a fine tooth comb before handing it to the external examiner.
(a) examining in great detail
(b) casually seeing
(c) carelessly reviewing
(d) examining with indifference
Answer:
(a) examining in great detail

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 18.
Substitute the underlined word with the appropriate polite alternative.
Vincent Parker is a reputed burier in this locality for Christians.
(a) disposer
(b) mortician
(c) expeller
(d) end maker
Answer:
(b) mortician

Question 19.
Choose the correct sentence pattern for the following sentence.
They put on quite a show that day.
(a) SVAOA
(b) SVOC
(c) SVO
(d) SVCA
Answer:
(a) SVAOA

Question 20.
Fill in the blank with a suitable phrasal verb.
The guest lecturer asked the students to …………………… and pay attention.
(a) pipe over
(b) be serious
(c) be playful
(d) pipe down
Answer:
(d) pipe down

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Part – II
Section – 1

Read the following sets of poetic lines and answer any four from it. [4 x 2 = 8]

Question 21.
“We could do nothing, being sold.”
(a) Why couldn’t they do anything?
(b) Why did they feel helpless?
Answer:
(a) The enemies had entered through the wicket gate stealthily and easily occupied their castle.
(b) They felt helpless because they had no weapon to fight “Gold” their invisible enemy. Their castle fell due to the unnoticed greed of their warder, an aged man.

Question 22.
“And oft at nights the garden overflows
With one sweet song that seems to have no close,
Sung darkling from our tree, while men repose.”
(a) What overflows the garden at night?
(b) What is called the darkling’?
Answer:
(a) One sweet song overflows in the garden at night.
(b) Nightingale is called the darkling.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 23.
‘‘‘‘And then the lover,
Sighing like furnace, with a woeful ballad
Made to his mistress ’ eyebrow. ”
(a) What does the lover do for his mistress?
(b) What is the poetic device used in the second line?
Answer:
(a) The lover is always sighing and longing for his beloved. He writes a sad ballad describing the eyebrow of his mistress.
(b) ‘Simile’ is used as a poetic device in the second line.

Question 24.
“This is my son, mine own Telemachus,
To whom I leave the sceptre and the isle Well-loved of me,”
(а) Who does Ulysses entrust his kingdom to, in his absence?
(b) Bring out the significance of the ‘sceptre’.
Answer:
(a) Ulysses entrusts his kingdom to his beloved son Telemachus in his absence.
(b) Sceptre is an ornamental staff carried by a King on ceremonial occasions as a symbol of sovereignty. It symbolizes the power of a king.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 25.
“Tell him time as a stuff can be wasted.
Tell him to be a fool ever so often”
(a) Why does the poet suggest that time can be wasted?
(b) Identify the figure of speech in the above line.
Answer:
(a) Unless one wastes one’s time, one may not commit mistakes and learn from them. Besides learning not to repeat those mistakes would naturally make him wiser.
(b) Simile

Question 26.
“A film the mother-eagle’s eye When her bruised eaglet breathes”
(а) Who is compared to the mother eagle in the above lines?
(b) Explain the comparison.
Answer:
(a) Napoleon Bonaparte is compared to mother eagle.
(b) A mother eagle will be proud when the eaglet takes on a stronger predator. When the eaglet is hurt, the mother eagle will be naturally sad as no mother will want the young one to perish in a combat. The king, like a mother, is sad about the impending death of a valiant boy-soldier.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Section – 2

Answer any three of the following questions. [3 x 2 = 6]

Question 27.
Report the dialogue.
John : What were you doing, Mary?
Mary : I was making these paper flowers.
Answer:
John asked Mary what she had been / was doing. Mary replied that she had been/was making those paper flowers.

Question 28.
He did not invite her. She didn’t come, (combine using if)
Answer:
She would have come if he had invited her.

Question 29.
Rewrite the sentence making an inversion in the conditional clause. If the people had not been informed, the situation would have been much worse.
Answer:
Had the people not been informed, the situation would have been much worse. Or Had the people been informed, the situation would not have been much worse.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 30.
We saw the flash of lightning, and seconds later we heard a rumble of thunder. (Change the following into a complex sentence)
Answer:
When we saw the flash of lightning, seconds later we heard a rumble of thunder.

Part-III
Section -1

Explain any two of the following with reference to the context. [2 x 3 = 6]

Question 31.
Dear is the Casuarina to my soul;
Answer:
Reference: These words are from the poem, ‘Our Casuarina Tree” written by Torn Dutt.
Context: The poet says this while highlighting the importance of Casuarina tree in her life.
Explanation: The poet explains that she, her friends and siblings have spent long hours playing and enjoying themselves under the tree’s shade. The tree has been her friend since childhood. There is a special bonding between the poet and the tree. So, it is dear to her soul.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 32.
“……And then the justice,
In fair round belly with good capon lined,
With eyes severe and beard of formal cut,
Full of wise saws and modern instances;
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem, ‘All the world’s a stage” written by William Shakespeare.
Context: The poet says these words while describing the fifth stage of life.
Explanation: At this stage, he behaves like a judge pronouncing his decisive opinions with the modem instances. He quotes wise maxims from his own life experiences to influence other people. He is fond of eating delicacies unmindful of the protruding belly size.

Question 33.
To follow knowledge like a sinking star,
Beyond the utmost bound of human thought.
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem, ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context: The poet says these words while describing the quest Ulysses has for adventure and fulfillment.
Explanation: Similar to a sinking star, Ulysses wants to pursue in his failing old age to pursue knowledge like the goal of Goethe’s Faust, his quest is defined by the pursuit of new and unique knowledge “beyond the utmost bound of human thought”.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Section – 2

Answer any two of the following questions in about 30 words. [2 x 3 = 6]

Question 34.
Who took the author to the cubicle?
Answer:
A trained nurse who was very familiar with Nicola and Jacopo took the narrator in. She led him through a cool, tiled vestibule into the hospital, the villa had become. She left him at the door of a little cubicle from where he can watch unseen Nicola and Jacopa chatting with their ailing sister.

Question 35.
Whom does the author call ‘misguided people’? What is his advice to them?
Answer:
Some misguided people admit that they drink tea for stimulation and warmth. They are not interested in tea. So, they add sugar to take the taste away. He advises them to drink tea without adding sugar for a fortnight. They would never again ruin the real taste of tea by adding sugar.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 36.
The soft snow was difficult and dangerous. Why?
Answer:
The soft snow made a route on top of the ridge both dangerous and difficult. Sometimes it held Hillary’s weight. But often it gave way suddenly. Thus.it was dangerous for the climbers. But both persisted and trudged ahead for 400 feet and reached the southern summit.

Section – 3

Answer any three of the following.

Question 37.
Study the graph given and answer the questions, that follow. [3 x 3 = 9]
Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1 1
(а) Which type of tourist centre is preferred by the third largest number of tourists?
(b) Which type of tourist centre is preferred more than Beach resorts?
(c) Name the tourist centres preferred the least.
Answer:
(a) Pilgrim centres is preferred by the third largest number of tourists.
(b) Hill stations are preferred more than beach resorts. ‘
(c) Historical monuments are preferred the least.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 38.
Write a dialogue between of minimum three exchanges an abandoned sick man and a student-volunteer.
Answer:
Student: Grandpa, how is your health?
Old man: (Tears trickling down the cheek) Did you call me grandpa?
Student : Yes, you are of the same age as my own grandpa.
Old man: I too have a grandson of your age who was separated from me years ago.
Student : Oh, I am so sorry. Here, please take some idlis that I have brought for you.
Old man: God bless you my child.

Question 39.
How will you fix a fuse?
Answer:
I will switch off the main line. Pull out the carrier.
I shall verify if the filament of wire is “intact” or burnt out. If it is burnt out, I shall tie the ends of the carrier with a thin wire and carefully insert it in the carrier plug point.
Then I shall switch on the main line. The lights will come back to life.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 40.
Complete the proverbs using the words given below:.
(a) A penny saved is a penny …………. (borrowed, earned, invested)
(b) Darkest hour is just before the …………. (dusk, midnight, dawn)
(e) Don’t change horses …………. (mid stream, always, again)
Answer:
(a) earned
(b) dawn
(c) mid stream

Part – IV

Answer the following questions:
Answer in a paragraph in about 150 words.

Question 41.
Write a character sketch of Nicola and Jacopo.
Answer:
Nicola was thirteen and Jacopo only twelve. They were brothers. They were tanned, had tangled hair and dark earnest eyes. Though they were just kids, they were serious about their work. They did hundreds of errands for the tourists. They were found doing brisk business shining shoes or selling wild berries. They had the skill to find seats in theater for the tourists and also guide the tourists through many important sites of the city of Verona such as Juliet’s tomb. Jacopo was lively as a squirrel. Nicola’s smile was steady and engaging yet in their innocent faces one could find seriousness far beyond their years. What struck one was the extreme willingness of both the boys to work. Under the scorching Sun, they hawked newspapers. When the narrator enquired what they did with the money they earned as they were not spending it on clothes or food or saving it for emigrating to America, Nicola coloured but he did not reveal the secret family adversity. Both were gentlemen because they did not want any one’s sympathy.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

[OR]

Civilization can only exist when the public collectively accepts constraints on its freedom of action – Explain.

Human beings, by nature are quick to find fault with the imperfections of others. They don’t usually realize the truth that they have to accommodate their liberty to the liberty of others. A reasonable consideration for the rights and feelings of others is the foundation of social conduct. It is in small matters of conduct, in the observance of the rules of road, that we pass judgement on ourselves. We assess ourselves as civilized or uncivilized. We are civilized if we enjoy our rights without violating the rights of others or eroding into the privacy of others. It is the little habits of common place interaction that make up the great sum of life and sweeten or make bitter the journey. In a civilized society, public collectively accepts the fact that freedom is an accommodation of interests of others. It means curtailing a part of one’s own liberty to the liberty of others. So, it is true that civilization can only exist and prosper when the public collectively accepts constraints to its freedom of action.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 42.
Describe the various stages of a man’s life picturised in the poem “All the World’s a stage.”
Answer:
Shakespeare has beautifully portrayed this world as a huge open theatre where in all humans play seven acts/ages. In the first act, he is a helpless infant puking on the nurse’s arms mewling like a kitten. In the second stage, he is the grumbling/whining school student. He moves to school like a snail/unwillingly with his slate and bag. In the third Act, he is a lover sighing and yearning for the attention of his lady love. He composes romantic ballads complaining his love that he needs a better deal. In the fourth Act, he becomes a quick-tempered soldier, aggressive and ambitious, ready to stake his life for the sake of bubble reputation. As he matures, he becomes a wise judge of contemporary life quoting wise maxims to endorse his opinion. He is firm and serious. In the sixth act, his stout legs become thin making his trousers of youth unsuitable. Thin and lean legs easily travel through them but are unable to stay due to a slimmed waist. His bass voice has become treble like that of a child. In the last act, he is sans teeth, sans eyes, sans taste and sans everything (i.e.) loses all senses. He departs the world.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

[OR]

In the poem ‘Incident of the French Camp’ the young soldier matched his emperor in courage and patriotism. Elucidate your answer.

Emperor Napoleon was an astute planner planning the moves of the battle observing each step the French army made. Emperor Napoleon being a bold and wise warrior always had two plans, one to advance forward if the battle brings victory and the next as to what to be done in case the battle is lost. He was not resting at a tent during the battle. He was very close to the place of battle planning the strategic steps. Similarly, the boy-soldier was also equally brave. Unlike the emperor, the boy soldier flung himself in the midst of battle and risked his life. He did not bother about his death. He doggedly carried out the mission of hoisting French national flag. Instead of being carried away for first aid, he hurried on horse back to communicate the news of conquest of Ratisbon despite his chest being split into two. So, it is obvious the boy soldier’s patriotism and gallantry are equal to that of Napoleon.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 43.
Write a paragraph of about 150 words by developing the following hints into a paragraph:

Liquid life – precious than gold – ship wreck – exquisite nectar – Pi’s forehead – expressing joy – heart beat – blood flow – Strength and suppleness – return – world of dead – ecstatic basked in bliss and plentitude – experiences of Pi-indisputable – water, elixir of life.
Answer:
The author calls it ‘liquid life’. For a thirsty man, a cup of water is more precious than gold. He had not drunk water for two and a half days after the ship wreck. Pi drank two litres of the most exquisite nectar (i.e.) water. Suddenly Pi’s forehead was wet with fresh perspiration. Everything in him right down to the pores of his skin was expressing joy. A sense of well¬being quickly overcame him. His skin relaxed, his joints moved with greater ease. His heart began to beat like a merry drum. Blood started flowing through his veins like cars from a wedding party honking their way through the town. Strength and suppleness came back to his muscles. His head became clearer. Truly he was returning to life from the world of dead. After being thirsty for a while, to be drunk on water is noble and ecstatic basked in bliss and plentitude for several minutes. These experiences of Pi highlight the indisputable fact that water is the elixir of life.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

[OR]

Margot – vivid memory – Sun – five years old – planet earth – Venus planet – Sunny day – tantrums – thousands of dollars – Sun shape and warmth – students hatred -convictions – conflict with Margot and other children.
Answer:
Margot had a vivid memory of having seen the Sun till she was five years old on the planet earth. Though she had come to Venus planet school, her heart longed for the ‘Sunny day’. Preparations were going on to send her back to earth because one day she threw tantrums refusing to take a shower. Her intended visit could cost thousands of dollars to her parents. She drew paintings of the Sun and clarified the shape of the Sun and the warmth it generated. All the other students hated her superior understanding of the Sun and her possible return to the earth. She was not their “kind”. She kept her convictions. She refused to mix with them. This was the conflict with Margot and other children in the story.

Question 44.
Write a summary or Make notes of the following passage.
Answer:
Compared to a motorbike or car, the bicycle is a slow moving vehicle but its popularity has been on the increase in recent years. There are many reasons for this. Firstly, the bicycle does not require petrol or diesel as a car or motorbike does. In these days of fuel shortage this is definite advantage; it draws power from the rider. The bicycle, moreover, is small, light and convenient. There are no parking problems. Another reason for its popularity is that it takes one, to one’s destination with more certainty than cars or large motorbikes which are often held up in traffic jams. Then, there is the fact that the bicycle causes absolutely no pollution. It produces no noise and no smoke. Finally, it is now known that riding a bicycle is good exercise which tones up one’s muscles. No wonder, more and more people prefer a bicycle to other modes of transport.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Summary

No. of words given in the original passage: 153
No. of words to be written in the summary: 153/3 = 51 ± 5
Rough Draft
Cycle’s popularity is on the high. It doesn’t need petrol or diesel. Due to fuel shortage, cycle is a definite advantage. It is a smoll light convenient. No parking problems and traffic jams. Moreover cycle causes no pollution, noise or smoke. Cycle is a good exercise that tones up muscles.

Fair Draft Cycle – the best mode of transport
Cycle has many advantages over other modes of transport. Its popularity is on the increase. It doesn’t need petrol or diesel. Cycle is a definite advantage. It is small, light, convenient. Parking problems and traffic jams do not affect the cyclist’s progress. Moreover, cycle causes no pollution such. Cycling keeps one fit, tones up one’s muscles.

No. of words in the summary: 56
Or
Notes
Title: Cycle – the best mode of transport
Cycles: advantageous over cars and bikes
Popularity: no petrol or diesel
Size: small, no parking issue, traffic jam
Environment friendly: no pollution, a good exercise.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 45.
You are A. Shanti, in-charge of the Physical Education Department of your school. You need various items of sports for the department. Write a letter to Mr. Rahmat Singh & Sons, a well known supplier of sports goods, Dharmapuri enquiring him about the rates of each item and the maximum discount that they can offer to you.
12 Feb 2020
From
A.V. Sharmila
10th Main Road,
Valadi
Dharmapuri

To
M/S Rahmat Singh & Sons
Shop No. 59
Dharmapuri
Dear Sir,

Sub: Enquiring about rates & discount
We are old customers of yours and need no introduction. As we are placing a bulk order with you, we want to enquire at what rates you can supply each item of different sports. The details of the items are furnished below.

Equipment Numbers
Goal posts 16
Rods and tackle 14
Wickets and bases 30
Nets 20
Flying discs 35
Hockey stick 40

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Kindly study them thoroughly and give the lowest quotations.
Let us remind you that you have been giving us 25% flat discount on various items. As we are an educational institution, we would expect a.special discount that dealers generally give to such institutions. Kindly do the needful and furnish all the details regarding the inquiries at the earliest.

Yours faithfully,
A. Shanti

To
M/S Rahmat Singh & Sons
Shop No. 59
Dharmapuri

[OR]

Write a paragraph on the topic “How will you protect the earth from the evilof deforestation”.

Environmental Pollution and need for Conservation

Deforestation leaves wild animals and birds homeless. We, humans face a lot of undesirable environmental changes. The most threatening one is Global Warming. Deforestation affects seasonal cycles. We experience droughts or floods, long summer or winter, thus, deforestation affects seasonal cycles. One more harmful effects of deforestation is soil erosion. Thus, the harmful consequences of deforestation are manifold. Tropical rainforests are being felled substantially for the purpose of farming and human habitation. Afforestation should be done in a large scale. This should be initiated by government and we all should actively participate and involve and most importantly act to protect mother nature.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 46.
Spot the errors and rewrite the sentences correctly
(a) A million rupees are a big sum.
(b) Beside Tennis, I play cricket.
(c) Both Giri as well as Raghu have scored centum.
(d) Brittney spears are a popular singer.
(e) Every one of us were given a prize.
Answer:
(a) A million rupees is a big sum.
(b) Besides Tennis, I play cricket.
(c) Both Giri and Raghu have scored centum.
(d) Brittney spears is a popular singer.
(e) Every one of us was given a prize.

[OR]

Fill in the blanks correctly.
(a) I need to get a new ……………. (sole/soul) and restore my favourite ……………. (pear/pair) of walking shoes.
(b) You ……………. have a cookie after dinner. (Use a modal in the given blank)
(c) My sister ……………. read a book at night(use a semi-modal)
(d) Martha ……………. (walk) three miles a day before she broke her leg. (use a proper tense)
Answer:
(a) sole/pair
(b) may
(c) used to
(d) had been walking

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Question 47.
Identify each of the following sentences with the fields given below:
(a) A normal bulb uses almost 80% energy to create heat and only 20% for production of light.
(b) Dropouts who come for mid-day meal are returning to class.
(c) In the world’s largest open-air theatre, stories of Krishna and Kansa are magically retold.
(d) Sports was started for the differently abled children.
(e) Technology develops machines that can substitute for humans and replicate human actions.
[Education; Paralympics; Science; Robotics; Media]
Answer:
(a) Science
(b) Education
(c) Media
(d) Paralympics
(e) Robotics

[OR]

Read the following passage and answer the questions in your own words.
Three days before John Wilkes Booth fatally shot the President, Lincoln relayed a dream he had to his wife in which he was wandering through the rooms of the White House hearing sobs and crying as he went. When he reached the East Room, he noticed a casket. He asked a soldier who was in the casket and the soldier replied that it was the President – killed by an assassin. Lincoln woke up from that dream but failed to sleep for the rest of the night.

Little did the President know that as he dreamed of his own assassination, the actual plot was being formulated by John Wilkes Booth, an actor and Confederate sympathizer. Booth’s Original plan was simply to kidnap the President, but as his anger grew over Lincoln’s support for former slaves, he resolved to kill the president. On the night of April 14, 1865, Lincoln was to attend the performance of Our American Cousin at Ford’s Theater. It was a perfect opportunity for Booth, who knew every line of the play, and knew every comer and corridor of the theater. Lincoln’s presidential box was supposed to be manned by a police officer named John Frederick Parker.

Parker, however, left his post to visit a tavern, and may or may not have returned. He might have fallen asleep on the job. Booth, with easy access to the President’s box, waited for the right moment during the play, rushed into the box, and shot the President in the back of the head. As the President fell over, Mary Todd Lincoln caught him then began screaming. Soon, chaos broke out as the audience attempted to flee the theater. Booth vaulted from the box to the stage below but caught his boot spur in a treasury flag and broke his leg. Before he escaped from the theater, a visibly limping Booth was said to have yelled “Sic Semper Tyrannis,” which means “Thus Always to Tyrants” in Latin. It is also the motto of the state of Virginia.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Questions:
a. What disturbed Abraham Lincoln just three days before his assassin?
b. What did he notice in the East room?
c. Who formulated the plot of killing Abraham Lincoln?
d. What was the original plan made by Booth? Why did he change?
e. What happened to Booth when he attempted to flee the theatre?
Answers:
(a) Abraham Lincoln had a dream where he heard sobs and crying in the rooms of the white House. On enquiry he was also told that the president was killed by an assassin. This disturbed Lincoln.
(b) Lincoln noticed a casket in the East room.
(c) John Wilkes Booth, an actor and Confederate sympathizer formulated the plot of killing Abraham Lincoln.
(d) The original plan was to just kidnap the President but since Lincoln’s support for former slaves angered Booth, he resolved to kill the president.
(e) When Booth vaulted from the box to the stage below, he trampled over the treasury flag and broke his leg.

Tamil Nadu 12th English Model Question Paper 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Students can Download Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons Textual Evaluation Solved

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons Multiple Choice Questions.

Question 1.
The correct statement regarding the comparison of staggered and eclipsed conformations of ethane is ……….. [NEET]
(a) the eclipsed conformation of ethane is more stable than staggered conformation even though the eclipsed conformation has torsional strain.
(b) the staggered conformation of ethane is more stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has no torsional strain.
(c) the staggered conformation of ethane is less stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has torsional strain.
(d) the staggered conformation of ethane is less stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has no torsional strain.
Answer:
(b) the staggered conformation of ethane is more stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has no torsional strain.

Question 2.
The above reaction is an example of which of the following?
(a) Reirner Tiemann reaction
(b) Wurtz reaction
(c) Aldol condensation
(d) Hoffmann reaction
Answer:
(b) Wurtz reaction

Question 3.
An alkyl bromide (A) reacts with sodium in ether to form 4, 5-diethyloctane, the compound (A) is ……….
(a) CH3(CH2)3Br
(b) CH3(CH2)5Br
(c) CH3(CH2)3CH(Br)CH3
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons


Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons - 256

Question 4.
The C-H bond and C-C bond in ethane are formed by which of the following types of overlap ………..
(a) sp3 – s and sp3 – sp3
(b) sp2 – s and sp3 – sp3
(c) sp – sp and sp – sp
(d) p – s and p – p
Answer:
(a) sp3 – s and sp3 – sp3

Question 5.
In the following reaction Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
the major product obtained is ………
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6.
Which of the following is optically active?
(a) 2 – Methylpentane
(b) Citric acid
(c) Glycerol
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) 2 – Methylpentane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 7.
The compounds formed at anode in the electrolysis of an aqueous solution of potassium acetate are ……….
(a) CH4 and H2
(b) CH4 and CO2
(c) C2 H6 and CO2
(d) C2 H6 and Cl2
Answer:
(c) C2 H6 and CO2

Question 8.
The general formula for cycloalkanes is …………
(a) CnHn
(b) CnH2n
(c) CnH2n-2
(d) CnH2n+2
Answer:
(b) CnH2n

Question 9.
The compound that will react most readily with gaseous bromine has the formula ………….[NEET]
(a) C3H6
(b) C2H2
(c) C4H10
(d) C2H4
Answer:
(a) C3H6

Question 10.
Which of the following compounds shall not produce propene by reaction with HBr followed by elimination (or) only direct elimination reaction? [NEET]
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
(b) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – OH
(c) H2C – C = O
(d) CH3 – CH2 – CH2Br
Answer:
(c) H2C = C = O

Question 11.
Which among the following alkenes on reductive ozonolysis produces only propanone?
(a) 2 – Methylpropene
(b) 2 – Methylbut – 2 – ene
(c) 2, 3 – Dimethylbut – 1 – ene
(d) 2, 3 – Dimethylbut – 2 – ene
Answer:
(d) 2, 3 – Dimethylbut – 2 – ene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 12.
The major product formed when 2 bromo – 2 – methylbutane is refluxed with ethanolic KOH is ……..
(a) 2 – methylbut – 2 – ene
(b) 2 – methylbutan – 1 – ol
(c) 2 – methyl but – 1 – ene
(d) 2 – methylbutan -2- ol
Answer:
(a) 2 – methylbut – 2 – ene

Question 13.
Major product of the below mentioned reaction is ……….
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
(a) 2 – chloro – 1 – iodo – 2 – methylpropane
(b) 1 – chloro – 2 – iodo – 2 – methylpropane
(c) 1 ,2 – dichioro – 2 – methylpropane
(d) 1, 2 diiodo 2 – methylpropane
Answer:
(a) 2 – chioro – 1 – lodo – 2 – methylpropane

Question 14.
The IUPAC name of the following compound is ………
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
(a) trans – 2 – chloro-3 iodo – 2 – pentane
(b) cis – 3 – iodo – 4 – chloro – 3 – pentane
(c) trans – 3 – iodo – 4 – chloro – 3 – pentene
(d) cis – 2 chloro – 3 – lodo -2 – pdntene
Answer:
(a) trans -2 – chloro -3 – iodo – 2 – pentane

Question 15.
cis – 2 – butene and trans – 2 – butene are ……….
(a) conformational isomers
(b) structural isomers
(c) configurational isomers
(d) optical isomers
Answer:
(c) configurational isomers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 16.
Identify the compound (A) in the following reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 17.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons where a is ………
(a) Zn
(b) Conc. H2SO4
(c) Alc. KOH
(d) Dil. H2SO4
Answer:
(c) Alc. KOH

Question 18.
Consider the nitration of benzene using mixed conc. FeSO4 and HNO3, if a large quantity of KHSO4 is added to the mixture, the rate of nitration will be ………
(a) unchanged
(b) doubled
(c) faster
(d) slower
Answer:
(d) slower

Question 19.
In which of the following molecules, all atoms are co-planar?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (b)

Question 20.
Propyne on passing through red hot iron tube gives ………
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 21.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 22.
Which one of the following is non-aromatic?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 23.
Which of the following compounds will not undergo Friedal – crafts reaction easily? [NEET]
(a) Nitrobenzene
(b) Toluene
(c) Cumene
(d) Xyiene
Answer:
(a) Nitrobenzene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 24.
Some meta-directing substituents in aromatic substitution are given. Which one is most deactivating?
(a) – COOH
(b) – NO2
(c) – C N
(d) – SO3H
Answer:
(b) – NO2

Question 25.
Which of the following can be used as the halide component for friedal – crafts reaction?
(a) Chiorobenzene
(b) Bromobenzene
(c) Chloroethene
(d) Isopropyl chloride
Answer:
(d) Isopropyl chloride

Question 26.
An alkane is obtained by decarboxylation of sodium propionate. Same alkane can be prepared by ……..
(a) Catalytic hydrogenation of propene
(b) action of sodium metal on iodomethane
(c) reduction of 1 – chloropropane
(d) reduction of bromomethane
Answer:
(b) action of sodium metal on iodomethane

Question 27.
Which of the following is aliphatic saturated hydrocarbon?
(a) C8H18
(b) C9H18
(c) C8H14
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) C8H18

Question 28.
Identify the compound ‘Z’ in the following reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
(a) Formaldehyde
(b) Acetaldehyde
(c) Formic acid
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Formaldehyde

Question 29.
Peroxide effect (Kharasch effect) can be studied in case of ………
(a) Oct – 4 – ene
(b) Hex – 3 – ene
(c) Pent – 1 – ene
(d) But – 2 – ene
Answer:
(a) Pent – 1 – ene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 30.
2 – butyne on chlorination gives ………
(a) 1 – chlorobutane
(b) 1, 2 – dichlorobutane
(c) 1, 1, 2, 2 – tetrachlorobutane
(d) 2, 2, 3, 3 – tetrachlorobutane
Answer:
(d) 2, 2, 3, 3 tetra chiorobutane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons Short Answer Questions

Question 31.
Give IUPAC names for the fllowing compounds …………
(i) CH3 CH = CH – CH= CH – C ≡C – CH3
(ii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(iii) (CH3)3 C-C≡C-CH (CH3)2
(iv) Ethyl – isopropyl – acetytene
(v) CH≡C – C = C – C≡CH
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 32.
Identify the compound A. B, C and D in the following series of reactions.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 33.
Write a short note on ortho – para directors aromat&c e1ropiJic substitution reactions.
Answer:
The group which increases the eleiron deity at oìo and para positions of the ring are known as ortho-para directors.
Example:
-OH, -NH2 -NHR -CH3, -OCH3 etc.
Let us consider the directive influences of phenolic( -OH) group. Phenol is the resonace hybrid of following structure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
In these resonance structures the negative charge residue is present on ortho and para posrtions of the ring structure. Therefore the electron density at ortho and para positions increases as compared to the metci position, thus phenolic group activities the benzene ring for electrophilic attack at ortho and para positions and hetice – OH group is an ortho-para direction or and an activator.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 34.
How is propyne prepared from an alkyene dihalide?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 35.
An alkyl halide with molecular formula C6H13Br on dehydrohalogenation gave two isomeric alkenes X and Y with molecular formula C6H12. On reductive ozonolysis, X and Y gave four compounds CH3COCH3. CH3CHO, CH3CH2CHO and (CH3)2 CHCHO. Find the alkyl halide.
Answer:
1. C6H13Br is 3 – Bromo – 4 methylpentanc.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
2. 3 – Bromo -4 methylpentane on dehydrogenation give two isomers X and Y as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
There fore C6H13 Br is 3 – Bromo – 4 – methy ipentane.

Question 36.
Describe the mechanism of Nitration of benzene.
Answer:
Step-1 :
Generation of \(\overset { \oplus }{ { NO }_{ 2 } } \) electrophile.
HNO3 + H2SO4 → \(\overset { \oplus }{ { NO }_{ 2 } } \) + H\(\overset { \oplus }{ { SO }_{ 4 } } \) + H2O

Step-2:
Attack of the electrophile on benzene ring to form arenium ion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step-3:
Rearomatisation of arenium ion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Overall Reaction:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 37.
How does Huckel rule help to decide the aromatic character of a compound?
Answer:
A compound is said to be aromatic, if it obeys the following rules:

  • The molecule must be cyclic.
  • The molecule must be co-planar.
  • Complete delocalisation of it-electrons in the ring.
  • Presence of (4n + 2) π electrons in the ring where n is an integer (n = 0,1,2 …)

This is known as Huckel’s rule.
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
1. It is cyclic one.
2. It is a co-planar molecule.
3. It has six delocalised ir electrons.
4. 4n + 2 = 6
4n = 6 – 2
4n = 4
n = 1
It obey Huckel’s rule, with n = 1, hence benzene is aromatic in nature.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 38.
Suggest the route for the preparation of the following from benzene.
1. 3 – chioro – nitrobenzene
2. 4- chlorotoluene
3. Bromobenzene
4. in – dinitrobenzene
Answer:
1. Preparation of 3 – chloronitro – benzene from benzene:
Benzene undergoes nitration and followed by chlorination and it leads to the formation of 3- chloronitrobenzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. Preparation 4-chiorotoluene from benzene:
Benzene undergoes Fnedel crafi’s alkylation followed by chlorination and it leads to the formation of 4-chiorotoluene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

3. Prepar2tion of Bromobenzene from benzene:
Bezene undergo bromination to give bromobenzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

4. Preparation of m-dinitrobenzene from benzene:
Benzene undergo twice the time nitration to give m-dinitrobenzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 39.
Suggest a simple chemical test to distinguish propane and propene.
Answer:
Chemical test to distinguish between propane and propene:
1. Bromine water test:
Propene contains double bond, therefore when we pour the bromine water to propene sample, it decolounses the bromine water whereas propane which is a saturated hydrocarbon does not decolourise the bromine water.

2. Baeyer’s test:
When propene reacts with Bayer’s reagent it gives 1,2 dihydroxypropene. Propane does not react with Baeyer’s reagent.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 40.
What happens when isobutylene is treated with acidified potassium permanganate?
Answer:
Isobutylene is treated with acidified KMnO4 to give acetone.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 41.
how will you convert ethyl chloride in to –
1. ethane
2. n – butane
Answer:
1. Conversion of ethyl chloride into ethane:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. Conversion of ethyl chloride into n-butane:
Wurtz reaction:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 42.
Describe the conformers of n-butane.
Answer:
n-butane may be considered as a derivative of ethane as one hydrogen on each carbon atom is replaced by a methyl group.

Edipsed conformation:
In this conformation, the distance between the two methyl groups is minimum so there is maximum repulsion between them and it is the least stable conformer.

Anti or staggered form:
In this conformation, the distance between the two methyl groups is maximum and so there is minimum repulsion between them. It is the most stable conformer. The following potentially energy diagram shows the relative stability of various conformers of n-butane.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 43.
Write the chemical equations for combustion of propane.
Answer:
Chemical equations for combustion of propane:
The general combustion reaction for any alkane is:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 44.
Explain Markovnikoffs rule with suitable example.
Answer:
Markovnikoff’s rule: When an unsymmetrical alkene reacts with hydrogen halide, the hydrogen adds to the carbon atom that has more number of hydrogen and halogen adds to the carbon atom having fewer hydrogen atoms.
Example:
Addition of HBr to Propene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 45.
What happens when ethylene is passed through cold dilute alkaline potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Ethylene reacts with cold dilute alkaline KMnO4 solution to give ethylene glycol:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 46.
Write the structures of following alkanes.
1. 2, 3 – Dimethyl – 6 – (2 – methylpropyl) decane
2. 5 – (2 – Ethylbutyl) – 3, 3 – dimethyldecane
3. 5 (1,2 – Dimethyipropyl) – 2 – methylnonane
Answer:
1. 2, 3 – Dimethyl – 6 – (2 – rnethylpropyl) decane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
2. 5 – (2 – Ethylbutyl) – 3, 3- dimethyldecane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
3. 5 – (1,2 – Dimethylpropyl) – 2- methylnonane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 47.
How will you prepare propane from a sodium salt of fatty acid?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Sodium salt of butyric acid on heating with sodalime gives propane.

Question 48.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons - 257
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 49.
How will you distinguish 1 – butyne and 2 – butyne?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 50.
How will you distinguish 1 – butyene and 2 – butyne?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

In 1-butyne, terminal carbon atom contains atom one acidic hydrogen, therefore it will react with silver nitrate in the presence of ammonium hydroxide to give silver butynide. Whereas 2-butyne does not undergo such type of the reaction, because of the absence of acidic hydrogen.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons Evaluate Your self

Question 1.
Write the structural formula and carbon skeleton formula for all possible chain isomers of C6H14 (Hexane).
Answer:
C6H14 has five possible isomeric structures:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 2.
Give the IUPAC name for the following alkane.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 3.
Draw the structural formula for 4,5 -diethyl -3,4,5-trimethyloiane
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 4.
Water destroys Grignard reagents. Why?
Answer:
CH3MgX + HOH → CH4 – Mg(OH)X.
Water would protonate the grignard reagent and destroy the gngnard reagent, because the grignard carbon atom is highly nucleophilic. This would form a hydrocarbon. Therefore to make a grignard solution, only ether is the best solvent and water or alcohol are not used for that purpose.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 5.
Is it possible to prepare methane by Kolbe’s electrolytic method.
Answer:
Kolbe’s electrolytic method is suitable for the preparation of symmetrical alkanes, that is alkanes containing even number of carbon atoms. Methane has only one carbon, hence it cannot be prepared by Kolbe’s electrolytic method.

Question 6.
Write down the combustion reaction of propane whose AH° = -2220 kJ
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 7.
Why ethane is produced in chlorination of methane?
Answer:
Chlorination of methane involves free radical mechanism. During the propagation step methyl free radical is produced, which is involved in the termination step, the two methyl free radical then combines to form ethane.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 8.
How toluene can be prepared by this method?
(i) From n-heptane,
(ii) From 2-methyihexane
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(ii)Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
Write the IUPAC names for the following alkenes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 10.
Draw the structures for the following alkenes.

  1. 6 – Bromo – 2,3 – dimethyl 2 – hexene
  2. 5 – Bromo – 4 – chloro 1 – heptene
  3. 2,5 – Dimethyl 4 – octene
  4. 4 – Methyl – 2 pentene

Answer:
1. 6 – Bromo – 2,3 – dirnethyl – 2 – hexene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. 5 Bromo -4 – Chloro – 1 – heptene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

3. 2.5 – dimethyl – 4 – Octene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

4. 4 – methyl 2 pentene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 11.
Draw the structure and write down the IUPAC name for the isomerism exhibited by the molecular formulae:
1. C5H10 – Pentene (3 isomers)
2. C6H12 – Hexene (5 isomers)
Answer:
1. C5H10 – Pentene (3 isomers)
(a) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2 → 1- penlene (or) pent- 1-ene
(b) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH – CH3 → 2- pentene (or) pent-2-ene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. C6H12 – Hexene (5 isomers)
(a) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2 → Hex-I-ene
(b) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH – CH3 → Hex – 2 – ene
(c) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH – CH2 – CH3 → Hex – 3 – ene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
These two compounds exhibits constitutional isomerism.

Question 12.
Determine whether each of the following alkenes can exist as cis-trans isomers?
(a) 1 – Chloropropene
(b) 2 – Chloropropene
Answer:
(a) 1 – Chloropropene:
CH3 – CH = CHCl
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Therefore – 1 – Chloropropene has cis-trans isomers.

(b) 2 – Chloropropene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

In 2-Chloropropene, it deviates from the rule, that is “At least one same group is present on the two doubly bonded carbon atom”. Therefore-2-chloropropenc cannot exist as cis – trans isomers.

Question 13.
Draw cis-trans isomers for the following compounds
(a) 2- chloro-2-butene
(b) CH3 – CH= CH – CH2 – CH3
Answer:
(a) 2-Chloro-2-butene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(b) CH3 – CH = CH – CH – CH3
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 14.
How propene is prepared form 1, 2-dichloropropane?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 15.
How ozone reacts with 2-methyl propene?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 16.
An organic compound (A) on ozonolysis gives only acetaldehyde. (A) reacts with Br2 /CCl4 to give compound (B). Identify the compounds (A) and (B). Write the IUPAC name of (A) and (B). Give the geometrical isomers of (A).
Answer:
2-Rutene undergo ozonolysis to give acetaldehyde only.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Geometrical isomers of 2 – Butene (A):
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 17.
An organic compund (A) C2H4 decolourises bromine water. (A) on reaction with chlorine gives (Br). A reacts with HBr to give (C). Identify (A),(B),(C). Explain the reactions.
Answer:
(i) C2H4 (A), decolourises the bromine water. Therefore it contains double bond. Hence (A) is ethylene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 18.
Prepare propyne from its corresponding alkene.
Answer:
Preparation of propyne from propene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 19.
Write the products A & B for the following reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 20.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 21.
Calculate the number of rings present in C18H12.
Answer:
Double bond equivalent formula = ( C – \(\frac {1}{2}\) + \(\frac {1}{2}\))
Where C = no. of carbon atoms. H = no. of hydrogen and halogen atoms and N = no. of nitrogen atoms.
So. in C18H12 Double bond equkalent = 18 – \(\frac {12}{2}\) + 0 + 1 = 18 – 6 + 1 = 13
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
One ring is equal to one double bond equivalent.
∴ here four rings are there, four double bond equivalent arc used. So remaining, 13 – 4 = 9.
nine double bonds are present in the ring. Hence, C18H12 contain four aromatic rings.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 22.
write all possible isomers for an aromatic benzenoid compound having the molecular formula C8H10.
Answer:
Possible isomers for C8H10:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 23.
Write all possible isomers Iòr a monosubstituted aromatic benzenoid compound having the molecular formula C9H12
Answer:
Possible isomers for C9H12:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 24.
how benzene can be prepared by Grignard Reagent?
Answer:
Phenyl magnesium bromide reagent reacts with a water molecule to give benzene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 25.
Why benzene undergoes an electrophilic substitution reaction whereas alkenes undergo an addition reaction?
Answer:

  • Benzene possesses an unhybridised p-orbital containing one electron. The lateral overlap of their p-orbitals produces 3 it bond.
  • The six electron of the p-orbitais cover all the six carbon atoms and arc said to be delocalised.
  • Due to delocalisation, strong it-bond is formed which makes the molecule stable. Therefore benzene undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction, whereas alkenes undergo addition reaction.

Question 26.
Convert Ethyne to Benzene and name the process.
Answer:
Conversion of Ethyne into Benzene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

This process is one of the cyclic polymerisation process.

Question 27.
Toluene undergoes nitration easily than benzene.Why?
Answer:
1. Toluene has a methyl group on the benzene ring which is electron releasing group and hence activate the benzene ring by pushing the electrons on the benzene ring.
2. CH3 group is ortho – para director and ring activator. Therefore in toluene, ortho and para positions are the most reactive towards an electrophile, thus promoting electrophilic substitution reaction.
3. The methyl group hence makes it around 25 times more reactive than benzene. Therefore it undergoes nitration easily than benzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons Additional Questions Solved

Choose the correct statement.

Question 1.
The IUPAC name of neopentane is
a) 2 – methyl butane
b) 2, 2 – dimethyl propane
c) 2 – methyl propane
d) 2, 2- dimethyl butane
Answer:
b) 2, 2 – dimethyl propane

Question 2.
Statement – I : n-butane and iso – butane are isomers.
Statement – II : Because they are having same molecular formula but differs only in the structural formula.
(a) Statement -I and II are correct and statement – II is correct explanation of statement – I
(h) Statement – I and II are correct but statement – II is not correct explanation of statement -I
(c) Statement – I is correct but statement – II s wrong.
(d) Statement – I is wrong but statement – II is correct.
Answer:
(a) Statement -I and II are correct and statement – II is correct explanation of statement-I

Question 3.
The compressed gas available in cooking gas cylinders is a mixture of:
a) C6H6 + C6H5CH3
b) C2H4 + C2H2
c) C2H4 + CH4
d) C4H10 + C3H8
Answer:
d) C4H10 + C3H8

Question 4.
Find out the branched hydrocarbon from the following compounds.
(a) 1 – propane
(b) n – propane
(c) iso – butane
(d) n – butane –
Answer:
(c) iso – butane

Question 5.
Adam’s catalyst is:
a) platinum metal
b) palladium
c) nickel metal
d) PtO2
Answer:
d) PtO2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6.
Statement – I : Boiling point of methane is lower than that of butane.
Statement – II : The boiling point of continuous chain alkanes increases with increase in length of carbon chain.
(a) Statement – I and II are correct and statement – II is correct explanation of statement – I
(b) Statement – I and II are correct but statement – II is not correct explanation of statement -I
(c) Statement – I is correct but a statement – II is wrong.
(d) Statement – I is wrong but a statement – I is correct.
Answer:
(a) Statement – I and II are correct and statement – II is correct explanation of statement -I.

Question 7.
Methyl bromide is converted into ethane by heating it in an ether medium with
a) Al
b) Mg
c) Na
d) Cu
Answer:
c) Na

Question 8.
Consider the following statements.
(i) The process of reduction using sodium in liquid ammonia is called Birch reduction.
(ii) Birch reduction is stereospecific in reaction.
(iii) Aleynes can be reduced to cis – alkenes using Birch reduction. Which of the above statement is/are correct’?
(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (iii) only
(d) (ii) only
Answer:
(a) (i) and (ii)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
Statement – I : Alkenes are more reactive than alkanes.
Statement – II : Because of the presence of a double bond.
(a) Statement – I and II are correct and statement – II is correct explanation of statement – I
(b) Statement – I and Il are correct but statement – II is not correct explanation of statement -I
(c) Statement – I is correct but statement – II is wrong.
(d) Statement – I is wrong but statement – II is correct.
Answer:
(a) Statement – I and II are correct and statement – II is correct explanation of statement – I

Question 10.
Select the correct statement about alkanes
a) they are polar in nature
b) they are soluble in water
c) they are non – combustible
d) their dipole moment is zero
Answer:
d) their dipole moment is zero

Question 11.
Which one of the following has garlie odour?
(a) Ethane
(b) Ethene
(c) Ethyne
(d) Ethanol
Answer:
(c) Ethyne

Question 12.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify the X.
(a) Propane
(b) Acetone
(c) Acetaldehyde
(d) Formaldehyde
Answer:
(b) Acetone

Question 13.
Which one of the following is not a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon?
(a) Benzene
(b) Phenol
(c) Toluene
(d) Naphthalene
Answer:
(d) Naphthalene

Question 14.
Which one of the following is a polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon?
(a) Anthracene
(b) Phenol
(c) Benzene
(d) Toluene
Answer:
(a) Anthracene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 15.
Which one of the following is an aromatic compounds?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 16.
Conformational isomers are due to
a) Free rotation about C – C single bond
b) Frozen rotation about C – C single bond
e) Frozen rotation about C – C double bond
d) Restricted rotation about C – C single bond
Answer:
a) Free rotation about C – C single bond

Question 17.
Statements-I: Unlike alkenes and alkynes benzene undergoes substitution reactions rather than addition reactions under normal conditions.
Statements-II: Because of the delocalisation of electrons a strong t bond is formed which makes the molecule stable.
(a) Statement-I and II are correct and statement-II is the correct explanation of statement-I.
(b) Statement-I and II are correct but statement-II is not the correct explanation of statement-I
(c) Statement-I ¡s correct but statement-II is wrong.
(d) Statement-I is wrong but statement-II is correct.
Answer:
(a) Statement-I and II are correct and statement-II is the correct explanation of statemen-I.

Question 18.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons A → B + H2O. Identify A and B.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 19.
Benzene undergoes Birch reduction to form .
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 20.
How many types of carbon atoms are present in 2, 2, 3 – trimethyl pentane
a) one
b) Two
c) Three
d) Four
Answer:
d) Four

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 21.
Which one of the following is not a meta director’?
(a) – NH2
(b) – NO2
(c) – COOR
(d) – SO3H
Answer:
(a) – NH2

Question 22.
Which one of the following benzene ring deactivator?
(a) – CHO
(b) – OH
(c) – CH3
(d) – OCH3
Answer:
(a) – CHO

Question 23.
Fine the odd one out:
(a) Benzene
(b) Ethane
(c) Ethene
(d) Propyne
Answer:
(a) Benzene

Question 24.
Which among these is not associated with aliphatic compounds?
(a) They contain (4n+2) π electrons
(b) They contain straight chain compounds.
(c) They contain branched-chain compounds.
(d) They have an appropriate number of H-atoms and functional groups.
Answer:
(a) They contain (4n+2) π electron.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 25.
Which of the following compounds will exhibit cis-trans isomerism
(a) 2 – Butene
(b) 2 – Butyne
(c) 1 – Butene
(d) 2 – Butanol
Answer:
(a) 2 – Butene

Question 26.
Which conformation of ethane has the lowest potential energy?
(a) Eclipsed
(b) Staggered
(c) Skew
(d) All will have equal potential energy.
Answer:
(b) Staggered

Question 27.
Arrange the following in the decreasing order of their boiling points
i) n – butane
ii) 2 – methylbutane
iii) n – pentane
iv) 2 – methylbutane
a) i > ii > iii > iv
b) ii > iii > iv > i
c) iv > iii > ii > i
d) iii > ii > iv > i
Answer:
d) iii > ii > iv > i

II. Match the following
Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 5.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 7.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 8.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

III. Fill in the blanks.

Question 1.
Liquefied petroleum gas consisting of a mixture of ………..
Answer:
Propane + butane

Question 2.
Mangoes contain ………….
Answer:
Cyclo hexane

Question 3.
Methane gas is also called as ………….
Answer:
Marsh gas

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 4.
The IUPAC name of the following compound is:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
3-Ethyl, 2-methylpentane

Question 5.
Sodalime is the mixture of ……………
Answer;
NaOH + CaO

Question 6.
Wurtz reaction used in the preparation of …………
Answer:
higher alkanes

Question 7.
The major reagent present in Corey-House reaction is ………..
Answer:
Lithium dimethyl cuparate

Question 8.
General formula for grignard reagents is ………..
Answer:
R – MgX

Question 9.
The rotation of C – C single bond leads to different isomenc structure called as …………
Answer:
conformers

Question 10.
The least stable conformer of ethane is formed……….
Answer:
eclipsed

Question 11.
The potential energy difference between the staggered and eclipsed conformation of ethane is …………
Answer:
12.5 kJ /mol

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 12.
The most stable conformer of butane is ………..
Answer:
Staggered

Question 13.
Paraffin is the older name for the group family of compounds.
Answer:
alkane

Question 14.
Paraffin means ……….
Answer:
Little activity

Question 15.
The preparation of methyl chloride is followed by a mechanism.
Answer:
Free radical

Question 16.
n-hexane passed over chromic oxide supported on alumina at 873 K will give ……….
Answer:
Benzene

Question 17.
The number of possible isomers of C6H12 is …………..
Answer:
5

Question 18.
When ethanol is heated at 440 K with excess of concentrated H2SO4, it will give …………
Answer:
Ethene

Question 19.
Alkynes undergo reduction using Lindlar’s catalyst to give ………….
Answer:
cix – alkenes

Question 20.
Alkynes undergo reduction using sodium in liquid ammonia to give …………
Answer:
trans – alkenes

Question 21.
An aqueous solution of potassium succinate is electrolysed to give ………….
Answer:
Ethane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 22.
The order of reactivity of different hydrogen halides (HCl, HI , HBr) is ………..
Answer:
HI >HBr >HCl

Question 23.
Addition of hydrohalides to alkene is an example for …………
Answer:
Electrophilic additton

Question 24.
Ethane reacts with HBr to form …………
Answer:
Bromo ethane

Question 25.
Homolytic fission of benzoyl peroxide will give ………..
Answer:
C6H5

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 26.
Propene reacts with HBr in the presence of peroxide to form …………
Answer:
1 – Bromopropane

Question 27.
Baeyer’s reagent is …………
Answer:
alkaline KMNO4

Question 28.
Ozonolysis of ethene produces ………….
Answer:
HCHO

Question 29.
Electrolysis of potassium maleate yields ………
Answer:
Ethyne

Question 30.
Ozonolysis of acetylene gives ………….
Answer:
HCOOH

Question 31.
Three molecules of acetylene undergoes polymerisation to give …………
Answer:
benzene

Question 32.
Benzene reacts with bromine in the presence of AlCl3 to form bromobenzene and it is an example of reaction
Answer:
Electrophilic substitution

Question 33.
The six carbon atoms of benzene are hybridised.
Answer:
sp2

Question 34.
Bond angle in benzene is …………
Answer:
120º

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 35.
Benzene contains a bonds and it bonds …………
Answer:
12,3

Question 36.
Wurtz-fittig reaction helps to prepare compounds …………
Answer:
aromatic

Question 37.
When phenol reacts with Zn-dust under dry distillation conditions it gives ………..
Answer:
Benzene

Question 38.
Benzene is insoluble in …………
Answer:
water

Question 39.
Benzene reacts with hydrogen in the presence of Pt to yield ……….
Answer:
Cyclohexane

Question 40.
Benzene reacts with Cl2 in the presence of sunlight to give ………..
Answer:
BHC (Ben.zene hexachioride)

Question 41.
The step in which Cl-Cl bond homolysis occurs is called ……….
Answer:
Initiation step

Question 42.
Dienes are the name given to compounds with ……….
Answer:
Exactly two double bonds

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 43.
The hybridisation state of a carbocation is …………
Answer:
sp2

Question 44.
The peroxide effect in anti-markovnikoff addition involves a ………. mechanism.
Answer:
free radical.

IV. Choose the odd one out.
Question 1.
(a) Ethane
(b) Benzene
(c) Ethene
(d) Ethyne
Answer:
(b) Benzene. it is an aromatic hydrocarbon whereas others are aliphatic hydrocarbons.

Question 2.
(a) Zn + HCl
(b) Zn + CH3COOH
(c) LiAlH4
(d) Acidified K2Cr2O7
Answer:
Acidified K2Cr2O7. It is an oxidising agent whereas the other three reagents are reducing

Question 3.
(a) Soft drink bottle
(b) Jars
(c) Vegetable oil bottle
(d) Straws
Answer:
(d) Straws. It is made up of polypropylene whereas others are made of PET (Polyethylene terephthalate).

Question 4.
(a) Straws
(b) Foam cups
(c) Diapers
(d) Toys
Answer:
(b) Foam cups. It is made up of polystyrene whereas others are made up of polypropylene.

Question 5.
(a) Orlon
(b) Neoprene rubber
(c) PVC
(d) PET
Answer:
(d) PET. It is prepared by the polymerization of glycol and terephthalic acid, whereas others are prepared from acetylene.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Choose the correct pair.

Question 1.
(a) Propene + O3 : HCHO + CH3 CH0
(b) Ethene + O3 : CH3 CHO + H2O2
(c) But-2-ene + O3 : HCHO + H2 O2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
(a) Propene + O3 : HCHO + CH3CHO

Question 2.
(a) PET : shampoo bottles
(b) PS : disposable utensils
(c) PP : grocery bags
(d) HDPE : plastic pipes
Answer:
(b) PS : disposable utensils

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

VI. Choose the incorrect pair.

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 2.
(a) CH2 = CH2 + O3 : 2HCOH
(b) CH3 – CH = CH2 + O3 : CH3CHO + HCHO
(c) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 + O3 : 2CH3COCH3
(d) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 + O3 : 2CH3CHO
Answer:
(c) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 + O3 : 2CH3COCH3

Question 3.
(a) PET: Jars
(b) HDPE: Juice containers
(c) PS: Disposable utensils
(d) PVC: Grocery bags
Answer:
(d) PVC: Grocery bags

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

VII. Assertion & Reason.
Question 1.
Assertion (A): Methane is called marsh gas.
Reason (R): Decomposition of plant and animal matter in an oxygen-deficient environment like swamps, marshes and bogs produce methane gas.
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).
(b) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).
(c) (A) is correct but (R) is wrong.
(d) (A) is wrong but (R) is correct.
Answer:
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).

Question 2.
Assertion (A) : Water destroys grignard reagent and so it is not used as solvent for RMgX.
Reason (R) : Water decomposes grignard reagent (RMgX) to give alkane.
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).
(b) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).
(c) (A) is correct but (R) is wrong.
(d) (A) is wrong but (R) is correct.
Answer:
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).

Question 3.
Assertion (A): The boiling point of straight-chain isomers have higher boiling point as compared to branched-chain isomers.
Reason (R): The boiling point decreases with increase in branching as the molecule becomes compact and the area of contact decreases.
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).
(b) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).
(c) (A)is correct but (R) is wrong.
(d) (A) is wrong but (R) is correct.
Answer:
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 4.
Assertion (A) : The eclipsed conformation of ethane is less stable than staggered conformation of ethane.
Reason (R) : In eclipsed conformation, the distance between the two methyl group is minimum and so there is maximum repulsion between them and it is the least stable conformer.
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).
(b) Both (A)and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).
(c) (A) is correct but (R) is wrong.
(d) (A) is wrong but (R) is correct.
Answer:
(a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons 2 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are unsaturated hydrocarbons?
Answer:
hydrocarbons having localised carbon-carbon multiple bonds are called unsaturated hydrocarbons.
Example :
alkenes and alkynes.

Question 2.
What is marsh gas?
Answer:
Answer:

  • Methane is the major component of the atmosphere of jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune but only minor component of earth atmosphere.
  • Decomposition of plant and animal matter in an oxygen deficient environment like swamps, marshes bogs and the sediments of lakes produces methane gas. It is otherwise known as marsh gas.

Question 3.
Write a note on methane clathrates.
Answer:

  • A frozen mixture of water and methane gas is chemically known as methane clathrate.
  • The methane molecule which is produced by biological process under the deep -ocean (at 4°C and 50 atm) does not simply reach the surface instead each molecule is trapped inside the clusters of 6 to 18 water molecules forming methane clathrates.

Question 4.
What are alkenes? Give example.
Answer:
Alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbons that contain carbon-carbon double bond. They are represented by the general formulae CnH2n where ‘n’ stands for a number of carbon atoms in the molecule. Alkenes are also known as olefins (in Latin – oil maker) because the first member ethene combines with chlorine gas to form an oily liquid as a product.
Example:
Ethylene (C2H4)

Question 5.
Draw and name the possible structural formula for C4H10
Answer:
C4H10 has two possible structural formula, they are,
(i) CH3-CH2-CH2-CH3 n-Butane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6.
Give the IUPAC name of the following compounds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 7.
What is Sabatier- Sendersens reaction?
Answer:
The process of addition of H2 to unsaturated compounds (alkenes or alkynes) in known as hydrogenation. The above process can be catalysed by nickel at 298 K. This reaction is known as Sabalier-Sendersens reaction.
For example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 8.
What are decarboxylation reactions? Given an example.
Answer:
When a mixture of sodium salt of carboxylic acid and sodalime is heated an alkane is formed. During this process CO2 molecule is eliminated process and this process is known as decarboxylation reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
Write a note on Kolbe’s electrolytic method?
Answer:
When potassium or sodium salt of carboxylic acid is electrolysed, a higher alkane is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 10.
How will you prepare propane from Chloropropane?
Answer:
Nascent hydrogen reacts with chloropropane to give propane.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 11.
What is Wurtz reaction?
Answer:
When a solution of haloalkanc in dry ether is treated with sodium metal, higher alkanes are produced. This reaction is known as Wurtz reaction. For example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 12.
Write shnrt flotes on Corey-House reaction?
Answer:
An alkyl halide and lithium dialkyl cupratc are reacted to give higher alkanes. This reaction is known as Corey-House reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 13.
How will you prepare methane from grignard reagent’?
Answer:
Methyl magnesium chloride reacts with water to give methane.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 14.
What are conformers?
Answer:
The rotation about C-C single bond axis yielding several arrangements of a hydrocarbon called conformers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 15.
Draw the conformations of ethane using Newman projection formula method?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 16.
What are combustion reactions?
Answer:
A combustion reaction is a chemical reaction between a substance and oxygen with evolution of heat and light. In the presence of sufficient oxygen alkanes undergoes combustion when ignited and produces carbon dioxide and water.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 17.
What is arornatisation?
Answer:
Alkanes with six to ten carbon atoms are converted into homologous of benzene at higher temperature and in the presence of a catalyst. This process is known as aromatisation. For example, n-Hexane passed over Cr2O3 supported on alumina at 873 K gives benzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 18.
Write notes on isomerisation.
Answer:
1. Isomerisation is a chemical process by which a compound is transformed into any of its isomeric form.
2. Normal alkanes can be converted into branched alkanes in the presence ofAlCl3 and HCl at 298 K.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
3.  This process is of great industrial importance, the quantity of gasoline is improved by isomerising its components.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 19.
Mention the uses of alkanes.
Answer:

  • Alkanes are extensively used as fuels.
  • Methane present in natural gas is used in home heating.
  • A mixture of propane and butane is known as LPG gas which is used for domestic cooking purpose.
  • Gasoline is a complex mixture of many hydrocarbons used as a fuel for internal combustion engines.

Question 20.
Draw and name the structural formula for C4H8’?
Answer:
(i) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 -w 1 – Butene
(ii) CH2 = CH – CH2 – CH2 – 2 Butene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 21.
cis-isomers are less stable than rans-isomers?
Answer:
Consider:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Among cis and trans isomers, cis isomer is less stable than trans isomer. In the cis isomer, similar groups arc very near to each other. vander Waal’s repulsion and steric hindrance make the molecule much more unstable. But in trans isomer, similar groups are diagonally opposite to each other and there is no such steric hindrance. Due to more steric interaction cis isomers is less stable than Irons isomer.

Question 22.
How will you prepare ethene from ethanol?
Answrer:
When ethanol is heated at 430 K – 440 K with excess cone. H2SO4. a molecule of water from alcohol is removed and ethene or ethylene is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 23.
How will you convert 1-brornopropane into popene?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
1-bromopropane reacts with alcoholic KOH and eliminate hydrogen bromide resulting in the formation of propene.

Question 24.
How will you prepare ethene by Kolbe’s electrolytic method?
Answer:
When an aqueous solution of potassium succinate is electrolysed between two platinum electrodes, ethene is produced at the anode.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 25.
Write any two test for alkenes.
Answer:

  • Rapid decolourisation of bromine in CCl4 without evolution of hydrogen bromide.
  • Decolourisation of cold dilute aqueous solution of KMnO4

Question 26.
State Markovnikoff’s rule.
Answer:
When an unsymmetrical alkene reacts with hydrogen halide, the hydrogen atom adds to the carbon atom that has more number of hydrogen atoms and halogen add to the carbon atom having fewer hydrogen atoms.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 27.
What is peroxide effect?
Answer:
The addition of HBr to an alkene in the presence of organic peroxide gives the antì-Markovnikofl’s product. This effect is called as peroxide effect.

Question 28.
Identify the products A and B from the following reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 29.
What happens when propcne reacts with concentrated H,S04?
Answer:
Propene reacts rjth cone. H2S04 to form 2 – propyl hydrogen sulphate in accordance with Markovnikoffs rule Further hydrolysis yields 2-propanol.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 30.
Complete the following reaction and identify A, B and C.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 31.
Mention the uses of alkenes.
Answer:

  • Alkenes are used as starting material in the synthesis of alcohols, plastics, detergents and fuels.
  • Ethenc is the most important organic fcedstock in the polymer industry. Examples are, PVC, Sarans and Polythene. These polymers are used in the manufacture of floor tiles, shoe-soles, synthetic fibres, raincoats, pipes etc.

Question 32.
What are gem dihalides? How will you prepare propyne from gem dihalides?
Answer:
Compounds containing two halogen atoms on the same carbon atom are called gem dihalides. On heating 1,1 -dichloropropane with alcoholic KOH, it will give propyne.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 33.
How will you prepare acetylene from potassium maleate?
Answer:
Electrolysis of potassium maleate yields acetylene. This is one of Kolbe’s electrolytic reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 34.
How will you prepare acetylene from calcium carbide?
Answer:
Acetylene can be manufactured in large scale by action of calcium carbide with water.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 35.
How will you convert ethyne into ethanol?
Answer:
Ethyne undergo hydration on warming with mercuric sulphate and dil H2SO4 at 333 K to form ethanol (Acetaldehyde).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 36.
Mention the uses of Acetylene.
Answer:

  • Acetylene is used in oxy acetylene torch used for welding and cutting metals.
  • It is used for manufacture of PVC, polyvinyl acetate, Polyvinyl ether, orlon and neoprene rubbers.

Question 37.
What are all the conditions for aromaticity?
Answer:
Huckel proposed that aromaticity is a function of electronic structure of an organic compound.
A compound may be aromatic, if it obey the following rules:

  • The molecule must have a cyclic structure.
  • The molecule must be co-planar.
  • Complete delocalisation of it electrons in the ring.
  • Presence of (4n + 2) it electrons in the ring where n is an integer (n = 0,1,2….), this is known as Huckel’s rule.

Question 38.
Classify the following compounds by using aromaticity concepts:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

  • It is co-planar molecule.
  •  It has six delocalised ir electrons.
  •  4n + 26
    4n = 6 – 2
    4,n = 4
    n = 1, obeys Huckel’s rule with n = 1

(b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclo-octatetraene.

1. Molecule is non-planar.
Hence it is a non-aromatic compound.

(c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclopropyl cation.

  • It has a co-planar structure.
  • It has two delocalised it electrons.
    4n + 2 = 2
    4n = 0
    n = 0

Hence is an aromatic compound.

Question 39.
Write notes on Resonance of benzene?
Answer:
1. The phenomenon in which two or more structures can be written for a substance which has identical position of atoms is called resonance.
2. The actual structure of the molecule is said to be a resonance hybrid of the various possible alternative structures.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
3.  In benzene, Kekule’s structures I and II represented the resonance structures, and structure III is the resonance hybrid of structures I and II.
4. The structures I and II exist only in theory. The actual structure of benzene is the hybrid of two hypothetical resonance structures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 40.
How will you convert phenol into benzene?
Answer:
When phenol vapours are passed over zinc dust then it is reduced to benzene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 41.
What is Wurtz-fitting reaction?
Answer:
When a solution of bromobenzene and iodomethane in dry ether is treated with metallic sodium, toluene is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 42.
What are activating and deactivating groups?
Answer:

  • When mono substituted benzene undergoes an electrophilic substitution reaction, the rate of the reaction and the site of attack of the incoming electrophile depends on the functional group already attached to it.
  •  Some groups increases the reactivity of benzene ring and are known as activating groups.
  • Some groups decreases the reactivity of benzene ring and are known as de-activating groups.
  • Example:
    Activating groups: – NH2 – OH. – CH3 etc.
    Deactivating groups: – NO3. CN, – CHO etc,

Question 43.
Why does benzcnc undergo clectrophilic substitution reactions easily and nucleophilic substitution with difficulty?
Answer:
Due to the presence of an electron cloud containing 6π – electrons above and below the plane of the ring, benzene is a rich source of electrons, Consequently, it attracts the electrophilic reagents towards it and repels the nucleophilic reagents. As a result, benzene undergoes electrophilic substitution reactions easily and nucleophilic substitution with difficulty.

Question 44.
Out of benzene, m – dinitrobenzene and toluene which will undergo nitration most easily and why?
Answer:
CH3 group is an electron-donating group, while -NO2 group is electron withdrawing group. Therefore, maximum electron density will be there in toluene, followed by benzene and it is least in pn-dinitrobenzene. Therefore, the ease of nitration decreases in the order:
Toluene > benzene > m – dinitrobenzene.

Question 45.
Why are alkanes called paraffins?
Answer:
Paraffins means little affinity. Alkanes due to strong C-C and C-H bonds are relatively chemically inert. They are thus called as paraflins.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons 3 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain the classification of hydrocarbons.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 2.
How to write the possible isomers of C5H12?
Answer:
1. To begin draw the carbon backbone of the straight chain isomer.
C-C-C-C-C

2. To determine the carbon backbone structure of the other isomers, arrange the carbon atoms in the other way:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

3. Fill in ail the hydrogen atoms so that each carbon forms four bonds,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 3.
Explain how to draw the structural formula for 3-ethyl, 2, 3-dimethylpentane.
Answer:
3-ethyl, 2, 3-dimethylpentane.
Step 1:
The parent hydrocarbon is pentane. Draw the chain of five carbon atoms and number
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 2:
Complete the carbon skeleton by attaching the alkyl group as they are specified in the name. An ethyl group is attached to carbon atom 3 and two methyl groups are attached to carbon atoms 2 and 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 3:
Add hydrogen atoms to the carbon skeleton so that each carbon atoms have four bonds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 4.
In alkane compounds with same number of carbon atoms, straight chain isomers have higher boiling point as compared to branched chain isomers-justify statement.
Answer:

  • The boiling point of continuous chain alkanes increases with increase in the length of carbon chain roughly about 30°C for every added carbon atom to the chain.
  • Alkanes are non-polar compounds and having weak Vander Wal’s force which depends upon molecular surface area and hence increases with increase in molecular size.
  • The boiling point decreases with increase in branching on the molecule i.e. as it becomes compact and the area of the contract decreases. Hence in alkanes with same number of carbon atoms, straight chain isomers have higher boiling point as compared to branched chain isomers.

Question 5.
Why oil spills in aqueous environment spread so quickly?
Answer:

  • Water molecules are polar and akanes are non-polar. The insolubility of alkanes in water makes them a good water repellent for metals which protects the metal surface from corrosion.
  • Because of their lower density than water they tòrm two layers and occupies the top layer. The density difference between alkanes and water explains why oil spills in aqueous environment spread so quickly.

Question 6.
Explain pyrolysis method.
Answer:
1. Pyrolysis is defined as the thermal decomposition of an organic compound into smaller fragments in the absence of air through the application of heat. Pyrolysis of alkanes is also named as cracking.

2. In the absence of air, whai alkane are vapours passed through red-hot metal it breaks into simpler hydrocarbons.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

3. The product depends upon the nature of alkane, temperature, pressure and presence or absence of the catalyst.

Question 7.
Write notes on Geometrical isomerism or cis-trans isomerism.
Answer:
1. It is a type of stereoisomerism and it is also called cis-trans isomerism. Such type of isomerism results due to the restricted rotation of doubly bounded carbon atoms.

2. If the similar groups lie on the same side then the geometrical isomers are called as cis-is omers.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

3. If the similar groups lie on the opposite side then the geometrical isomers are called as trans-isomers.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 8.
Explain how 2-butyne reacts with (a) Lindlar’s catalyst and (b) Sodium in liquid ammonia?
Answer:
(a) 2-butyne reacts with Lindlar’s catalyst:
2-butyne can be reduced to cis-2 butene using CaCO3 supported in Pd -metal partially deactivated with sulphur.
This reaction is stereo specific giving only the cis-2-butene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(b) 2-butyne reacts with sodium in liquid ammonia:
2-butyne can also be reduced to trans-2-butene using sodium in liquid ammonia. This reaction is stereospecific giving only the trans-2-butene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
What are vicinal dihalides? How will you prepane alkene from vicinal dihaldes?
Answer:
1. The compounds in which two halogen atoms are attached to adjacent carbon-atoms are called as vicinal dihalides.

2. When vicinal dihalides are warmed with granulated zinc in methanol they lose a molecule
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 10.
Why alkenes are more reactive than alkanes?
Answer:
1. Alkenes are more reactive than alkanes due to the presence of a double bond.

2. The a-bond is strong but the it-bond is weak. The typical reactions of alkenes involve the addition of an electrophile across the double bond proceeding through ionic mechanism. However addition reactions proceed through free-radical mechanism also. Ozonolysis and nolvmerisation are some of the characteristic reaction of alkenes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 11.
Explain the mechanism of addition of HBr to propenc.
Answer:
Step 1:
Formation of electrophile:
In HBr, br is more electronegative than H. When bonded electron move towards Br, polarity is deve[oped and it creates electrophile H+ which attacks to the double bond to form a carbocation.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 2 :
Secondary carbocation is more stable than primary carhocation and it predominates over the primary carbocation.

Step 3 :
The Br-1 ion attack the 2°- carbocation to form 2-Bromo propane as the major product.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 12.
Explain the mechanism of addition of FlBr to 3-methyl-1-butene.
Answer:
Consider the addition of HBr to 3-methyl-1-butene. Here the expected product according to Markovnikoff’s rule is 2-bromo-3-methylbutane but the actual major product is 2-bromo- 2-methylbutane. This is because, the secondary carbocation formed during the reaction is rearranged to give the more stable tertiary carbocation. Attack of Br-1 on this tertiary carbocation gives the major product 2-bromo-2-methylbutane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 13.
Why peroxide effect is not observed in HCl and HI?
Answer:
The H-Cl bond is stronger (430.5 k.J mol-1) than H-Hr bond (363.7 kJ mol-1), thus H-Cl is not cleaved by the free radical. The H-I bond is further weaker (296.8 kJ mol-3) than H-Cl bond. Thus H-I bond breaks easily hut iodine free radicals combine to form iodine molecules instead of adding to the double bond and hence peroxide effect is not observed in case of HCl and HI.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 14.
Explain the ozonolysis of (a) Ethene and (b) propene
Answer:
Ozonolysis is a method ofoxidative cleavage of alkenes using ozone and it form two carbonyl compounds. Alkenes react with ozone to form ozonide and it is cleaved by Zn/H2O to form smaller molecules.
This reaction is often used to identify the structure of unknown alkene by detecting the position of double or triple bond.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 15.
What is polymerisation? Explain with suitable example.
Answer:
A polymer is a large molecule formed by the combination of large number of small molecules (monomers). This process is known as polymerisation. A few examples are:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 16.
Complete the following reactions:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 17.
Explain the ozonolysis of (a) Acetylene (b) Propyne
Answer:
Ozone adds to carbon-carbon triple bond of alkynes to form ozonides. The ozonides are hydrolysed by water to form carbonyl compounds. The hydrogen peroxide formed in the reaction may oxidise the carbonyl compound to carboxylic acid.
(a) Acetylene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(b) propyne:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 18.
Explain the polyrnerisation of acetylene molecules.
Answer:
Acetylene undergoes two types of polymerisation reactions, they are:

  1. Linear polymerisation
  2. Cyclic polymerisation

1. Linear polymerisation:
Acetylene forms linear polymer, when passed into a solution of cuprous chloride and ammonium chloride.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. Cyclic polymerisation:
Acetylene undergoes cyclic polymerisation on passing through red hot iron tube. Three molecules of acetylene polymerises to form benzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 19.
Discuss the Kekule’s structure of benzene.
Answer:
Kekule suggested that benzene consists of a cyclic planar structure of six carbon with alternate single and double bonds.
There were two objections:
1. Bnzene forms only one ortho disubstituted products whereas the Kekule’s structure predicts two ortho disubstituted products as shown:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. Kekule’s structure failed to explain why benzene with three double bonds did not give addition reaction like alkenes. To overcome this objection, Kekule suggested that henzene was a resonance hybrid of two forms(1 and 2) which are in rapid equilibrium.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 20.
Why benzene undergoes substitution reaction rather than addition reactions under normal conditions?
Answer:
1. Each carbon atom in henzene possess an unhybridised p-orbital containing one electron. The lateral overlap of their p-orbitais produces 3π- bond, six electrons of the p-orbitais over all the six carbon atoms and are said lo be delocalised.

2. Due to delocalisation, strong it-bond is formed which makes the molecule stable. Hence unlike alkenes and alkynes, benzene undergoes substitution reactions rather than addition reactions under normal conditions.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 21.
Explain the industrial preparation of benzene from coal tar.
Answer:
Coal tar is a viscous liquid obtained by the pyrolysis of coal. During fractional distillation, coal tar is heated and distills away its volatile compounds, namely, benzene, toluene, xylene in the temperature range of 350 K to 443 K. These vapours are collected at the upper part of the fractionating column.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 22.
Explain the suiphonation of benzene.
Answer:
Benzcne reacts with fuming sulphuric acid and give benzene suiphonic acid. Although SO3 molecule it does not have positive charge, yet it is a strong electrophile. This is because the octet of electrons around the sulphur atom is not reacted. This reached is reversible nd desulphonation occus readily in aqueous medium.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 23.
What is BHC? How will you prepare BHC? Mention its uses.
Answer:
1. BHC is I3enzene hexachioride.
2. Benzene reacts with three molecule of Cl2in the presence of sunlight or UV light to yield BHC.
This is also called as gammaxane or Lindane.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
3. BHC is a powerful insecticide.

Question 24.
In aryl halides, halogen group is a oriho -para director and a deactivator towards electrophilic substitution reactions, why?
Answer:
1.  In aryl halides, the strong -I effect of the halogens decreases the electron density of benzene ring, thereby deactivating it for electrophilic attack.
2. The presence of lone pair on halogens is involved in resonance with π-electrons of the benzene ring and it increases the electron density at ortho and para position. Hence the halogen group is an ortho-para director and a deactivator.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 25.
Explain the carcinogenity and toxicity of aromatic hydrocarbons.
Answer:
Benzene and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) are ubiquitous environmental pollutants generated during incomplete combustion of coal, oil, petrol and wood. Some (PAH) originate from open burning, natural seepage of petroleum and coal deposits and volcanic activities. They are toxic, mutagenic and carcinogenic. It has hematological, immunological and neutrological effect on humans They are radioactive and prolonged exposure leads to genetic damage. Some of the examples of PAH arc “L” shaped polynuclear hydrocarbons, which are much more toxic and carcinogenic.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
It is found in cigarette smoke, in tobacco and and charcoal boiled food.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
It is found in gasoline exhaust and barbecued food.

Question 26.
Arrange benzene, n-hexane and ethyne in decreasing order of acidic behavior. Also give reason for this behavior?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Since s-electrons arc closer to the nucleus, therefore as the s-character of the orbital making the C-H bond increases the electrons of C-H bond lies closer and closer to the carbon atom. In other words, the partial +ve charge on the H-atom and hence the acidic character increases as the s-character of the orbital increases. Thus, the acidic character decreases in the order
Ethyne > Benzene > Hexane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Hydrocarbons 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Explain the conformational analysis of ethane.
Answer:
The two tetrahedral methyl groups can rotate about the carbon-carbon bond axis yielding several arrangements called conformers. The extreme conformations are staggered and eclipsed conformations. There can be number of other arrangements between staggered and eclipsed forms and their arrangements are known as skew forms.

Eclipsed conformation:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

In this conformation, the hydrogen of one carbon atom is directly behind those of the other. The repulsion between the atoms is maximum and it is the least stable conformer.

Staggered conformation:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
In this conformation, the hydrogen’s of both the carbon atoms are tir apart from each other. The repulsion between the atoms is minimum and it is the most stable conformer.

Skew formation:
The infinite numbers of possible intermediate conformations between the two extreme conformations are referred as skew conformations. The stabilities of various conformations of ethane are
Staggered > Skew> Eclipsed
The potential energy difference between the staggered and eclipsed conformation of ethanc is around 12.5 kJ mol-1HBr The various conformations can be represented by Newman projection formula.

Newman Projection formula for Ethane:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 2.
Explain the structure of benzene.
Answer:
1. Molecular formula:
Elemental analysis and molecular weight determination have proved that the molecular formula of benzene is C6H6. This indicates that benzene is a highly unsaturated compound.

2. Straight chain structure is not possible:
Benzene could be constructed as a straight chain but it not feasible since it does not show the properties of alkenes or alkynes. For example, it does not decolorise the bromine water in CCl4.

3. Evidence of cyclic structure:
(1) In the presence of Nickel, benzene reacts with hydrogen to give cyclohexane, a six membered ring. This proves that benzene is a hexagonal
molecule with three double bonds.

(2) Benzene reacts with bromine in the presence of iron to give substituted C6H5Br. No isomers of C6H5Br was identified. On further reaction with bromine three isomeric disubstituted products C6H4Br2 are formed. On this basis Kekule proposed that benzene consists of ring of carbon atoms with alternate single and double bonds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

4. Resonance description of benzene:
The phenomenon in which two or more structures can be written for a substance which has identical position ofatomsis called resonance. The actual structure of the molecule is said to be a resonance hybrid of various possible alternative structures. In benzene. Kekule’s structure (I) and (II) represented the resonance structures and structure (III) is the resonance hybrid of structure I and II.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

5. Spectroscopic measurements:
X-ray and electron dîflìaction studies indicated that all carbon-carbon bonds are of equal length which is in between that of a single bond (1 .45Å ) and that of a double bond (1.34Å ).

6. Molecular orbital structure :
(1). Benzene is a flat hexagonal molecule with all carbons and hydrogen lying in the same plane with a bond angle of 120º. Each carbon atom has sp2 hybrid orbitais of carbon, overlap with each other and with s-orbitals of six hydrogen atoms forming six sigma (σ) C-H bonds and six sigma (σ) C – C bonds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(2). All the σ-bonds in benzene lies in one plane with bond angle of 120º. Each C-atom in benzene possess an unhybridised p-orbital containing one electron. The lateral overlap of their p-orbitais produces 3π-bond, the six electrons of the p-orbitais cover all the six C-atoms and are said to be delocalised. Due to this delocalisation, strong π-bond is formed which makes the molecule stable.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

7. Representation of benzene:
Hence, there are three ways is which benzene can be represented.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 3.
Explain the mechanism of the reaction between methane and chlorine.
Answer:
Methane reacts with chlorine in the presence of light which proceeds through the free radical chain mechanism. This mechanism is characterised by three steps: initiation, propagation and termination.

1. Chain initiation:
The chain is initiated by UV light, leading to homolytic fission of chlorine molecules into free radicals (chlorine atoms).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Here we choose Cl-Cl bond for fission because C- C and C-H bonds are stronger than Cl-Cl bond.

2. Chain propagation:
It proceeds as follows –
(a) Chlorine free radiais attack the methane molecule and breaks the C-H bond resulting in the generation of methyl free radicals.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(b) The methyl free radicals thus obtained attacks the second molecule of chlorine to give chloromethane (CH3Cl) and a chlorine free radical as follows –
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

(c) This chlorine free radical then cycles back to step (a) and both steps (a) and (b) are repeated many times and thus a chain of reaction is set up.

3. Chain termination:
Aller sometime, the reaction stops due to the consumption of reactant and the chain is terminated by the combination of free radicals.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 4.
Write the mechanism for following reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
The reaction proceeds through freee radical mechanism:

Step 1.
The weak O-O single bond linkage of peroxide undergoes homolytic cleavage to generate free radical.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 2.
The radicals abstracts a hydrogen atom from HBr thus generating bromine free radical.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 3.
The Bromine free radical adds lo the double bond in the way so as to form the more stable alkyl free radical,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 4.
Addition of HBr to secondary free radical.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 5.
Explain the acidic nature of alkynes.
Answer:
An alkyiic shows acidic nature only if it contains terminal hydrogen atom. This can be explained by considering the Sp hybrid orbitais of carbon atom in alkynes. The percentage of s-character of sp hybrid orbital (50%) is more than sp2 hybrid orbital ofalkenes (33%) and sp3 hybrid orbital of alkanes (25%). Because of this, carbon atom becomes more electronegative, thus facilitating donation of H ions to bases. So hydrogen attached to triply bonded carbon atoms is acidic in nature.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6.
Write the mechanism of chlorination of benzene.
Answer:
Step 1:
Generation of Cl electrophile.
AlCl + Cl – Cl + AlClΘ

Step 2:
Attack of the electrophile on the benzene ring to form arenium ion:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 3:
Rearomatisation of arenium ion:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 7.
Describe the mechanism of suiphonation of benzene.
Answer:
Step 1:
Generation of SO3 electrophile:
2H2SO4 → H3O + SO3 + HSO4Θ

Step 2:
Attack of the electrophile on benzene ring to form arenium ion:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 3:
Rearomatisation of Areniurn ion:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 8.
Describe the mechanism of Freidel craft’s alkylation.
Answer:
Step 1:
Generation of CH3 electrophile:
AlCl3 + CH3Cl → CH3 + AlClΘ

Step 2 :
Attack of the electrophile on benzene ring to form areniurn ion:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 3:
Rearornatisation of arenium ion:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
Write the mechanism of Freidel craft’s acylation.
Answer:
Step 1:
Generation of CH3CO electrophile:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 2 :
Attack of the electrophile on benzene ring to form arenium ion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Step 3 :
Rearomatisation of arenium ion:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 10.
An organic compound (A) of a molecular formula C6H6 which is a simple aromatic hydrocarbon. A undergoes hydrogenation to give a cyclic compound (B). A reacts with chlorine in the presence of UV-light to give C which is used as insecticide. Identify A, B and C. Explain the reactions with equation.
Answer:
1. Simple aromatic hydrocarbon, C2H6 is benzene.
2. Benzene (A) reacts with H2 in the presence of Pt to give cyclohexane (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
3. Benzene (A) reacts with Cl2 in presence of UV-light to give benzene hexachioride (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 11.
What are ortho-para directors? Explain why -OH group is an ortho-para director and activator.
Answer;
The group which increases the electron density at ortho and para positions are called as ortho-para directors,
Example:
-OH. -NH2 -NHR. -OCH3, -CH3, -C2H5 etc.

Let us consider the directive influence of phenolic group. Phenol is the resonance hybrid of the following structures:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
In these resonance structures, the negative charge residue in the present at orilio and para positions of the ring structure. h is quite evident that the lone pair of electrons on the atom which is attached lo the ring is involved in resonance and it makes the ring more electron rich than benzene.

The electron density at oriho and para position increases as compared to the meta position. Therefore phenolic group activates the benzene ring for electrophilic attack at oriho and para positions. Hence 01-1 group is an orilio para director and activator.

Question 12.
An organic compound (A) of a molecular formula C6H6 is a simple aromatic hydrocarbon. A reacts with O2 in the presence of VO5 at 773 K to give B. A is further treated with sodium and liquid ammonia to give C which is a dienc compound. Identify A, B, and C and explain the reactions.
Answer:
1. A is benzene (C6H6), a simple aromatic hydrocarbon

2. Benzene (A) reacts with O2 is the presence of V2O5 at 773K to give maleic anhydride (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
3. Benzene (A) is treated with sodium and liquid ammonia to give 1.4 – cyclohexadiene (C)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 13.
What are inea drectors’? Explain with suitable example.
Answer:
The group which increases the electron density at mcta position are called as rneta directors.
For example:
-NO2. -CN, -CHO, -COOH. -SO3H etc.
Let us consider the directive influence of aldehydic (-CHO) group. Benzaldehyde is a resonence hybrid of the following structures.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
In these resonance structures, the positive charge residue is present on the ring structure. It is quite evident that resonance deLocalises the positive charge on the atoms of the ring, making the ring less electron rich than henzene. Here overall electron density of benzene ring decreases due to -I effect of’ -CHO group, thereby deactivating the henzene for electrophilic atlack. However resonating structures shows that electron density is more at meto position as compared to ortho and para positions. Flence -CHO group is a ineta -director and a deactivator.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 14.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C2H4 which is a simple alkene reacts with Baeyer’s reagent to give B of molecular formula C2H6O2 A again reacts with ozone followed by hydrolysis in the presence of zinc to form C of molecular formula CH2O. Identify A, B and C. Explain with reactions.
Answer:
(i). A is CH2 = CH2 (Ethylene)

(ii). A (ethylene) reacts with Baeyer’s reagent (cold alkaline KMnO4) to give ethylene glycol (ethane 1 ,2 diol).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 15.
An organic compound 1,1-dichioropropane reacts with aicholic KOH to give A of molecular formula C3H4. A reacts with mercuric sulphate and dil. H2SO4 at 333 K to give B. A on passing through red hot iron tube at 873 K will give C which is a cyclic compound. Identify A, B and C. Explain the reactions.
Answer:
1. 1,1-dichioropropane reacts with aicholic KOI-I to give propyne (A).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. Propyne (A) reacts with mercuric sulphate and dil. H2SO4 at 333 K to give acetone (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

3. Propyne (A) on passing through red hot iron tube at 873 K will give mesitylene (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Students can Download Accountancy Chapter 4 Ledger Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Ledger Text Book Back Questions and Answers

I. Multiple Choice Questions
Choose the Correct Answer

Question 1.
Main objective of preparing ledger account is to ……………..
(a) Ascertain the financial position
(b) Ascertain the profit or loss
(c) Ascertain the profit or loss and the financial position
(d) Know the balance of each ledger account
Answer:
(d) Know the balance of each ledger account

Question 2.
The process of transferring the debit and credit items from journal to ledger accounts is called ……………..
(a) Casting
(b) Posting
(c) Journalising
(d) Balancing
Answer:
(b) Posting

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 3.
J.F means ……………..
(a) Ledger page number
(b) Journal page number
(c) Voucher number
(d) Order number
Answer:
(b) Journal page number

Question 4.
The process of finding the net amount from the totals of debit and credit columns in a ledger is known as ……………..
(a) Casting
(b) Posting
(c) Journalising
(d) Balancing
Answer:
(d) Balancing

Question 5.
If the total of the debit side of an account exceeds the total of its credit side, it means
(a) Credit balance
(b) Debit balance
(c) Nil balance
(d) Debit and credit balance
Answer:
(b) Debit balance

Question 6.
The amount brought into the business by the proprietor should be credited to ……………..
(a) Cash account
(b) Drawings account
(c) Capital account
(d) Suspense account
Answer:
(c) Capital account

II. Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is a ledger?
Answer:
Ledger account is a summary statement of all the transactions relating to a person, asset, liability, expense or income which has taken place during a given period of time and it shows their net effect. From the transactions recorded in the journal, the ledger account is prepared. Ledger is known as principal book of accounts.

Question 2.
What is meant by posting?
Answer:
The process of transferring the debit and credit items from the journal to the ledger accounts is called posting.

Question 3.
What is debit balance?
Answer:
When the total of the debit side is more than the total of credit side the difference is debit balance and is placed on the credit side as ‘By Balance c/d’.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 4.
What is credit balance?
Answer:
If the credit side total is more than the total of debit side, the difference is credit balance and is placed on the debit side as ‘To Balance c/d’.

Question 5.
What is balancing of an account?
Answer:
Balancing means that the debit side and credit side amounts are totalled and the difference between the total of the two sides is placed in the amount column as ‘Balance c/d’ on the side having lesser total, so that the total of both debit and credit columns are equal.

III. Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between journal ad ledger.
Answer:
Following are the differences between journal and ledger:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 1

Question 2.
What is ledger? Explain its utilities.
Answer:
1. Quick information about a particular account: Ledger account helps to get all information about a particular account like sales, purchases, machinery, etc., at a glance. For example, where there are several transactions with a debtor, the net amount due from a debtor can be known from the ledger account.

2. Control over business transactions: From the ledger balances extracted, a thorough analysis of account balances can be made which helps to have control over the business transactions.

3. Trial balance can be prepared: With the balances of ledger accounts, trial balance can be prepared to check the arithmetical accuracy of entries made in the journal and ledger.

4. Helps to prepare financial statements: From the ledger balances extracted, financial statements can be prepared for ascertaining net profit or loss and the financial position.

Question 3.
How is posting made from the journal to the ledger?
Answer:
The process of transferring the debit and credit items from the journal to the ledger accounts is called posting. The procedure of posting from journal to ledger is as follows:
1. Locate the ledger account that is debited in the journal entry. Open the respective account in the ledger, if already not opened. Write the name of the account in the top middle. If already opened, locate the account from the ledger index. Now entries are to be made on the debit side of the account.

2. Record the date of the transaction in the date column on the debit side of that account.

3. Record the name of the account credited in the journal with the prefix ‘To’ in particulars column.

4. Record the amount of the debit in the ‘amount column’.

5. Locate the ledger account that is credited in the journal entry. Open the respective account in the ledger, if already not opened. Write the name of the account in the top middle. If already opened, locate the account from the ledger index. Now entries are to be made on the credit side of the account. Record the date of the transaction in the date column. Record the name of the account debited in the journal entry in the particulars column with the prefix ‘By’ and write the amount in the amount column.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 4.
Explain the procedure for balancing a ledger account.
Answer:
Following is the procedure for balancing an account:
1. The debit and credit columns of an account are to be totalled separately.

2. The difference between the two totals is to be ascertained.

3. The difference is to be placed in the amount column of the side having lesser total. ‘Balance c/d’ is to be entered in the particulars column against the difference and in the date column the last day of the accounting period is entered.

4. Now both the debit and credit columns are to be totalled and the totals will be equal. The totals of both sides are to be recorded in the same line horizontally. The total is to be distinguished from other figures by drawing lines above and below the amount.

5. The difference has to be brought down to the opposite side below the total. ‘Balance b/d’ is to be entered in the particulars column against the difference brought down and in the date column, the first day of the next accounting period is entered.

6. If the total on the debit side of an account is higher, the balancing figure is debit balance and if the credit side of an account has higher total, the balancing figure is credit balance. If the two sides are equal, that account will show nil balance.

IV. Exercises

Question 1.
Journalise the following transactions and post them to ledger. (3 Marks)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 2
Journal
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 3
Ledger Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 4
Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 5
Bank Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 6
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 7

Question 2.
Give journal entries for the following transactions and post them to ledger. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 8
Journal Entries
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 9
Ledger Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 10
Somu Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 11
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 12
Furniture Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 13
Interest Received Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 14

Question 3.
Pass journal entries for the following transactions and post them to ledger. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 15
Answer:
Journal Entries
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 16
Ledger in the Books of Dharma
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 17
Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 18
Ganesan Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 19
Rent Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 20
Received Commission Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 21

Question 4.
Record the following transactions in the journal of Banu and post them to the ledger.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 22
Answer:
Journal Entries in the Book of Banu
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 23
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 24
Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 25
Rent Received Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 26
Furniture Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 27

Question 5.
The following balances appeared in the books of Vinoth on Jan 1, 2018
Assets: Cash ₹ 40,000; Stock ₹ 50,000; Amount due from Ram ₹ 20,000;
Machinery ₹ 40,000 Liabilities: Amount due to Vijay ₹ 10,000
Pass the opening journal entry and post them to Vinoth’s Capital account. (2 Marks)
Answer:
Opening Entry in the Books of Vinoth
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 28
Vinoth’s Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 29

Question 6.
Prepare Furniture A/c from the following transactions (2 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 30
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 31

Question 7.
The following balances appeared in the books of Kumaran on April 1, 2017. (5 Marks)
Assets: Cash ₹ 1,00,000; Stock ₹ 40,000; Amount due from Rohit ₹ 10,000,
Furniture ₹ 10,000; Liabilities: Amount due to Anush ₹ 40,000;
Kumaran’s capital ₹ 1,20,000
Find the capital and show the ledger posting for the above opening balances.
Answer:
Opening Entry
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 32
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 33
Stock Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 34
Rohit (Debtors) Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 35
Furniture Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 36
Creditors Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 37
Kumaran’s Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 38

Question 8.
Give journal entries and post them to cash account. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 81
Answer:
Journal Entry
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 39
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 40

Question 9.
Give journal entries from the following transactions of Mohit, dealing in Textiles and post them to ledger: (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 80
Answer:
Journal Entries in the Book of Mohit
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 41
Ledger Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 42
Mohit’s Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 43
SBI Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 44
Furniture Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 45
Question 10.
Give journal entries from the following transactions and post them to ledger: (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 46
Answer:
Journal Entries
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 47
Ledger Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 48
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 49
Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 50
Hema Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 51
Purchase Returns Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 52

Question 11.
Give journal entries from the following transactions and post them to Cash A/c and Sales A/c: (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 82
Answer:
Journal Entries
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 53
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 54
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 55

Question 12.
Journalise the transactions given below and post them to ledger. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 83
Answer:
Journal Entries
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 56
Trade Expenses Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 57
Stationary (Postage Stamps) Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 58
Commission Received Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 59
Rent Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 60
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 61

Question 13.
Journalise the transactions given below and post them to ledger. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 62
Answer:
Journal Entries
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 63
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 64
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 65
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 66
Kumar Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 67
Prabu Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 68
Salary Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 69

Question 14.
Enter the following transactions in the books of Ganesan and post them into ledger. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 70
Answer:
Journal Entries in the Books of Ganesan
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 71
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 72
Ganesan’s Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 73
Bank Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 74
Furniture Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 75
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 76
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 77
Vasu Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 78
Drawing Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 79

Question 15.
Journalise the following transactions in the books of Aran and post them to ledger accounts. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 84
Answer:
Journal Entries in the Books of Arun
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 85
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 86
Arun’s Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 87
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 88
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 89
Krishna Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 90
Govind Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 91

Question 16.
Journalise the following transactions and post them to ledger in the books of Raja. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 92
Answer:
Journal Entries in the Books of Raja
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 93
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 94
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 95
Murali Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 96
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 97
Mani Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 98
Discount Allowed Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 99

Question 17.
Journalise the following transactions and post them to ledger. (5 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 100
Answer:
Journal Entries in the Books of Raja
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 101
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 102
Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 103
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 104
Insurance Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 105
Machinery Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 106
Interest Received Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 107
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 108

Question 18.
Journalise the following transactions in the books of Vasu and post them to ledger accounts. (5 Marks)
2017 November:

1 – Cash in hand ₹ 1,00,000; Cash at bank: ₹ 30,000.
2 – Vasu sold goods to Jothi for ₹ 25,000 against a cheque and deposited the same in the bank.
4 – Received as commission ₹ 5,000.
8 – Bank paid ₹ 15,000 directly for insurance premium of Vasu.
15 – Cash deposited into bank ₹ 30,000.
18 – Cash withdrawn from bank for personal use ₹ 45,000.

Answer:
Journal entries in the Books of Vasu
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 109
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 110
Bank Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 111
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 112
Commission Received Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 113
Insurance Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger 114
Drawings Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 19.
Prepare Anand’s account from the following details. (3 Marks)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Answer:
Anand’s A/c
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 20.
Prepare a Sales account from the following transactions
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Sales Account
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 21.
Show the direct ledger postings for the following transactions: (5 Marks)
2017 June:

1 Raja commenced business with cash ₹ 50,000.
6 Sold goods for cash ₹ 8,000.
8 Sold goods to Devi on credit ₹ 9,000.
15 Goods purchased for cash ₹ 4,000.
20 Goods purchased from Shanthi on credit ₹ 5,000.

Answer:
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Devi Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Purchase Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Shanthi Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 22.
Show the direct ledger postings for the following transactions: (5 Marks)
2017 July:

1 – Shankar commenced business with cash ₹ 1,00,000.
6 – Sold goods for cash ₹ 10,000.
9 – Wages paid ₹ 6,000.
19 – Salaries paid ₹ 8,000.
20 – Advertisement expenses paid ₹ 4,000.

Answer:
Cash Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Shankar’s Capital Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Sales Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Wages Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Salaries Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger
Advertisement Account
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Textbook Case Study Solved

Imagine you have been called for an interview with an auditor. The auditor shows you the following ledger account of Mr. Raheem, a dealer in food products.
Sita A/c
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

The auditor wants you to explain each posting in the above account and also to state where will the double entry for each posting be found.
Here Sita is a debtor of Mr. Reheem. So in Raheem ledger Sita A/c shows the balances.

  1. April 1. The opening balance of Sita A/c ₹ 7,000
  2. April 12. She deposited ₹ 5,000
  3. May 2 Cash received from Sita ₹ 2,000
  4. Sept. 25 Credit sales for Sita ₹ 10,000
  5. Oct. 3 Goods returned by Sita ₹ 1,000
  6. Nov. 17 Cash paid by Sita ₹ 3,000
  7. Dec. 21 Sita deposited ₹ 4,000
  8. Dec. 29 Credit sales to Sita ₹ 10,000
  9. Dec. 31 Closing debtors ₹ 12,000

So from the Sita ledger the owner of the business Raheem can find out the closing balance of debtor (Sita) ₹ 12,000.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Ledger Additional Questions and Answers

I. Multiple Choice Questions
Choose the correct answer

Question 1.
………………. is known as principal book of accounts.
(a) Journal
(b) Ledger
(c) Trial balance
(d) Transaction
Answer:
(b) Ledger

Question 2.
………………. accounts show the values of assets.
(a) Real
(b) Personal
(c) Nominal
(d) Journal
Answer:
(a) Real

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 3.
………………. accounts give the net amount due to creditor and the net amount due from debtors.
(a) Real
(b) Personal
(c) Nominal
(d) Ledger
Answer:
(b) Personal

Question 4.
Net position of an account cannot be ascertained from ……………….
(a) Journal
(b) Ledger
(c) Trial balance
(d) Balance sheet
Answer:
(a) Journal

Question 5.
Net position of an account can be ascertained from ……………….
(a) Journal
(b) Ledger
(c) Trial balance
(d) Balance sheet
Answer:
(b) Ledger

Question 6.
The term balance brought down is used in the name of ……………….
(a) balance b/d
(b) balanced c/d
(c) debit balance
(d) credit balance
Answer:
(a) balance b/d

Question 7.
When a journal entry has more than one debit or more than one credit or both, it is called ……………….
(a) Compound entry
(b) Single entry
(c) Journal entry
(d) Ledger entry
Answer:
(a) Compound entry

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 8.
Total of credit > Total of debit =
(a) Debit balance
(b) Credit balance
(c) Nil balance
(d) Trial balance
Answer:
(b) Credit balance

Question 9.
Total of debit > Total of credit =
(a) Debit balance
(b) Credit balance
(c) Nil balance
(d) Trial balance
Answer:
(a) Debit balance

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Students can Download Chemistry Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry Textual Evaluation Solved

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry Multiple Choice Questions
Question 1.
The number of electrons that have a total charge of 9650 coulombs is ………..
(a) 6.22 x 1023
(b) 6.022 x 1024
(c) 6.022 x 1022
(d) 6.022 x 10-34
Answer:
(c) 6.022 x 1022
Hint: IF = 96500 C = 1 mole of e = 6.023 x 1023 e
9650 C = \(\frac{6.22 \times 10^{23}}{96500} \times 9650\) = 6.022 x 1022

Question 2.
Consider the following half cell reactions:
Mn2+ + 2e → Mn E° = – 1.18V
Mn2+ → Mn3+ + e E = – 1.51V
The E for the reaction 3Mn2+ → Mn+2Mn3+, and the possibility of the forward reaction are respectively.
(a) 2.69V and spontaneous
(b) – 2.69 and non spontaneous
(c) 0.33V and Spontaneous
(d) 4.18V and non spontaneous
Answer:
(b) – 2.69 and non spontaneous
Hint: Mn+ + 2e → Mn(E0red) = 1.18V
2[Mn2+ → Mn3+ + e] (E0ox) = – 1.51V
3Mn2++ → Mn3+ + 2Mn3+ + (E0cell) = ?
E0red = (E0ox) + (E0cell)
= – 1.51 – 1.18 and non spontaneous
= – 2.69 V
Since E° is – ve ∆G is +ve and the given forward cell reaction is non – spontaneous.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 3.
The button cell used in watches function as follows:
Zn(s) + Ag2O(s) + H2O(1) \(\rightleftharpoons\) 2Ag(s) + Zn2+(aq) + 2OH(aq) the half cell potentials are
Ag2O(s) + H2O(1) + 2e →2Ag(S) + 2OH(aq) E° = 034V. The cell potential will be
(a) 0.84V
(b) 1.34V
(c) 1.10V
(d) 0.42V
Answer:
(c) 1.10V
Hint: Anodic oxidation: (Reverse the given reaction)
(E0ox ) = 0.76V cathodic reduction
E0cell = (E0ox) + (E0red) = 0.76 + 0.34 = 1.1V

Question 4.
The molar conductivity of a 0.5 mol dm-3 solution of AgNO3 with electrolytic conductivity of 5.76 x 10-3S cm-1at 298 K is ………….
(a) 2.88 S cm2 mo1-1
(b) 11.52 S cm2 mol-1
(c) 0.086 S cm2 mol-1
(d) 28.8 S cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(b) 11.52 S cm2 mol-1
Hint:
A = \(\frac { k }{ M }\) x 10-3 mol-1 m3
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-2
= 11.52 S cm2 mol-1

Question 5.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-3
Calculate A0HOAC using appropriate molar conductances of the electrolytes listed above at infinite dilution in water at 25°C.
(a) 517.2
(b) 552.7
(c) 390.7
(d) 217.5
Answer:
(c) 390.7
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-4
(426.2 + 91) – (126.5) = 390.7

Question 6.
Faradays constant is defined as
(a) charge carried by I electron
(b) charge carried by one mole of electrons
(c) charge required to deposit one mole of substance
(d) charge carried by 6.22 X 1010 electrons
Answer:
(b) charge carried by one mole of electrons
Hint:
IF = 96500 C = 1 charge of mole of e = charge of 6.022 x 1023 e

Question 7.
How many faradays of electricity are required for the following reaction to occur
MnO4 → Mn2+
(a) 5F
(b) 3F
(C) IF
(d) 7F
Answer:
(a) 5F
Hint:
7MnO4 + 5e → Mn2+ + 4H2O
5 moles of electrons i.e., 5F charge is required.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 8.
A current strength of 3.86 A was passed through molten Calcium oxide for 41 minutes and 40 seconds. The mass of Calcium in grams deposited at the cathode is (atomic mass of Ca is 40g / mol and IF = 96500C).
(a) 4
(b) 2
(c) 8
(d) 6
Answer:
(b) 2
Hint: m = ZIt
41mm 40sec = 2500 seconds
= \(\frac { 40 x 3.86 x 2500 }{ 2 x 96500 }\)
Z = \(\frac { m }{ n x 96500 }\) = \(\frac { 40 }{ 2 x 96500 }\)
= 2g

Question 9.
During electrolysis of molten sodium chloride, the time required to produce 0.1 mol of chlorine gas using a current of 3A is ………..
(a) 55 minutes
(b) 107.2 minutes
(c) 220 minutes
(d) 330 minutes
Answer:
(b) 107.2 minutes
Hint: \(\frac { m }{ ZI }\) (mass of 1 mole of Cl2 gas = 71)
t = \(\frac { m }{ ZI }\) mass of 0.1 mole of Cl2 gas = 7.1 g mol-1)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-6

Question 10.
The number of electrons delivered at the cathode during electrolysis by a current of 1 A in 60 seconds is (charge of electron = 1.6 x 10-19C)
(a) 6.22 x 1023
(b) 6.022 x 1020
(c) 3.75 x 1020
(d) 7.48 x 1023
Answer:
(c) 3.75 x 1020
Hint: Q = It
= 1A x 60S
96500 C charge 6.022 x 1023 electrons
60 C charge = \(\frac{6.022 \times 10^{23}}{96500} \times 960\)
= 3.744 x 1020 electrons

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 11.
Which of the following electrolytic solution has the least specific conductance?
(a) 2N
(b) 0.002N
(c) 0.02N
(d) 0.2N
Answer:
(b) 0.002N
Hint: In general, specific conductance of an electrolyte decreases with dilution. SO, 0.002N solution has least specific conductance.

Question 12.
While charging lead storage battery
(a) PbSO4 on cathode is reduced to Pb
(b) PbSO4 on anode is oxidised to PbO4
(c) PbSO4 on anode is reduced to Pb
(d) PbSO4 on cathode is oxidised to Pb
Answer:
(c) PbSO4 on anode is reduced to Pb.
Hint: Charging: anode: PbSO4(s) + 2e → Pb (s) + SO4-2 (aq)
Cathode: PbSO4(s) + 2H2O (1) → PbO2 (s) + SO4-2 (aq) + 2e

Question 13.
Among the following cells
I. Leclanche cell
II. Nickel – Cadmium cell
III. Lead storage battery
IV. Mercury cell
Primary cells are …………
(a) I and IV
(b) I and III
(c) III and IV
(d) II and III
Answer:
(a) I and IV

Question 14.
Zinc can be coated on iron to produce galvanized iron but the reverse is not possible. It is because
(a) Zinc is lighter than iron
(b) Zinc has lower melting point than iron
(c) Zinc has lower negative electrode potential than iron
(d) Zinc has higher negative electrode potential than iron
Answer:
(d) Zinc has higher negative electrode potential than iron
Hint: E0Zn+|Zn = – 0.76V and E0Fe2+|Fe = 0.44V. Zinc has higher negative electrode potential than iron, iron cannot be coated on zinc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 15.
Assertion: pure iron when heated in dry air is converted with a layer Of rust.
Reason: Rust has the composition Fe3O4
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false.
Answer:
(d) both assertion and reason are false.
Hint: Both are false

  1. Dry air has no reaction with iron
  2. Rust has the composition Fe2O3 x H2O

Question 16.
In H2 – O2 fuel cell the reaction occur at cathode is ……….
(a) O2(g) + 2H2O (l) + 4e → 4OH(aq)
(b) H+(aq) + OH(aq) → H2O (l)
(c) 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O (g)
(d) H+ + e → 1/2 H2
Answer:
(a) O2(g) + 2H2O (l) + 4e → 4OH(aq)

Question 17.
The equivalent conductance of M/36 solution of a weak monobasic acid is 6mho cm2 and at infinite dilution is 400 mho cm2. The dissociation constant of this acid is ………….
(a) 1.25 x 10-16
(b) 6.25 x 10 -6
(c) 1.25 x 10-4
(d) 6.25 x 10-5
Answer:
(b) 6.25 x 10 -6
Hint: α = \(\frac { 6 }{ 400 }\)
Ka = α2C = \(\frac { 6 }{ 400 }\) x \(\frac { 6 }{ 400 }\) x \(\frac { 1 }{ 36 }\)
= 6.25 x 10-6

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 18.
A conductivity cell has been calibrated with a 0.01M, 1:1 electrolytic solution (specific conductance (K = 1.25 x 10-3 S cm-1 ) in the cell and the measured resistance was 800Ω at 250 C. The cell constant is,
(a) 10-1 cm-1
(b) 10-1 cm-1
(c) 1 cm-1
(d) 5.7 x 10-12
Answer:
(c) 1 cm-1
Hint: R = p.\(\frac { 1 }{ A }\)
Cell constant = \(\frac { R }{ ρ }\) = k.R \((\frac { 1 }{ ρ } =k)\) = 1.25 x 10-3 f-1cm-1 x 800Ω = 1cm-1

Question 19.
The conductivity of a saturated solution of a sparingly soluble salt AB (1:1 electrolyte) at 298K is 1.85 x 10-5 S m-1. Solubility product of the salt AB at 298K (Λ0m)AB = 14 x 10-3 S m2 mol-1.
(a) 5.7 x 10-2
(b) 1.32 x 1012
(c) 7.5 x 10-12
(d) 1.74 x 10-12
Answer:
(d) 1.74 x 10-12

Question 20.
In the electrochemical cell: Zn|ZnSO4 (0.01M)||CuSO4 (1.0M)|Cu , the emf of this Daniel cell is E1. When the concentration of ZnSO4 is changed to 1.0 M and that CuSO4 changed to 0.0 1M, the emf changes to E2. From the followings, which one is the relationship between E1 and E2?
(a) E1 < E2
(b) E1 > E2
(c) E2 = 0↑E1
(d) E1 = E2
Answer:
(b) E1 > E2
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-7

Question 21.
Consider the change in oxidation state of Bromine corresponding to different emf values as shown in the diagram below:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-8
Then the species undergoing disproportional is …………..
(a) Br2
(b) BrO4
(c) BrO3
(d) HBrO
Answer:
(d) HBrO
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-9
(Ecell)A = – 1.82 + 1.5 = – 0.32V
(Ecell)B = – 1.5 + 1.595 = + 0.095V
(Ecell)C = 1.595 + 1.0652 = – 0.529V
The species undergoing disproportionation is HBrO

Question 22.
For the cell reaction
2Fe3+(aq) + 2I(aq) → 2Fe2+ (aq) + I2(aq)
EC0cell = 0.24V at 298K. The standard Gibbs energy (∆, G0 ) of the cell reactions is …………
(a) – 46.32 KJ mol-1
(b) – 23.16 KJ mol-1
(c) 46.32 KJ mol-1
(d) 23.16 KJ mor-1
Answer:
(a) – 46.32 KJ mol-1

Question 23.
A certain current liberated 0.504gm of hydrogen in 2 hours. How many grams of copper can be liberated by the same current flowing for the same time in a copper sulphate solution?
(a) 31.75
(b) 15.8
(c) 7.5
(d) 63.5
Answer:
(b) 15.8

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 24.
A gas X at 1 atm is bubble through a solution containing a mixture of 1MY and 1MZ-1 at 25°C . If the reduction potential of Z > Y> X, then
(a) Y will oxidize X and not Z
(b) Y will oxidize Z and not X
(c) Y will oxidize both X and Z
(d) Y will reduce both X and Z
Answer:
(a) Y will oxidize X and not Z

Question 25.
Cell equation: A2+ + 2B → A2+ + 2B
A2+ + 2e → AE° = + 0.34V and log10 K = 15.6 at 300K for cell reactions find E° for
B1 + e → B
(a) 0.80
(b) 1.26
(c) – 0.54
(d) – 10.94
Answer:
(a) 0.80

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry Short Answer

Question 1.
Define anode and cathode
Answer:

  1. Anode: The electrode at which the oxidation occur is called anode.
  2. Cathode: The electrode at which the reduction occur is called cathode.

Question 2.
Why does conductivity of a solution decrease on dilution of the solution?
Answer:
Conductivity always decreases with decrease in concentration (on dilution of the solution) both for weak as much as for strong electrolytes. ¡t is because the number of ions per unit volume that carry the current is a solution decreases on dilution.

Question 3.
State Kohlrausch Law. How is it useful to determine the molar conductivity of weak electrolyte at infinite dilution.
Answer:
Kohlrausch’s law:
It is defined as, at infinite dilution the limiting molar conductivity of an electrolyte is equal to the sum of the limiting molar conductivities of its constituent ions.

Determination of the molar conductivity of weak electrolyte at infinite dilution.
It is impossible to determine the molar conductance at infinite dilution for weak electrolytes experimentally. However, the same can be calculated using Kohlraushs Law. For example, the molar conductance of CH3COOH, can be calculated using the experimentally determined molar conductivities of strong electrolytes HCI, NaCI and CH3COONa.
Λ°CH3COONa = λ°Na+ + λ°CH3COONa …….(1)
Λ°HCl = λ°H+ + λ°Cl ………………(2)
Λ°NaCl = λ°Na+ + λ°Cl …………….(3)
Equation (1) + Equation (2) – Equation (3) gives,
(Λ°CH3COONa) + (Λ°HCl) – (Λ°NaCl) = λ°H+ + λ°CH3COONa = Λ°CH3COONa

Question 4.
Describe the electrolysis of molten NaCI using inert electrodes.
Answer:
1. The electrolytic cell consists of two iron electrodes dipped in molten sodium chloride and they are connected to an external DC power supply via a key.

2. The electrode which is attached to the negative end of the power supply is called the cathode and the one is which attached to the positive end is called the anode.

3. Once the key is closed, the external DC power supply drives the electrons to the cathode and at the same time
pull the electrons from the anode.

Cell reactions:
Na+ ions are attracted towards cathode, where they combines with the electrons and reduced to liquid sodium.
Cathode (reduction)
Na+(I) + eNa(1)
E0 = – 2.7 1V
Similarly, Cl ions are attracted towards anode where they losses their electrons and oxidised to chlorine gas. Anode (oxidation)
2Cl(1) Cl2(g) + 2e
E° = – 1 .36V
The overall reaction is,
2Na+(l) + 2Cl(l) → 2Na(l) + Cl2(g) (g)
E0 = 4.07 V
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-10
The negative E° value shows that the above reaction is a non-spontaneous one. Hence, we have to supply a voltage greater than 4.07V to cause the electrolysis of molten NaCl. In an electrolytic cell, oxidation occurs at the anode and reduction occur at the cathode as in a galvanic cell, but the sign of the electrodes is the reverse i.e., in the electrolytic cell cathode is -ve and the anode is +ve.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 5.
State Faraday’s Laws of electrolysis.
Answer:
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis:
1. First law:
The mass of the substance (M) liberated at an electrode during electrolysis is directly proportional to the quantity of charge (Q) passed through the cell. M α Q

2. Second law:
When the same quantity of charge is passed through the solutions of different electrolytes, the amount of substances liberated at the respective electrodes are directly proportional to their electrochemical equivalents. M α Z

Question 6.
Describe the construction of Daniel’s cell. Write the cell reaction.
Answer:
The separation of half-reaction is the basis for the construction of Daniel’s cell. It consists of two half cells.

Oxidation half cell:
The metallic zinc strip dips into an aqueous solution of zinc sulfate taken in a beaker.

Reduction half cell:
A copper strip that dips into an aqueous solution of copper sulphate taken in a beaker.

Joining the half cell:
The zinc and copper strips are externally connected using a wire through a switch (k) and a load (example: voltmeter). The electrolytic solution present in the cathodic and anodic compartment are connected using an inverted U tube containing an agar-agar gel mixed with an inert electrolyte such as Kl1, Na2SO4 etc.,

The ions of inert electrolyte do not react with other ions present in the half cells and they are not either oxidized (or) reduced at the electrodes. The solution in the salt bridge Voltmeter cannot get poured out, but through which the ions can move into (or) out of the half cells. When the switch (k) closes the circuit, the electrons flow from zinc strip to copper strip. This is due to the following redox reactions which are taking place at the respective electrodes.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-11

Anodic oxidation:
The electrode at which the oxidation occur is called the anode. In Daniel cell, the oxidation take place at zinc electrode, i.e., zinc is oxidised to Zn2 ions and the electrons. The Zn2 ions enters the solution and the electrons enter the zinc metal, then flow through the external wire and then enter the copper strip. Electrons are liberated at zinc electrode and hence it is negative ( – ve).
Zn(s) → Zn2+(aq) + 2e (loss of electron-oxidation)

Cathodic reduction:
As discussed earlier, the electrons flow through the circuit from zinc to copper, where the Cu2+ ions in the solution accept the electrons, get reduced to copper and the same get deposited on the electrode. Here, the electrons are consumed and hence it is positive (+ve).
Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu(s) (gain of electron-reduction)

Salt bridge:
The electrolytes present in two half cells are connected using a salt bridge. We have learnt that the anodic oxidation of zinc electrodes results in an increase in the concentration of Zn2+ in solution. i.e., the solution contains more number of Zn2+ ions as compared to SO42- and hence the solution in the anodic compartment would become positively charged.

Similarly, the solution in the cathodic compartment would become negatively charged as the Cu2+ ions are reduced to copper i.e., the cathodic solution contain more number of SO2-4 ions compared to Cu2+.

Completion of circuit:
Electrons flow from the negatively charged zinc anode into the positively charged copper electrode through the external wire, at the same time, anions move towards anode and cations are move towards the cathode compartment. This completes the
circuit.

Consumption of Electrodes:
As the Daniel cell operates, the mass of zinc electrode gradually decreases while the mass of the copper electrode increases and hence the cell will function until the entire metallic zinc electrode is converted in to Zn2+ the entire Cu2+ ions are converted in to metallic copper.
Daniel cell is represented as
Zn(s)|Zn2+(aq)||Cu2+(aq)|Cu(s)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-12

Question 7.
Why is anode in galvanic cell considered to be negative and cathode positive electrode?
Answer:
A galvanic cell works basically in reverse to an electrolytic cell. The anode is the electrode where oxidation takes place, in a galvanic cell, it is the negative electrode, as when oxidation occurs, electrons are left behind on the electrode.

The anode is also the electrode where metal atoms give up their electrons to the metal and go into solution. The electron left behind on it render ¡t effectively negative and the electron flow goes from it through the wire to the cathode.

Positive aqueous ions in the solution are reduced by the incoming electrons on the cathode. This why the cathode is a positive electrode, because positive ions are reduced to metal atoms there.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 8.
The conductivity of a 0.01%M solution of a 1:1 weak electrolyte at 298K is 1.5 x 10-4 S cm-1.

  1. molar conductivity of the solution
  2. degree of dissociation and the dissociation constant of the weak electrolyte

Given that
λ0cation = 248.2 S cm2 mol-1
λ0anion = 51.8 S cm2 mol-1
Answer:
1. Molar conductivity
C = 0.01M
k = 1.5 x 10-4 S cm-1
(or)
K = 1.5 x 10-2 S m-1
\(\frac{\kappa \times 10^{-3}}{\mathrm{C}}\) S m-1 mol-1 m3 = \(\frac{1.5 \times 10^{-2} \times 10^{-3}}{0.01}\) S m2 mol-1
Λm = 1.5 x 10-3 s m-1

2. Degree of dissociation
α = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}}{\Lambda_{\infty}^{\circ}}\) (or) α = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}}{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}}\)
= (248.2 + 51.8)S cm2 mol-1
= 300 S cm2 mol-1
Ka = \(\frac{\alpha^{2} C}{1-\alpha}\)
= \(\frac{(0.05)^{2}(0.01)}{1-0.05}\)
Ka = 2.63 x 10-5

Question 9.
Which of 0.1M HCI and 0.1 M KCI do you expect to have greater molar conductance and why?
Answer:
Compare to 0.1M HCI and 0.1 M KCI, 0.1M HCl has greater molar conductance.

  1. Molar conductance of 0.1M HCl = 39.132 x 10-3 S m2 mol-1.
  2. Molar conductance of 0.1 M KCl = 12.896 x 10-3 S m2 mol-1

Because, H+ ion in aqueous solution being smaller size than K+ ion and H+ ion have greater mobility than K ion. When mobility of the ion increases, conductivity of that ions also increases. Hence, 0. 1M HCI solution has greater molar conductance than 0.1 M KCI solution.

Question 10.
Arrange the following solutions in the decreasing order of specific conductance.

  1. 0.01M KCI
  2. 0.005M KCI
  3. 0.1M KCI
  4. 0.25 M KCI
  5. 0.5 M KCI

Answer:
0.005M KCl > 0.01M KCI > 0.1M KCI > 0.25KCl > 0.5 KCI.
Specific conductance and concentration of the electrolyte. So if concentration decreases, specific conductance increases.

Question 11.
Why is AC current used instead of DC in measuring the electrolytic conductance?
Answer:
1. AC current to prevent electrolysis of the solution.

2. If we apply DC current to the cell the positive ions will be attracted to the negative plate and the negative ions to the positive plate. This will cause the composition of the electrolyte to change while measuring the equivalent conductance.

3. So DC current through the conductivity cell will lead to the electrolysis of the solution taken in the cell. To avoid such a electrolysis, we have to use AC current for measuring equivalent conductance.

Question 12.
0.1M NaCI solution is placed in two different cells having cell constant 0.5 and 0.25cm-1 respectively. Which of the two will have greater value of specific conductance.
Answer:
The specific conductance values are same. Because the reaction (cation) of cell constant does not change.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 13.
A current of 1 .608A is passed through 250 mL of 0.5M solution of copper sulphate for 50 minutes. Calculate the strength of Cu2+ after electrolysis assuming volume to be constant and the current efficiency is 100%.
Answer:
Given, I = I .608A
t = 50 min (or) 50 x 60 = 3000 S
V = 250 mL
C = 0.5M
η = 100%
The number of Faraday’s of electricity passed through the CuSO4 solution
Q = It
= Q = 1.608 x 3000
Q = 4824C
Number of Faraday’s of electricity = \(\frac { 4824C }{ 96500C }\) = 0.5F
Electrolysis of CuSO4
Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu(s)
The above equation shows that 2F electricity will deposit 1 mole of Cu2+
0.5F electicity will deposit \(\frac { 1mol }{ 2F }\) x 0.5F = 0.025 mol
Initial number of molar of Cu2+ in 250 ml of solution = \(\frac { 1mol }{ 250mL }\) x 250mL = 0.125 mol
Number of molar of Cu2+ after electrolysis 0.125 – 0.025 = 0.1 mol
Concentration of Cu2+ = \(\frac { 0.1mol }{ 250mL }\) X 1000 mL = 0.4 M

Question 14.
Can Fe3+ oxidises Bromide to bromine under standard conditions?
Given:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-58
Answer:
Required half cell reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-59
E0cell = (E0ox) + (E0red) = – 1.09 + 0.771 = – 0.319V
We know that ∆G° = – nFE0cell
If E0cell is -ve; ∆G is +ve and the cell reaction is non-spontaneous.
Hence, Fe3+ cannot oxidise Bromide to Bromine.

Question 15.
Is it possible to store copper sulphate in an iron vessel for a long time?
Given:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-60
Answer:
E0cell = (E0ox) + (E0red) = 0.44 V + 0.34V = 0.78V
These +ve E0cell values shows that iron will oxidise and copper will get reduced i.e., the vessel
will dissolve. Hence it is not possible to store copper sulphate in an iron vessel.

Question 16.
Two metals M1 and M2 have reduction potential values of – xV and + yV respectively. Which will liberate H2 in H2SO4?
Answer:
Metals having negative reduction potential acts as powerful reducing agent. Since M1 has – xV, therefore M1 easily liberate H2 in H2SO4. Metals having higher oxidation potential will liberate H2 from H2SO4. Hence, the metal M1 having + xV, oxidation potential will liberate H2 from H2SO4.

Question 17.
Reduction potential of two metals M1 and M2 are
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-13
Predict which one Is better for coating the surface of iron.
Given:Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-61
Answer:
Oxidation potential of M1 is more +ve than the oxidation potential of Fe which indicates that it will prevent iron from rusting.

Question 18.
Calculate the standard emf of the cell: Cd | Cd2+|| Cu2+ | Cu and determine the cell reaction. The standard reduction potentials of Cu2+ | Cu and Cd2+ | Cd are 0.34V and – 0.40 volts respectively. Predict the feasibility of the cell reaction.
Answer:
Cell reactions:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-14
Cd(s) + 2e Cd2+ + Cu(s)
E0cell = (E0ox) + (E0red) = 0.4 + 0.34
emf is +ve, so ∆G is (-)ve, the reaction is feasible.

Question 19.
In fuel cell H2 and O2 react to produce electricity. In the process, H2 gas is oxidised at the anode and O2 at cathode. If 44.8 litre of H2 at 25°C and also pressure reacts in 10 minutes, what is average current produced? If the entire current is used for electro deposition of Cu from Cu2+, how many grams of Cu deposited?
Answer:
Oxidation at anode:
2H2(g) + 4OH (aq) → 4H2O (1) + 4e
1 mole of hydrogen gas produces 2 moles of electrons at 25°C and 1 atm pressure, 1 mole of hydrogen gas occupies = 22.4 litres
∴no. of moles of hydrogen gas produced = \(\frac{1 \mathrm{mole}}{22.4 \text { litres }}\) x 44.8 litres = 2 moles of hydrogen
∴2 of moles of hydrogen produces 4 moles of electro i.e., 4F charge. We know that Q = It
I = \(\frac { Q }{ t }\) = \(\frac{4 \mathrm{F}}{10 \mathrm{mins}}\) = \(\frac { 4×96500 }{ 10x60s }\)
I = 643.33 A
Electro deposition of copper
Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu(s)
2F charge is required to deposit
1 mole of copper i.e., 63.5 g
If the entire current produced in the fuel cell i.e., 4 F is utilised for electrolysis, then 2 x 63.5 i.e., 127.0 g copper will be deposited at cathode.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 20.
The same amount of electricity was passed through two separate electrolytic cells containing solutions of nickel nitrate and chromium nitrate respectively. If 2.935g of Ni was deposited in the first cell. The amount of Cr deposited in the another cell? Given: molar mass of Nickel and chromium are 58.74 and 52gm-1 respectively.
Answer:
Ni2+ (aq) + 2e → Ni (s)
Cr2+(aq) + 3e → Cr(s)
The above reaction indicates that 2F charge is required to deposit 58.7 g of Nickel form nickel nitrate and 3F charge is required to deposit 52g of chromium. Given that 2.935 gram of Nickel is deposited 2F
The amount of charge passed through the cell = \(\frac { 2F }{ 58.7g }\) x 2.935g = 0.1F
If 0. IF charge is passed through chromium nitrate the amount of chromium deposited
= 52g x 0.IF = 1.733g

Question 21.
0.1M copper sulphate solution in which copper electrode is dipped at 25C. Calculate the electrode potential of copper.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-62
Answer:
Given that
[Cu2+] = 0.1 M
E0Cu2+|Cu = 0.34
Ecell = ?
Cell reaction is Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu (s)
Ecell = E0 – \(\frac { 0.0591 }{ n }\) log \(\frac{[\mathrm{Cu}]}{\left[\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}\right]}\) = 0.34 – \(\frac { 0.0591 }{ 2 }\) log \(\frac { 1 }{ 0.1 }\)
= 0.34 – 0.0296 = 0.31 V

Question 22.
For the cell Mg(s) | Mg2+(aq) || Ag+ (aq) | Ag (s), calculate the equilibrium constant at 25°C and maximum work that can be obtained during operation of cell. Given:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-63
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-15
E0cell = (E0ox) + (E0red) = 2.37 + 0.80 = 3.17 V
Overall reaction
Mg + 2Ag+ → Mg2+ + 2Ag
∆G° = -nFE°
= – 2 x 96500 x 3.17
= – 6.118 x 105 J
We know that Wmax = ∆G°
Wmax = + 6.118 x 105 J
Relationship between ∆G° and Keq is,
∆G = – 2.303 RT logKeq
∆G = – 2.303 x 8.314 x 298 log Keq [25°C = 298 K]
log Keq = \(\frac{6.118 \times 10^{5}}{2.303 \times 8.314 \times 298}\) = \(\frac{6.118 \times 10^{5}}{5705.84}\)
log Keq = 107.223
Keq = Antilog (107.223)

Question 23.
8.2 x 1012 litres of water is available in a lake. A power reactor using the electrolysis of water in the lake produces electricity at the rate of 2 x 106 Cs-1 at an appropriate voltage. How many years would it like to completely electrolyse the water in the lake. Assume that there is no loss of water except due to electrolysis.
Answer:
Hydrolysis of water:
At anode: 2H2O → 4H+ + O2 + 4e …………..(1)
At cathode: 2H2O + 2e → H2 + 2OH
Overall reaction: 6H2O → 4H + 4OH +2H2 + O2
(or)
Equation (1) + (2) x 2
= 2H2O → 2H2 + O2
According to Faraday’s Law of electrolysis, to electrolyse two mole of Water
(36g ≃ 36 mL. of H2O), 4F charge is required alternatively, when 36 mL of water is electrolysed,
the charge generated = 4 x 96500 C.
When the whole water which is available on the lake is completely electrolysed the amount of charge generated is equal to
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-16
Given that in 1 second, 2 x 106 C is generated therefore, the time required to generate
96500 x 1015 C is = \(\frac{1 \mathrm{S}}{2 \times 10^{6} \mathrm{C}}\) x 96500 x 1015C = 48250 x 109 S
Number of year = \(\frac{48250 \times 10^{9}}{365 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60}\) 1 year = 365 days
= 1.5299 x 106
= 365 x 24 hours
= 365 x 24 x 60 min
= 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 sec

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 24.
Derive an expression for Nernst equation.
Answer:
Nernst equation is the one which relates the cell potential and the concentration of the species involved in an electrochemical reaction.
Let us consider an electrochemical cell for which the overall redox reaction is,
Answer:
xA + yB = lC + mD
The reaction quotient Q is,
\(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{1}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{m}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{x}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{y}}}\)
We know that,
∆G = ∆G0 + RT ln Q
∆G = – nFEcell
∆G0 = -nFE0cell
equation (1) becomes
– nFEcell = -nFE0cell + RT ln Q
Subsitute the Q value in equation (2)
– nFEcell = – nFE0cell + RT ln \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{1}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{m}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{x}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{y}}}\). ………..(3)
Divide the whole equation (3) by – nF
Ecell = E°cell – \(\frac { RT }{ nF }\) ln \(\left(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{1}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{m}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{x}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{y}}}\right)\)
Ecell = E°cell – \(\frac { 2.303RT }{ nF }\) log \(\left(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{1}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{m}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{x}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{y}}}\right)\) ……………(4)
This is called the Nernst equation.
At 25°C (298 K) equation (4) becomes,
Ecell = E°cell – \(\frac { 2.303×8.314×298 }{ nx96500 }\) log \(\left(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{1}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{m}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{x}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{y}}}\right)\)
Ecell = E°cell – \(\frac { 0.0591 }{ n }\) log \(\left(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{1}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{m}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{x}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{y}}}\right)\)

Question 25.
Write a note on sacrificial protection.
Answer:
In this method, the metallic structure to be protected is made cathode by connecting it with more active metal (anodic metal). So that all the corrosion will concentrate only on the active metal. The artificially made anode thus gradually gets corroded protecting the original metallic structure. Hence this process is otherwise known as sacrificial anodic protection. Al, Zn and Mg are used as sacrificial anodes.

Question 26.
Explain the function of H2 – O2 fuel cell.
Answer:
In this case, hydrogen act as a fuel and oxygen as an oxidant and the electrolyte is aqueous KOH maintained at 200°C and 20 – 40 atm. Porous graphite electrode containing Ni and NiO serves as the inert electrodes. Hydrogen and oxygen gases are bubbled through the anode and cathode, respectively.
Oxidation occurs at the anode:
2H2(g)+ 4OH-(aq) → 4H2O(1) + 4e
Reduction occurs at the cathode O2(g) + 2 H2O(1) + 4e → 4 OH (aq)
The overall reaction is 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(1)
The above reaction is the same as the hydrogen combustion reaction, however, they do not react directly ie., the oxidation and reduction reactions take place separately at the anode and cathode respectively like H2 – O2 fuel cell. Other fuel cell like propane – O2 and methane O2 have also been developed.

Question 27.
Ionic conductance at infinite dilution of Al3+ and SO42- are 189 and 160 mho cm2 equiv-1. Calculate the equivalent and molar conductance of the electrolyte Al2(SO4) at infinite dilution.
Answer:
1. Molar conductance
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-20
= (2 x 189) + (3 x 160)
= 378 + 480
= 858 mho cm2 mol-1

2. Equivalent conductnace
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-21
= \(\frac { 189 }{ 3 }\) + \(\frac { 160 }{ 2 }\)
= 143 mho cm2 (g equiv)-1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
Calculate the molar conductance of 0.01M aqueous KCI solution at 25°C . The specific conductance of KCl at 25°C is 14.114 x 10-2 Sm-1.
Answer:
Concentration of KCI solution = 0.01 M.
Specific conductance (K) = 14.114 x 10-2 S m-1
Molar conductance (Λm) = ?
Λm = \(\frac{\kappa \times 10^{-3}}{M}\) = \(\frac{14.114 \times 10^{-2} \times 10^{-3}}{0.01}\)
S m-1 mol-1 m3
Λm = 14.114 x 10-5 x 102 = 14.114 x 10-3 Sm2 mol-1

Question 2.
The resistance of 0.15M solution of an electrolyte is 50. The specific conductance of the solution is 2.4 Sm-1. The resistance of 0.5 N solution of the same electrolyte measured using the same conductivity cell is 480Ω. Find the equivalent conductivity of 0.5 N solution of the electrolyte.
Answer:
Given that R1 = 50Ω
R2 = 480Ω
K1 =2.4Sm-1
K2 = ?
N1 = 0.15N
N2 = 0.5N
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-22
= 5 x 10-4sm2 gram equivalent-1
We know that
\(\frac{\text { Cell constant }}{\mathrm{R}}\)
\(\frac{\kappa_{2}}{\kappa_{1}}\) = \(\frac{R_{1}}{R_{2}}\)
k2 = k1 x \(\frac{R_{1}}{R_{2}}\) = 2.4 Sm-1 x \(\frac{50 \Omega}{480 \Omega}\) = 0.25 Sm-1

Question 3.
The emf of the following cell at 25°C is equal to 0.34v. Calculate the reduction potential of copper electrode.
Pt(s) | H2(g,1atm) | H+ (aq,1M) || Cu2+(aq,1M) | Cu(s)
Answer:
SHE Value is zero
cell = E°R – E°L
= 0.34 – 0 = 0.34V
The reduction potential of copper electrode = 0.34V

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 4.
Using the calculated emf value of zinc and copper electrode, calculate the emf of the following cell at 25°C.
Zn (s) | Zn2+ (aq, 1M) || Cu2+(aq, 1M) | Cu (s)
Answer:
cell = E°R – E°L
Ezn/zn2+ = 0.76V
ECu/Cu2+ = 0.76V
cell = 0.76 – (- 0.34V)
cell = 0.76 – (- 0.34)
cell = + 1.1 V

Question 5.
Write the overall redox reaction which takes place in the galvanic cell,
Pt(s) | Fe2+(aq),Fe2+(aq) || MnO4(aq), H+(aq), Mn2+(aq) || Pt(s)
Answer:
At Anode half cell – 5Fe2+(aq) → 5Fe3+(aq) + 5e
At cathode half cell – MnO4(aq) + 8H+(aq) + 5e → Mn2+(aq) + 4H2O(1)
Overall redox reaction – 5Fe2+(aq) + MnO4(aq) + 8H+(aq) → 5Fe3+(aq) + Mn2+(aq) + 4H2O(1)

Question 6.
The electrochemical cell reaction of the Daniel cell is
Zn (s) + Cu2+(aq) → Zn2+(aq) + Cu(s)
What is the change in the cell voltage on increasing the ion concentration in the anode compartment by a factor 10?
Answer:
Zn (s) + Cu2+(aq) → Zn2+(aq) + Cu(s)
ln the case E°cell = 1.1V
Reaction quotient Q for the above reaction is, Q = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Zn}^{2+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}\right]}\)
Ecell = E°cell – \(\frac { 0.0591 }{ n }\) log \(\frac{\left[Z n^{2+}\right]}{\left[C u^{2+}\right]}\)
If suppose concentration of Cu2+ is 1 .OM then the concentration of Zn2+ is 10M (why because,
ion concentration in the anode compartment increased by a 10 factor)
Ecell = 1.1 – \(\frac { 0.0591 }{ n }\) log \((\frac { 10 }{ 1 })\)
= 1.1 – 0.02955             ……………….(1)
= 1.070 V (cell voltage decreased)
Thus, the initial voltage is greater than E° because Q < 1. As the reaction proceeds, [Zn2+] in the anode compartment increases as the zinc electrode dissolves, while [Cu2+] in the cathode compartment decreases as metallic copper is deposited on the electrode.

During this process, the Q = [Zn2+] [Cu2+] steadily increases and the cell voltage therefore steadily decreases. [Zn2+] will continue to increase in the anode compartment and [Cu2+] will continue to decrease in the cathode compartment. Thus the value of Q will increase further leading to a further
decrease in value.

Question 7.
A solution of a salt of metal was electrolysed for 150 minutes with a current of 0.15 amperes. The mass of the metal deposited at the cathode is 0.783g. calculate the equivalent mass of the metal.
Answer:
Given,
I = 0.15 amperes
t = 150 mins
= t = 15O x 6Osec
= t = 9000sec
Q = It
= Q = 0.15 x 9000 coulombs
= Q = 1350 coulombs
Hence, 135 coulombs of electricity deposit is equal to 0.783g of metal.
96500 coulombs of electricity, \(\frac { 0.783 x 96500 }{ 1350 }\) = 55.97 gm of metal
Hence equivalent mass of the metal is 55.97

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry Example Problems

Question 1.
A conductivity cell has two platinum electrodes separated by a distance 1.5 cm and the cross sectional area of each electrode is 4.5 sq cm. Using this cell, the resistance of 0.5 N electrolytic solution was measured as 15?. Find the specific conductance of the solution.
Solution.
k = \(\frac { 1 }{ 15Ω }\) x \(\frac{1.5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{m}}{4.5 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{m}^{2}}\) = 2.22S m-1
l = 1.5cm = 1.5 x 102m
A = 4.5 cm2 x (10-4)m2
R = 15Ω

Question 2.
Calculate the molar conductance of 0.025M aqueous solution of calcium chloride at 25°C. The specific conductance of calcium chloride is 12.04 x 102S m3.
Answer:
Molar conductance
Λm = \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{Sm}^{-1}\right) \times 10^{-3}}{\mathrm{M}}\) mol-1 m3
= \(\frac{\left(12.04 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{Sm}^{-1}\right) \times 10^{-3}}{0.025}\) mol-1 m3 = 581 . 6 10-2 S m2 mol1

Question 3.
The resistance of a conductivity cell is measured as 190Ω using 0.1M KCI solution (specific conductance of 0.1M KCI is 1.3 Sm-1). When the same cell is filled with 0.003M sodium chloride solution, the measured resistance is 6.3K?. Both these measurements are made at a particular temperature. Calculate the specific and molar conductance of NaCl solution.
Answer:
Given that
K = 1.3 S m-1 (for 0.1 M KCI solution)
R = 190Ω
\(\left(\frac{l}{A}\right)\) = k.R = (1.3 S m-1) (190?) = 247m-1
k(NaCl) = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{(\mathrm{NaCT})}}\)\(\left(\frac{l}{A}\right)\) = \(\frac{1}{6.3 \mathrm{K} \Omega}\) (247m-1)
= 39.2 x 10-3Sm-1
Λm = \(\frac{\kappa \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{mol}^{-1} \mathrm{m}^{3}}{\mathrm{M}}\) = \(\frac{39.2 \times 10^{-3}\left(\mathrm{Sm}^{-1}\right) \times 10^{-3}\left(\mathrm{mol}^{-1} \mathrm{m}^{3}\right)}{0.003}\)
Λm = 13.04 x 10-3Sm2 mol-1

Question 4.
The net redox reaction of a galvanic cell is given below
2 Cr (s) + 3Cu2+(aq) → 2Cr3+(aq) + 3Cu(s)
Write the half reactions and describe the cell using cell notation.
Answer:
Anodic oxidation: 2Cr(s) → 2Cr3+(aq) + 6e …………..(1)
Cathodic reduction: 3Cu2+ + 6e → 3Cu(s) ………….(2)
Cell Notation is: Cr(s) | CI3+(aq) || Cu2+(aq) | Cu(s)

Question 5.
Let us calculate the emf of the following cell at 25°C using Nernst equation.
Cu (s) | Cu2+(0.25 aq, M) || Fe3+(0.05 aq M) | Fe2+(0.1 aq M) | pt(s)
Answer:
Given: Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-25
Half reactions are
Cu (s) → Cu2+(aq) + 2e ……………(1)
2 Fe3+(aq) + 2e → 2Fe2+(aq) ……………(2)
the overall reaction is Cu (s) + 2 Fe3+(aq) → Cu2+(aq) + 2Fe2+(aq), and n = 2
Apply Nernst equation at 25°C
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-26
Given standard reduction potetial of Cu2+ | Cu is o.34
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-64

Question 6.
A solution of silver nitrate Is electrolysed for 20 minutes with a current of 2 amperes. Calculate the mass of silver deposited at the cathode.
Answer:
Electrochemical reaction at cathode is Ag+ + e Ag (reduction)
m = ZIt
m = \(\frac{108 \mathrm{gmol}^{-1}}{96500 \mathrm{Cmol}^{-1}} \times 2400 \mathrm{C}\)
m = 2.68 g
z = \(\frac{\text { molarmass of } \mathrm{Ag}}{(96500)}\) = \(\frac{108}{1 \times 96500}\)
I = 2Ag
t = 20 x 60s = 1200s
It = 2A x 1200S = 2400C

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry Additional Questions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry 1 Marks Questions And Answers

I. Choose the best answer and write it.

Question 1.
Which one of the following is an example of the conductor?
(a) PVC
(b) Bakelite
(c) Aluminium
(d) Rubber
Answer:
(c) Aluminium

Question 2.
Which one of the following can act as an insulator?
(a) Bakelite
(b) Aluminium
(c) Copper
(d) NaCI Solution
Answer:
(a) Bakelite V

Question 3.
Which form of energy is converted to electrical energy in batteries?
(a) tidal energy
(b) Chemical energy
(c) mechanical energy
(d) atomic energy
Answer:
(b) Chemical energy

Question 4.
Electrochemical reactions are generally ………..
(a) Reduction reactions
(b) oxidation reactions
(c) Redox reactions
(d) condensation reactions
Answer:
(c) Redox reactions

Question 5.
Consider the following statements.
Answer:
(i) Energy can neither be created nor be destroyed but one form of energy can be converted to another form
(ii) In batteries, electrical energy is converted to chemical energy.
(iii) Electrochemjcal reactions are redox reactions.

Which of the above statement is/are not correct?
(a) i & ii only
(b) ii only
(c) i only
(d) iii only
Answer:
(b) ii only

Question 6.
Which one of the following represents Ohm’s law?
(a) V = IR
(b) R = \(\frac { 1 }{ V }\)
(c) I = \(\frac { V }{ R }\)
(d) R = VI
Answer:
(a) V = IR

Question 7.
The unit of resistivity is …………
(a) Ω m-1
(b) Ω m
(c) m-1Ohm2
(d) Ω-1m-1
Answer:
(b) Ω m

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 8.
When cell constant is unit, the resistance is known as …………
(a) specific resistance
(b) conductance
(c) specific conductance
(d) equivalent conductance
Answer:
(a) specific resistance

Question 9.
The unit of specific resistance is equal to ………..
(a) Ohm metre
(b) Ohm-1 metre
(c) Ohm-1 metre-1
(d) Ohm
Answer:
(a) Ohm metre

Question 10.
Which is the SI unit of conductance?
(a) Siemen-1 (or) S-1
(b) Siemen (or) S
(c) Sm-1
(d) S-1m-1
Answer:
(b) Siemen (S)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 11.
Which one of the following represents specific conductance (kappa)?
(a) \(\frac { I }{ C }\) . \(\frac { l }{ a }\)
(b) \(\frac { I }{ P }\) . \(\frac { a }{ I }\)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) . \(\frac{a}{l^{2}}\)
(d) \(\frac { I }{ P }\) . \(\frac { l }{ a }\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac { I }{ P }\) . \(\frac { l }{ a }\)

Question 12.
Which one is the unit of specific conductance?
(a) Ohm m
(b) Ohm-1 m
(c) Ohm m-1
(d) Ohm-1 m-1.
Answer:
(d) Ohm-1m-1

Question 13.
Which one of the following formulas represents equivalent conductance?
(a) \(\frac { I }{ P }\).\(\frac { l }{ a }\)
(b) \(\frac { I }{ P }\).\(\frac { A }{ l }\)
(c) C x \(\frac { l }{ a }\)
(d) \(\frac{\kappa \times 10^{-3}}{N}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{\kappa \times 10^{-3}}{N}\)

Question 14.
The unit of equivalent conductance is …………
(a) Sm2g equivalenr’
(b) Sm-1
(c) Ohm-1m-1
(d) Ohm m
Answer:
(a) Sm2g equivalent-1

Question 15.
Consider the following statements:
(i) Solvent of higher dielectric constant show very low conductance in solution.
(ii) Conductance is directly proportional to the viscosity of the medium.
(iii) Molar conductance of a solution increases with increase in dilution.
Which of the above statement is / are correct?
(a) (i) & (ii)
(b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (iii) only
(d) (i) only
Answer:
(c) (iii) only

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 16.
Consider the following statements:
(i) If the temperature of the electrolytic solution increases, conductance decreases.
(ii) Conductivity increases with the decrease in viscosity.
(iii) Molar conductance of a solution decreases with increase in dilution.
Which of the above statement is / are not correct?
(a) (i) & (iii)
(b) (i) and (ii)
(c) (iii) only
(d) (ii) only
Answer:
(a) (i) & (iii)

Question 17.
Which one of the following is used to measure conductivity of ionic solutions?
(a) metre scale
(b) wheat stone bridge
(c) Dynamo
(d) Ammeter
Answer:
(b) wheat stone bridge

Question 18.
Which of the following is used to calculate the conductivity of strong electrolytes?
(a) Kohlraush’s law
(b) Henderson equation
(c) Debye-Huckel and Onsagar equation
(d) Ostwald’s dilution law
Answer:
(c) Debye-Huckel and Onsagar equation

Question 19.
Which one of the following represents Debye-Huckel and Onsagar equation?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-28
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-29

Question 20.
The value of A in Debye – Huckel and Onsagar equation is ……….
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-30
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-31

Question 21.
The value of B in Debye Huckel and onsagar equation is …………
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-32
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-33

Question 22.
Kohlrausch’s law is applied to calculate
(a) molar conductance at infinite dilution of a weak electrolyte
(b) degree of dissociation of weak electrolyte
(c) solubility of a sparingly soluble salt
(d) all the above
Answer:
(d) all the above

Question 23.
In which of the following interconversion of electrical energy into chemical energy and vice versa take place?
(a) electrochemical cell
(b) electric cell
(c) Dynamo
(d) AC generator
Answer:
(a) electrochemical cell

Question 24.
Consider the following statements:
(i) In Galvanic cell, chemical energy is’converted into electrical energy.
(ii) In electrolytic cell, electrical energy is converted into chemical energy.
(iii) In voltaic cell, electrical energy is converted into chemical energy.

Which of the above statement is / are not correct?
(a) (i) & (ii)
(b) (iii) only
(c) (ii) only
(d) (i) only
Answer:
(b) (iii) only

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 25.
In Galvanic cell, the Zinc metal strip placed gets ………….
(a) Oxidised
(b) reduced
(c) hydrolysed
(d) condensed
Answer:
(a) Oxidised

Question 26.
Consider the following statements:
(i) In Galvanic cell, Zinc is oxidised to Zn2+ ions and Cu2+ ions are reduced to copper
(ii) In Galvanic cell, Zn2+ ions are reduced to Zinc and copper is oxidised to Cu2+ ions
(iii) In Galvanic cell, Zn and copper both get oxidised.
Which of the above statement is / are correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) & (iii)
(c) (ii) only
(d) (iii) only
Answer:
(a) (i) only

Question 27.
The salt bridge used in Daniel cell contains
(a) Na2SO4 + NaCl
(b) Agar-Agar gel + Na2SO4
(c) Silica gel + CuSO4
(d) ZnSO4 + CuSO4
Answer:
(b) Agar-Agar gel + Na2SO4

Question 28.
Consider the following statements.
(i) In Daniel cell, when the switch (k) closes the circuit, the electrons flow from Zinc strip to copper strip.
(ii) In Daniel cell, when the switch (k) closes the circuit, the electrons flow from copper strip to Zinc strip
(iii) In Daniel cell, when the Switch (k) opens the circuit, the electrons flow from Zinc to copper.
Which of the above statement is / are correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) & (iii)
(c) (ii) only
(d) (iii) only
Answer:
(a) (i) only

Question 29.
Which one of the following can act as an inert electrode?
(a) Graphite
(b) Copper
(c) Platinum
(d) either a (or) e
Answer:
(a) either a (or) c

Question 30.
The SI unit of cell potential is ………….
(a) Ampere
(b) Ohm
(c) Volt
(d) Ohm-1
Answer:
(c) Volt

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 31.
The emf of Daniel cell Zn(s) + Zn2+aq(1m) || Cu2+aq(1m) | Cu(S) iS equal to …………
(a) – 1.107 Volts
(b) 1.107 Volts
(c) 3.4 Volt
(d) 7.6 Volt
Answer:
(b) 1.107 Volts

Question 32.
Which instrument is used to measure potential difference?
(a) Ammeter
(b) Voltmeter
(c) Wheat stone bridge
(d) metre bridge
Answer:
(b) Voltmeter

Question 33.
The value of EMF of standard hydrogen electrode at 25°C is …………
(a) maximum
(b) zero
(c) negative
(d) positive
Answer:
(b) zero

Question 34.
The electrode used in SHE is made of ………….
(a) graphite
(b) copper
(c) platinum
(d) iron
Answer:
(c) Platinum

Question 35.
What is the charge of one electron?
(a) 1.602 x 1019C
(b) 1.6 x 10-19C
(c) 9645C
(d) 96488C
Answer:
(b) 1.6 x 10-19C

Question 36.
The maximum work that can be obtained from a galvanic cell is ………..
(a) + nFE
(b) – nFE
(c) 2F
(d) 96500 F
Answer:
(b) – nFE

Question 37.
For all spontaneous cell reactions, the value of ?G should be ………….
(a) constant
(b) zero
(c) negative
(d) positive
Answer:
(c) negative

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 38.
The value of one Faraday is equal to …………..
(a) 96400 C
(b) 96500 C
(c) 1 .602 x 10-19C
(d) 1 .602 x 1019C
Answer:
(b) 96500 C

Question 39.
The relationship between standard free energy change and equilibrium constant is expressed as ………..
(a) ΔG° = -RTInkeq
(b) ΔG = RTlnkeq
(c) ΔG° = \(-\frac{1}{\mathrm{RT} \ln \mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{eq}}}\)
(d) ΔG = RTlogeq
Answer:
(a) ΔG° -RThilc

Question 40.
Which equation relates the cell potential and the concentration of the species involved in an electro chemical reaction?
(a) Henderson equation
(b) Arrhenius equation
(c) Debye Huckel Onsagar equation
(d) Nemst equation
Answer:
(a) Nernst equation

Question 41.
Which one of the following is Nernst equation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-34
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-35

Question 42.
Gibbs free energy can be related to cell emf as follows.
(a) ΔG° = – nFEcell
(b) ΔG° = – nFE°cell
(c) ΔG = nFEcell
(d) ΔG° = nFE°cell
Answer:
(b) ΔG° = – nFE°cell

Question 43.
Which one of the following represents Faraday’s first law?
(a) m = ZIt
(b) m = \(\frac { Z }{ It }\)
(c) m = \(\frac { It }{ Z }\)
(d) Z = mIt
Answer:
(a) m = ZIt

Question 44.
When 1 coulomb of electric current is passed the amount of substance deposited or liberated is known as ………..
(a) equivalent mass
(b) electro chemical equivalent
(c) molar mass
(d) 1 Faraday
Answer:
(b) electro chemical equivalent

Question 45.
The value of electro chemical equivalent is equal to ………..
(a) \(\frac{96500}{\text { Equivalent mass }}\)
(b) \(\frac{96500}{\text { Molar mass }}\)
(c) \(\frac{\text { Molar mass }}{96500}\)
(d) \(\frac{\text { Equivalent mass }}{96500}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{\text { Equivalent mass }}{96500}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 46.
The mathematical expression of Faraday’s second law is …………
(a) m = ZIt
(b) \(\frac{m_{1}}{E_{1}}=\frac{m_{2}}{E_{2}}=\frac{m_{3}}{E_{3}}\)
(c) \(\frac{m_{1}}{Z_{1}}=\frac{m_{2}}{Z_{2}}=\frac{m_{3}}{Z_{3}}\)
(d) \(Z=\frac{m}{I t}\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{m_{1}}{Z_{1}}=\frac{m_{2}}{Z_{2}}=\frac{m_{3}}{Z_{3}}\)

Question 47.
Which one of the following is used in cell phone, dry cell in flashlight?
(a) Zn – Cu battery
(b) Li – ion battery
(c) Ag – Cu battery
(d) Na, NaCI battery
Answer:
(b) Li – ion battery

Question 48.
The primary batteries are ………..
(a) rechargeable
(b) non – rechargeable
(c) reversible
(d) renewable
Answer:
(b) non – rechargeable

Question 49.
Consider the following statements.
(i) The secondary batteries are rechargeable
(ii) Primary batteries are non – rechargeable
(iii) Batteries are used as a source of AC current at a constant voltage.
Which of the above statement is I are not correct?
(a) (i) & (ii)
(b) (iii) only
(c) (i) only
(d) (ii) only
Answer:
(b) (iii) only

Question 50.
The anode and cathode used in Leclanche cell are ………… respectively.
(a) Zinc, Graphite rod with MnO2
(b) Graphite rod in MnO2 and Zinc container
(c) Zn container and copper rod
(d) Copper container and Zinc rod
Answer:
(a) Zinc, Graphite rod with MnO2

Question 51.
Which electrolyte is used in Leclanche cell?
(a) ZnSO4 + CuSO4
(b) NH4CI + ZnCl2
(c) NaCI + CuSO4
(d) MnSO4 + MnO2
Answer:
(b) NH4Cl + ZnCl2

Question 52.
Which one of the following is used as cathode in Mercury button cell?
(a) Zinc
(b) Copper
(c) Zinc amalgamated with mercury
(d) HgO mixed with graphite
Answer:
(c) Zinc amalgamated with mercury

Question 53.
Which one of the following is used as anode in Mercury button cell?
(a) HgO mixed with graphite
(b) Zinc amalgamated with mercury
(c) Copper amalgamated with Mercury
(d) HgO mixed with Copper
Answer:
(a) HgO mixed with graphite.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 54.
The value of cell emf of Mercury button cell is ………..
(a) 1.35V
(b) – 076V
(c) 0.34V
(d) 100V
Answer:
(a) 1.35 V
Which one of the following is used in pacemakers, cameras and electronic watches?
(a) Li-ion battery
(b) Leclanche cell
(c) Galvanic cell
(d) Mercurry button cell
Answer:
(d) Mercury button cell

Question 56.
The electrolyte used in Mercury button cell is ………….
(a) Paste of kOH and ZnO
(b) CuSO4 + ZnSO4
(c) NaCl + MgCl2
(d) NH4CI + ZnCl2
Answer:
(a) Paste of kOH and ZnO

Question 57.
Which of the following is an example of secondary batteries?
(a) Mercury button cell
(b) Leclanche cell
(c) Lead storage battery
(d) Daniel cell
Answer:
(c) Lead storage battery

Question 58.
Which of the following act as cathode and anode in Lead storage battery?
(a) Lead plate bearing PbO2, spongy Lead
(b) Spongy lead, lead plate bearing PbO2
(c) Lead Copper
(d) Mercury oxide, PbO
Answer:
(a) Lead plate bearing PbO2, Spongy lead

Question 59.
Which one of the following is used as an electrolyte Lead storage battery?
(a) PbSO4
(b) H2SO4
(c) CuSO4
(d) HNO3
Answer:
(b) H2SO4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 60.
The emf of lead storage battery is …………
(a) +1.1 V
(b) 2.4V
(c) 2V
(d) 11 . 2V
Answer:
(c) 2 V

Question 61.
The Lead storage battery is used in …………
(a) pacemakers
(b) automobiles
(c) electronic watches
(d) flash light
Answer:
(b) automobiles

Question 62.
Which one of the following is used in automobiles, trains and in inverters?
(a) Lithium ion battery
(b) Mercurry button cell
(c) Lead storage battery
(d) Leclanche cell
Answer:
(c) Lead storage battery

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 63.
Which one of the following is used as an anode in Lithium ion battery?
(a) Porous graphite
(b) Lithium
(c) CoO2
(d) Copper
Answer:
(a) Porous graphite

Question 64.
which one of the following is used as cathode in Lithium ion battery?
(a) Porous graphite
(b) Lithium
(c) CoO2
(d) Chromium
Answer:
(c) CoO2

Question 65.
Which one of the following is used in cellular phones, Laptop computers and in digital camera?
(a) Mercury button cell
(b) Lithium – ion battery
(c) H2O2 fuel cell
(d) Leclanche cell
Answer:
(b) Lithium – ion battery

Question 66.
Which one of the following is used as an electrolyte in H2O2 fuel cell?
(a) Aqueous CuSO4
(b) Aqueous CoO2
(c) Aqueous KOH
(d) NH4CI + ZnCI2
Answer:
(c) Aqueous KOH

Question 67.
Which one of the following is an example for electrochemical process?
(a) Chrome plating
(b) Rusting of iron
(c) Galvanisation
(d) All the above
Answer:
(a) All the above

Question 68.
The formula of rust is ………..
(a) Fe2O3
(b) Fe2O3.xH2O
(c) FeO
(d) FeO.xH2O
Answer:
(b) Fe2O3.xH2O

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 69.
Which one of the following is / are very important for rusting’?
(a) Oxygen
(b) Water
(c) Both a & b
(d) H2O
Answer:
(c) Both a & b

Question 70.
The electro plating of Zinc over a metal is called …………..
(a) Electrolysis
(b) Redox reaction
(c) Galvanisation
(d) Passivation
Answer:
(c) Galvanisation

Question 71.
Consider the following statements.
(i) The standard reduction potential (E°) is a measure of oxidising tendency of the species.
(ii) The standard oxidation potential (E°) is a measure of oxidising tendency of the species.
(iii) The standard oxidation potential (E°) is a measure of redox tendency of the species.
Which of the above statement is / are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (ii) & (iii)
(d) (iii) only
Answer:
(c) (ii) & (iii)

Question 72.
On the basis of the electrochemical theory of aqueous corrosion, the reaction occuring at the cathode is …………
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-65
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-66
Hint:
2H+(aq) + 2e → 2H2
2H+ + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)O2 → H2O
2H+ + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)O2 +2e → H2O
Balancing the above equation
4H+(aq) + O2 + 4e → 2H2O

Question 73.
The standard reduction potential for the half reactions are as ………..
Zn → Zn2+ + 2e E° = +0.76V
Fe → Fe2+ + 2eE° = + 041 V.
So for cell reaction F2+ + Zn → Zn2+ + Fe is ………….
(a) – 0.35V
(b) +0.35V
(c) +1.17V
(d) – 1.117V
Answer:
(b) +0.35V
Hint:
In the reaction F2+ + Zn° → Zn2+ + Fe°
emf = Ecathode – Eanode
= – 0.41 – (- 0.76)
= – 0.41 + 0.76
emf = + 0.35V

Question 74.
The standard emf for the given cell reaction Zn + Cu2+ → Cu + Zn2+ is 1.10V at 25°C. The emf for the cell reaction when 0.1 M Cu2+ and 0.1 M Zn2+ solutions are used at 25°C is ……….
(a) 1.10V
(b) 0.110V
(c) – 1.10V
(d) – 110V
Answer:
(a) 1.10V
Hint:
Ecell = E°cell – \(\frac { 0.0592 }{ 2 }\) log\(\frac{\left(Z n^{2+}\right)}{\left(C u^{2+}\right)}\)
= 1.10 – \(\frac { 0.0592 }{ 2 }\) log \(\frac { 0.1 }{ 0.1 }\)
= 1.10 – \(\frac { 0.0592 }{ 2 }\) log 1
= 1.10 – \(\frac { 0.0592 }{ 2 }\) x 0
= 1.10V

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 75.
Which amount of chlorine gas liberated at anode, if 1 ampere current is passed for 30 minutes from NaCI solution?
(a) 0.66 moles
(b) 0.33 moles
(c) 0.66 g
(d) 0.33 g
Answer:
(c) 0.66 g
Hint:
2Cl → Cl2 + 2e
Q = It.
Amount of current passed = 1 x 30 x 60 = 1800C
The amount of Cl2 liberated by passing 1800 coulomb of electric charge
= \(\frac{1 \times 1800 \times 71}{2 \times 96500}\)
= 0.66g

Question 76.
When Zinc piece is kept in CuSO4 solution the copper gets precipitated due to standard potential of Zinc is …………
(a) > copper
(b) < copper
(c) > Sulphate
(d) < Sulphate
Answer:
(b) < copper
Hint:
Standard potential of zinc < copper.

Question 77.
Which equation shows the relation between electrode potential (E) standard electrode potential (E°) and concentration of ions in solution is ………..
(a) Kohlrausch’s equation
(b) Nernst equation
(c) Ohm’s equation
(d) Faraday’s equation
Answer:
(b) Nernst equation

Question 78.
The standard electrode potential of SHE at 298K is ………
(a) 0.05 V
(b) 0.01 V
(c) 0.0 V
(d) 0.11 V
Answer:
(c) 0.0 V

Question 79.
The reaction Zn2+ + 2e → Zn has a standard potential of – 0.76 V. This means
(a) Zn cannot replace hydrogen from acids
(b) Zn is a reducing agent
(c) Zn is an oxidising agent
(d) Zn2+ is a reducing agent
Answer:
(b) Zn is a reducing agent.
Hint:
Since E0Zn2+/Zn is negative, so Zn has a greater tendency to be oxidised than hydrogen. Hence it can act as reducing agent.

Question 80.
K, Ca and Li metals may be arranged in the decreasing order of their standard electrode potentials as ……..
(a) K, Ca, Li
(b) Ca, K, Li
(c) Li, Ca, K
(d) Ca, Li, K
Answer:
(b) Ca, K, Li

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 81.
The correct order of chemical reactivity with water according to electrochemical series ………….
(a) K > Mg > Zn > Cu
(b) Mg > Zn > Cu > K
(c) K > Zn > Mg > Cu
(d) Cu > Zn > Mg > K
Answer:
(a) K > Mg > Zn > Cu
Hint:
The standard reduction potential of K+, Mg2+, Zn2+, Cu2+ increases in this order.

Question 82.
For a spontaneous reaction, the ΔG, the equilibrium constant (K) and E°cell will be respectively
(a) ve, > 1, + ve
(b) + ve , > 1, – ve
(c) – ve, < 1, – ve (d) – ve, > 1, – ve
Answer:
(a) – ve, > 1, + ve.

Question 83.
E° values of mg2+/mg is – 2.37 V, Zn2+/ Zn is – 0.76V, and Fe2+ / Fe is – 0.44 V. Which of the following statement is correct?
(a) Zn will reduce Fe2+
(b) Zn will reduce mg2+
(c) mg oxidises Fe
(d) Zn oxidises Fe
Answer:
(a) Zn will reduce Fe2+
Hint:
E0Zn2+/Zn<E0Fe2+/Fe So Zn will reduce Fe2+. Zinc cannot reduce Mg2+ because
\(\mathbf{E}_{\mathbf{Z n}^{2+} / \mathbf{z n}}^{\circ}>\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+} / \mathrm{Mg}}^{\circ}\) On similar reason mg and Zn cannot oxidise Fe.

Question 84.
In which cell, the free energy of a chemical reaction is directly converted into electricity?
(a) Leclanche cell
(b) Fuel cell
(c) Lead storage battery
(d) Lithium ion battery
Answer:
(b) Fuel cell

Question 85.
Which of the following has the highest electrode potential?
(a) Li
(b) Cu
(c) Au
(d) Al
Answer:
(c)Au

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 86.
Consider the following statements.
(i) A salt bridge is used to eliminate liquid junction potential
(ii) The Gibbs free energy change ∆G is related with electro motive force (E) as ∆G = – nFE.
(iii) Nernst equation for a single electrode potential is E = E° – \(\frac { RT }{ nF }\) In \(a_{m} n^{4}\)
(iv) The efficiency of a hydrogen oxygen fuel cell is 23%.

Which of the above statement is / are not correct?
(a) (i) & (ii)
(b) (ii) & (iii)
(c) (iv) only
(d) (i) only
Answer:
(c) (iv) only

Question 87.
The specific conductance of 0.1 N KCl solution at 23°C is 0.012 Ohm-1 cm-1. The resistance of the cell containing the solution at the same temperature was found to be 55 Ohm. The cell constant will be …………
(a) 0.142 cm-1
(b) 0.66 cm-1
(c) 0.9 18 cm-1
(d) 1.12 cm-1
Answer:
(c) 0.66 cm-1
Hint:
k x \(\frac { 1 }{ R }\) x cell constant
Cell constant = k x R
= 0.012 x 55
= 0.66 cm-1

Question 88.
Which of the following reaction is used to make a fuel cell?
(a) Cd(s) + 2Ni(OH)3(s) → CdO(s) + 2Ni (OH) + H2O(1)
(b) Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2 PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(1)
(c) 2H2(g) + O(s) + 2H2O(1)
(d) 2Fe(s) + O2(g) + 4H+(ag) + 2Fe4(s) + 2H2O(1)
Answer:
(c) 2H2(g) + O(s) + 2H2O(1)

When lead storage battery is charged
(a) PbO2 is dissolved
(b) PbSO4 is deposited on lead electrode
(c) PbSO4 is deposited on lead electrode

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 89.
Which colourless gas evolves when NH4CI reacts with Zinc in a dry cell battery?
(a) NH3
(b) N2
(c) H2
(d) Cl2
Answer:
(c) H2
Hint: 2NH4Cl + Zn → 2NH3 + ZnCl2 + H2

Question 91.
A cell from the following which converts electrical energy into chemical energy?
(b) Electro chemical cell
(d) Lithium – ion battery
(a) dry cell
(c) Electrolytic cell
Answer:

Question 92.
When 9.65 Coulombs of electricity is passed through a solution of silver nitrate (Atomic weight of Ag = 107.85g), the amount of silver deposited is ……………
(a) 10.8 mg
(b) 5.4 mg
(c) 16.2 mg
(d) 21.2 mg
Answer:
(a) 10.8 mg
Hint:
WAg = \(\frac{E_{A g} \times Q}{96500}\) = \(\frac{108 \times 9.65}{96500}\)
= 1.08 x 10-2

Question 93.
What weight of copper will be deposited by passing 2 Faraday’s of electricity through a cupric salt (Atomic weight of Cu = 63.5)
(a) 2.0g
(b) 3.175g
(c) 63.5g
(d) 127.0g
Answer:
(c) 63.5 g
Hint:
Cu2+ + 2e → Cu
2 Faraday’s will deposit 1g atom of Cu = 63.5 g

Question 94.
In electrolysis of a fused salt, the weight of the deposit on an electrode will not depend on ….
(a) temperature of the bath
(b) current intensity
(c) electro chemical equivalent of ions
(d) time for electrolysis.
Answer:
(a) temperature of the bath

Question 95.
The mass deposited at an electrode is directly proportional to ………..
(a) atomic weight
(b) equivalent weight
(c) molecular weight
(d) atomic number
Answer:
(b) equivalent weight

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 96.
Which solution will show the highest resistance during the passage of current?
(a) 0.05 N NaCl
(b) 2N NaCI
(c) 0.1N NaCI
(d) 1N NaCI
Answer:
(b) 2N NaCl

Question 97.
In a galvanic cell, the electrons flow from
(a) anode to cathode through the solution
(b) cathode to anode through the solution
(c) anode to cathode through the external circuit
(d) cathode to anode through the external circuit
Answer:
(c) anode to cathode through the external circuit

Question 98.
Rusting of iron is catalysed by which of the following?
(a) Fe
(b) O2
(c) Zn
(d) H
Answer:
(d) H

Question 99.
The conductivity of strong electrolyte is ………..
(a) increase on dilution slightly
(b) decrease on dilution
(c) does not change with dilution
(d) depend upon density of electrolyte itself
Answer:
(a) increase on dilutions lightly

Question 100.
Which one is not a conductor of electricity?
(a) NaCl(aqueous)
(b) NaCl(solid)
(c) NaCl(molten)
(d) Ag(metal)
Answer:
(b) NaCl(solid)
Hint:
In solid state, NaCl does not dissociate into ions so it does not conduct electricity.

Question 101.
The molar conductivity is maximum for the solution of concentration
(a) 0.00 1 m
(b) 0.005 m
(c) 0.002 m
(d) 0.004 m
Answer:
(a) 0.001 m
Hint:
molar conductance α \(\frac{1}{\text { molarity }}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 102.
Resistance of 0.2 m solution of an electrolyte is 50 Ohm-1. The specific conductance of the solution is 1.3 Sm-1. If resistance of 0.4 m solution of the same electrolyte is 260 Ohm-1, its molar conductivity is ……..
(a) 62.5 Sm2 mol-1
(b) 6250 Sm2 mol-1
(c) 6.25 x 10-4 Sm2 mol-1
(d) 625 x 10-4 Sm2 mol-1
Answer:
(c) 6.25 x 10-4 Sm2 mol-1

Question 103.
Saturated solution of KCI (or) Na2SO4 is used to make salt bridge because
(a) velocity of K+ is greater than that of Cl
(b) velocity of Cl is greater than that of K+
(c) velocity of both K+ and Cl-1 are nearly the same
(d) KCI is highly soluble in water.
Answer:
(c) velocity of both K+ and Cl are nearly the same

Question 104.
Which of the following electrolytic solutions has the least specific conductance?
(a) 0.02 N
(b) 0.2 N
(c) 2 N
(d) 0.002 N
Answer:
(d) 0.002 N

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 105.
An increase in equivalent conductance of a strong electrolyte with dilution is mainly due to ……….
(a) increase in both the number of ions and ionic mobility of ions
(b) increase in number of ions
(c) increase in ionic mobility of ions
(d) 100% ionization of electrolyte at normal dilution
Answer:
(c) increase in ionic mobility of ions

Question 106.
Li occupies higher position in the electrochcmical series of metals as compared to Cu, since
(a) the standard reduction potential of Li+/Li is lower than that of Cu2+/Cu
(b) the standard reduction potential of Cu2+/Cu is lower than that of Li+/Li
(c) the standard oxidation potential of Li/Li+ is lower than that of Cu/Cu2+
(d) Li is smaller in size as compared to Cu.
Answer:
(a) the standard reduction potential of Li+/Li is lower than that of Cu2+/Cu

Question 107.
The one which decreases with dilution is …………
(a) conductance
(b) specific conductance
(c) equivalent conductance
(d) molar conductance
Answer:
(b) specific conductance

Question 108.
Corrosion of iron is essentially an electrochemical phenomenon where the cell reactions are …………..
(a) Fe is oxidised to Fe2+ and dissolved oxygen in water is reduced to OH
(b) Fe is oxidised to Fe2+ and H2O is reduced to O22-
(c) Fe is oxidised to Fe2+ and H2O is reduced to O2
(d) Fe is oxidised to Fe2+ and H2O is reduced to O2
Answer:
(a) Fe is oxidised to Fe2+ and dissolved oxygen in water is reduced to OH-2

Question 109.
A button cell used in watches functions as following.
Zn(s) + Ag2O(s) + H2O(1) → 2 Ag(s) + Zn2+(aq)+ 2OHsup>-(aq).
If half cell potentials are Zn2+(aq) + 2e → Zn(s)
E° = – O.76V
Ag2O(s) + H2O(1) +2e 2Ag(s) + 2OH(aq)E0 = 0.34V
The cell potential will be ………..
(a) 1.10V
(b) 0.42V
(c) 0.84V
(d) 1.34V
Answer:
(a) 1.10V
Hint:
Cell potential = Ecathode – Eanode
= 0.34 – (- 0.76)
= 0.34 + 0.76
= 1.10V

Question 110.
Among the following cells Leclanche cell
(I) Nickel – cadmium cell
(II) Lead storage battery
(III) and Mercury Cell
(IV) primary cells are
(a) I & II
(b) I & III
(c) II & III
(d) I & IV
Answer:
(d) I & IV

II. Fill in the blanks.

  1. ……… is defined as the resistance of an electrolyte confined between two electrodes having unit cross sectional area and separated by a unit distance
  2. The reciprocal of the specific resistance is called the and represented by the symbol ………
  3. The SI unit of specific conductance is ………
  4. The relation between equivalent conductance and the specific conductance is given as ………
  5. Conductivity increases with the ……… in viscosity.
  6. m values of the weak electrolytes can be determined using ………
  7. ……… is a device in which a spontaneous chemical reaction generates an electric current.
  8. ……… is a device that converts electrical energy into chemical energy.
  9. The salt bridge contains a agar-agar gel mixed with an inert electrolyte such as ………
  10. The SI unit of cell potential is ………
  11. The reference electrode SHE has emf of exactly ……… volt
  12. The value of charge of one electron is equal to ………
  13. For a spontaneous cell reaction, the should be ………
  14. ……… is a process in which electrical energy is used to cause a non-spontaneous chemical reaction.
  15. The negative E° values shows that the reactions are ………
  16. ……… is defined as the amount of a substance deposited or liberated at the electrode by a charge of 1 Coulomb.
  17. ……… batteries are used in cell phones.
  18. ……… cell is used in pacemakers, electronic watches and cameras.
  19. ………battery is used in automobiles.
  20. Rusting of iron is an ……… process.

Answer:

  1. Specific resistance (or) Resistivity
  2. Specific conductance, Kappa(k)
  3. Sm-1
  4. Λ = \(\frac{\kappa \times 10^{-3}}{N}\)
  5. decrease
  6. Kohlraush’s law
  7. Galvanic (or) Voltaic cell
  8. Electrolytic cell
  9. KCl (or) Na2SO4
  10. Volt (V)
  11. zero
  12. 1.6 x 10-19C
  13. negative
  14. Electrolysis
  15. non – spontaneous
  16. electro chemical equivalent
  17. Li-ion
  18. Mercury button
  19. Lead storage
  20. electro chemical

III. Match the following

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-37
Answer:
i. c d a b

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-38
Answer:
ii. c a d b

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-39
Answer:
iii. d c a b

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-40
Answer:
iv. c a d b

Question 5.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-41
Answer:
i. b c d a

Question 6.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-42
Answer:
i. c a d b

IV. Assertion and reasons.

Question 1.
Assertion(A): If the temperature of the electrolytic solution increases, conductance also increases.
Reason (R): Increase in temperature increases the kinetic energy of the ions and decreases the attractive force between the oppositely charged ions and hence conductivity increases.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 2.
Assertion(A): Molar conductance of a solution increases with increase in dilution.
Reason (R): For a strong electrolyte, inter ionic forces of attraction decreases with dilution and so conductivity increases. For a weak electrolyte, degree of dissociation increases with dilution and conductivity increases.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A .
(b) A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is not the explanation of A
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 3.
Assertion(A): AC current is used in wheatstone bridge arrangement to measure conductivity of ionic solution.
Reason (R): If DC current is used in wheatstone bridge arrangement, it will lead to electrolys is of the solution taken in the cell. So AC current is used to prevent electrolysis.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 4.
Assertion(A): Strong electrolytes have low molar conductivity at high concentration.
Reason (R): For a strong electrolyte, at high concentration, the number of constituent ions of the electrolyte is high and hence the attractive force between the oppositely charged ions is also high
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) A is correct but R is wrong
(c) A is wrong but R is correct
(d) Both A and R are wrong
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 5.
Assertion(A): In Daniel cell, the salt bridge contains an agar-agar gel mixed with an inert electrolyte KCl (or) Na2SO4.
Reason (R): The ions of inert electrolyte do not react with other ions present in half cells and they are not either oxidised or reduced at electrodes.
(a) Both A and R are correct
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct

Question 6.
Assertion(A): Current stops flowing when Ecell = 0
Reason (R): At Ecell = 0, Equilibrium of the cell reaction is attained.
(a) Both A and R are correct
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct

Question 7.
Assertion(A): Copper Sulphate can be stored in a Zinc vessel.
Reason (R): Zinc is less reactive than Copper.
(a) Both A and R are correct
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct

Question 7.
Assertion(A): Copper Sulphate can be stored in a Zinc vessel.
Reason (R): Zinc is less reactive than Copper.
(a) Both A and R are correct
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(b) Both A and R are wrong

Question 8.
Assertion(A): As a lead storage battery gets discharged. density of electrolyte present in it decreases.
Reason (R): Lead and Lead dioxide both react with sulphuric acid to form lead sulphate.
(a) Both A and R are correct
(b) A is correct but R is wrong
(c) A is wrong but R is correct
(d) Both A and R are wrong.
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 9.
Assertion(A): The cell potential of mercury cell is 1.35V which remains constant.
Reason (R): In mercury cell, the electrolyte is a paste of KOH and ZnO.
(a) Both A and R are correct, but R is not the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct, but R is the correct explanation of A
(c) A is wrong but R is correct
(d) A is correct but R is wrong
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct, but R is not the correct explanation of A

Question 10.
Assertion(A): If an iron rod is dipped in CuSO4 solution, then blue colour of the solution turns red.
Reason (R): Iron is more reactive than copper and so iron displaces copper from CuSO4 solution.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

V. Find the odd one out and give the reasons.

Question 1.
(a) I α V
(b) I = \(\frac { V }{ R }\)
(c) V = IR
(d) R = \(\frac { I }{ V }\)
Answer:
(d) R is the odd one, and other three represents Ohm’s law

Question 2.
(a) m = Zit
(b) Z = \(\frac { m }{ It }\)
(c) m α It
(c) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1}}{\mathrm{Z}_{1}}$\) = \($\frac{\mathrm{m}_{2}}{\mathrm{Z}_{2}}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1}}{\mathrm{Z}_{1}}$\) = \($\frac{\mathrm{m}_{2}}{\mathrm{Z}_{2}}\) = is the odd one, all the others are Faraday’s I law but (ci) is Faraday’s ¡I law

Question 3.
(a) Pacemaker
(b) electronic watches
(c) trains
(d) cameras
Answer:
(c) train, Lead storage battery is used in trains, but in all others mercury button cell is used up.

Question 4.
(a) Automobiles
(b) Pacemaker
(c) Train
(d) Inverters
Answer:
(b) Pacemaker. In pacemaker mercury button cell is used whereas in other three, lead storage battery is used up.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 5.
(a) Cellular phone
(b) Laptop
(c) Digital Camera
(d) Electronic watch
Answer:
(d) Electronic watch. ¡n this mercury button cell is used whereas in others Li-ion battery is used up.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry 2 Mark Questions and Answers

VI. Answer the following.

Question 1.
State Ohm’s law.
Answer:
At a constant temperature, the current flowing through the cell (I) is directly proportional to the voltage across the cell (V).
I α V(or) I = \(\frac { V }{ R }\)
V = IR

Question 2.
Define Resistivity. Give its unit.
p (rho) is called the specific resistance (or) resistivity and it is defined as the resistance of an electrolyte confined between two electrodes having unit cross sectional area and are separated by a unit distance. Unit of resistivity is Ohm metre (Ω m)

Question 3.
Define conductance and give its unit.
Answer:
The reciprocal of the resistance \((\frac { 1 }{ 2 })\) is known as the conductance of an electrolytic solution.
The SI unit of conductance is Ohm-1 (or) Siemen (S)

Question 4.
Define specific conductance. Give its SI unit.
Answer:
The specific conductance is defined as the conductance of a cube of an electrolytic solution of unit dimensions. The SI unit of specific
k = C . \(\frac { l }{ A }\)
conductance is Sm-1

Question 5.
What Is meant by resistance? Give its unit.
Answer:
Resistance is the opposition that a cell offers to the flow of electric current through it.
R α \(\frac { l }{ A }\)
The SI unit of R = Ohm (Ω)

Question 6.
What is molar conductance? Give its SI unit.
Answer:
The conductance of a conductivity cell in which the electrodes are separated by 1m and having V m3 of electrolytic solution that contains 1 moIe of an electrolyte is known as molar conductance.
Λm = k x V
The SI unit of Λm = S m2 mol-1

Question 7.
Define equivalent conductance. Give its SI unit.
Answer:
Equivalent conductance is defined as the conductance of ‘V’ m3 of electrolytic solution containing one gram equivalent of electrolyte in a conductivity cell in which the electrodes are one metre apart.
Λ = \(\frac{\kappa \times 10^{-3}}{N}\)
The SI unit of A = S m2 gm equivalent’

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 8.
What are electro chemical cells? Mention its types.
Answer:
Electro chemical cell is a device which inter converts chemical energy into electrical energy and vice versa. It consists of two separate electrodes which are in contact with an electrolyte solution. Electro chemical cells are classified into two types.

  1. Galvanic cell and
  2. Electrolytic cell.

Question 9.
Distinguish between galvanic cell and electrolytic cell.
Answer:
Galvanic Cell

  1. It is a device in which a spontaneous chemical reaction generates an electric current.
  2. It converts chemical energy into electrical energy. It is commonly known as Battery.
  3. e.g., Daniel cell, Dry cell.
  4. A salt bridge is used in this.

Electrolytic cell

  1. It is a device in which an electric current from an external source drives a non spontaneous reaction
  2. It converts electrical energy into chemical energy.
  3. e.g., Electrolysis of molten NaCI.
  4. Na salt bridge is used.

Question 10.
What is meant by Faraday? How is it calculated?
Answer:
One Faraday is defined as the charge of one mole of electron.
Charge of one electron = 1.6 x 10-19C
Charge of 1 mole of electrons = 6.023 x 1023 x 1.602 x 10-19C
= 6.023 x 1023 x 1.602 x 10-19C
= 96488 C
i.e., IF ≃ 965O0C

Question 11.
Define corrosion. Give one example.
Answer:
The redox process which causes the deterioration of metal is called corrosion. Rusting of iron is an example of corrosion. It is an electro chemical process.

Question 12.
Can you store copper sulphate solution in a zinc pot?
Answer:
Zinc is more reactive than copper. Hence, it displaces copper from copper sulphate solution as follows
Zn(s) + CuSO4(aq) → ZnSO4(aq) + Cu (s) So, we cannot store copper sulphate solution in a zinc pot.

Question 13.
Why does the conductivity of a solution decrease with dilution?
Answer:
Conductivity of a solution is the conductance of ions present in a unit volume of solution. On dilution the number of ions per unit volume decreases. Hence, the conductivity decrease.

Question 14.
Suggest a way to determine 10m value of water.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-67
We find out
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-68
Then
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-69

Question 15.
Write the chemistry of recharging the lead storage battery, highlighting all the materials that are involved during recharging? .
A lead storage battery consists of anode made up of lead, cathode made up of grid of lead packed with lead dioxide (PbO2) and 38% solution of sulphuric acid is used as an electrolyte. When the battery is in use, the following reaction take place:
Anode: Pb(s) + SO42-(aq) → PbSO4(s) + 2e
Cathode: PbO2(s) + SO42-(aq) + 4H+(aq) + 2e → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(1)
On charging the battery, the reverse reaction takes place, i.e. PbSO4 deposited on the electrode is converted back into Pb and PbO2 and H2SO4 regenerated.

Question 16.
What is meant by cell constant?
Answer:
Cell constant is the ratio of the distance between the electrodes (l) and the area of cross-section (A). It is denoted by 1. Its unit is cm-1. Its SI unit is m-1.

Question 17.
State two advantages of H2 – O2 fuel cell over ordinary cells.
Answer:

  1. It is highly efficient.
  2. It is pollution free

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 18.
Why Om for CH3COOH cannot be determined experimentally?
Answer:
Molar conductivity of weak electrolytes keeps on increasing with dilution and does not become constant even at very large dilution.

Question 19.
Which will have greater molar conductivity and why?
Answer:
Sol. (A) 1 mol KCI dissolved in 200 cc of the solution.
Sol. (B) 1 mol KCI dissolved in 500 cc of the solution.
Sol. (B) will have greater molar conductivity because
λm = k x V
with dilution K decreases but V increases, so that product will increase more.

Question 20.
Raju and his father were going in a boat in the river. Raju’s father was going to throw away the cell used in watches and hearing aids into the water. Raju prevented him doing so.

  1. As a student of chemistry, why would you advise Raju’s father not to throw the cell in the water body?
  2. What is the value associated with the above decision?

Answer:

  1. The watch cells are made up of mercury. This mercury will pollute the water. Water contaminated with mercury leads to accumulation of mercury in the body of fishes and other aquatic life.
  2. It helps in keeping the environment safe from pollution due to mercury.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry 3 Mark Questions And Questions

VII.Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Explain about conductivity cell with an example.
Answer:
1. Sodium chloride (or) potassium chloride is dissolved in a solvent like water, the electrolyte is completely dissociated to give its constituent ions (cations and anions).

2. When an electric field is applied to such an electrolytic solution, the ions present in the solution carry charge from one electrode to another. PLattnium electrode and thereby they conduct electricity. electrode

3. The conductivity of the electrolytic solution is measured using a conductivity cell, solution
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-43

Question 2.
Explain about the factors affecting electrolytic conductance. Conductivily Cell
Answer:

  1. If the interionic attraction between the oppositely charged ions ofsolute increases, the conductance will decrease.
  2. Solvent of high dielectric constant show high conductance in solution.
  3. Conductance is inversely proportional to the viscosity of the medium. i.e., conductivity increases with the decrease in viscosity.
  4. If the temperature of the electrolytic solution increases, conductance also increases.
  5. Molar conductance of a solution increases with increase in dilution. This is because, for a strong electrolyte, inter ionic force of attraction decrease with dilution.
  6. For a weak electrolyte, degree of dissociation increases with dilution.

Question 3.
Explain about the variation of molar conductivity with concentration by Kohiraush studies?
Answer:
Kohiraush observed that, increase of molar conductance of an electrolytic solution with the increase in dilution. He deduced the following empirical relationship between the molar conductance (Λm) and concentration of the
Λm = Λ0m – k\(\sqrt { c }\)
For strong electrolytes such as KCl, NaCl the plot ΛmVs\(\sqrt { c }\), gives a straight line. It is also observed that the plot is not a linear one for weak electrolyte.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-44

Question 4.
For strong electrolytes the molar conductivity increases on dilution and reaches a maximum value at infinite dilution. Justify this statement.
Answer:
For a strong electrolyte, at high concentration, the number of constituent ions of the electrolyte in a given volume is high and hence the attractive force between the oppositely charged ions is also high. The ions also experienced a viscous drag due to greater solvation. These factors attribute for the low molar conductivity at high concentration.

When the dilution increases, the ions are far apart and the attractive forces decreases. At infinite dilution, the ions are so far apart, the interaction between them becomes insignificant and hence the molar conductivity increases and reaches a maximum value at infinite dilution.

Question 5.
For weak electrolyte, sudden increase In molar conductance with dilution. Prove this statement.
Answer:
For a weak electrolyte, at high concentration the plot is almost parallel to concentration axis with slight increase in conductivity as the dilution increases. When the concentration approaches zero, there is a sudden increase in the molar conductance and the curve is almost parallel to Am axis. This is due to the fact that the dissociation of the weak electrolyte increases with the increase in dilution (Ostwald’s dilution law).

Question 6.
Explain about Debye-Huckel and Onsagar equation.
Answer:
The influence of ion-ion interactions on the conductivity of strong electrolytes was studied by Debye and Huckel.
They considered that each ion is surrounded by an ionic atmosphere of opposite sign, and derived an expression relating the molar conductance of strong electrolytes with the concentration by It was further developed by Onsagar. For a uni – univalent electrolyte the Debye Huckel and Onsagar equation is given below.
Λm = Λ°m (A + B Λ°m) \(\sqrt { c }\)
Where A and B are constants which depend only in the nature of the solvent and temperature.

Question 7.
What are the values of A and B in Debye Huckel and Onsagar equation?
Answer:
Debye Huckel and Onsagar equation is
Λm = Λ°m (A + B Λ°m) \(\sqrt { c }\)
Where
\(\mathrm{A}=\frac{82.4}{\sqrt{\mathrm{DT}} \mathrm{n}}\)
\(B=\frac{8.20 \times 10^{5}}{3 \sqrt{D T}}\)
D = Dielectric constant of the medium
η = Viscosity of the medium
T = Temperature in Kelvin

Question 8.
How will you calculate degree of dissociation of weak electrolytes and dissociation constant using Kohlrausch’s law?
Answer:
1. The degree of dissociation of weak electrolyte can be calculated from the molar conductivity at a given concentration and the molar conductivity in infinite dilution using the formula

2. According to Ostwald’s dilution law Ka = \(\frac{\alpha^{2} C}{1-\alpha}\)
Substituting a value in the above equation
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-45

Question 9.
How would you calculate the solubility of sparingly soluble salt using Kohlrausch’s law?
Answer:
1. Substances like AgCl, PbSO4 are sparingly soluble in water. The solubility product can be determined using conductivity experiments.

2. Let us consider AgCl as an example
AgCI(s) → Ag+ + Cl
Ksp = [Ag+] [Cl]

3. Let the concentration of [Ag+] be ‘C’ mol L-1.
If [Ag+] = C, then [Cl] is also equal to C mol L-1.
Ksp = C.C
Ksp = C2.

4. The relationship between molar conductance and equivalent conductance is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-46
Substitute the concentration value in the relation Ksp = C2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-47

Question 10.
What is the relationship between molar mass and electro chemical equivalent. Derive the equation.
Answer:
1. Consider the following general electro chemical redox reaction
Mn+(aq) + ne → M(s)

2. We can infer from the above equation that ‘n’ moles of electrons are required to precipitate

3. The quantity of charge required to precipitate 1 mole of Mn+ = Charge of ‘n’ moles of electrons = nF

4. In other words, the mass of the substance deposited by one coulomb of charge. Molar mass (M)
Electro chemical equivalent Mn+ = \(\frac{\text { Molar mass }(\mathrm{M})}{\mathrm{n}(96500)}\)
(or)
Z = \(\frac{\text { Equivalent mass }}{96500}\)

Question 11.
What is meant by standard reduction potential? What is its application?
Answer:
1. The standard reduction potential (E°) is a measure of the oxidising tendency of the species.
2. The greater the E° value means greater is the tendency shown by the species to accept electrons and undergo reduction.
3. So higher the E° values, lesser is the tendency to undergo corrosion.

Question 12.
What is meant by Electro chemical series? Mention the top most and the least placed element in that series.
Answer:
1. The standard aqueous electrode potential at 298 K for various metal-metal ion electrodes are arranged in the decreasing order of their standard reduction potential values is known as electro chemical series.

2. The strongest reducing agent is Li which has E° value as – 3.05 and it is in bottom of the series.

3. The strongest oxidising agent is F which has E° value as + 2.87 is the first element in that series.

Question 13.
Calculate the emf of the cell in which the following reaction takes place
Ni(s) + 2Ag+(0.002 M) —‘ Ni2+(0.160 M) + 2 Ag(s)
Given that E°cell = 1.05 V
Answer:
Applying Nernst equation to the given cell reaction:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-48
= 1.05 – 0.14 V = 0.91 V

Question 14.
If a current of 0.5 ampere flows through a metallic wire for 2 hours, then how many electrons would flow through the wire?
Answer:
Q (coulomb) = 1 (ampere) x t(sec)
= 0.5 ampere x 2 x 60 x 60 = 3600C
A flow of IF, i.e., 96500 C is equivalent to the flow of 1 mole of electrons
i.e., 6.023 x 1023electrons
3600 C is equivalent to flow of electrons
= \(\frac{6.02 \times 10^{23}}{96500}\) x 3600 2.246 x 1022 electrons,

Question 15.
What are fuel cells? Write the electrode reactions of a fuel cell which uses the reaction of hydrogen with oxygen?
Answer:
A fuel cell is similar to a galvanic cell, it generates electricity directly by the electrochemical conversion of gaseous or liquid fuels fed into the cell as required.
At anode: H2(g) + 2OH(aq) → 2H2O(l) + 2e
At cathode: O2(g) + 2H2O(1) + 4e → 4OH(aq)
Overall reaction : 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l)

Question 16.
Write the cell reaction which occur ¡n the lead storage battery

  1. When the battery is in use,
  2. When the battery is charging.

Answer:
1. Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(1)
At anode: Pb(s) + SO2-4 → PbSO4(s) + 2e
At cathod: PbO4(s) + SO2-4(aq) + 4H+(aq) + 2e → PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(1)

2. 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(s) → PbSO4(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)

Question 17.
Describe the composition of anode and cathode in a mercury cell. Write the electrode reactions for this cell.
Answer:
Mercury cell: It consists of zinc mercury amalgam as anode, a paste of HgO and Carbon black is used as cathode. The electrolyte is a paste of KOll and ZnO.
At anode: Zn (amalgam) + 2OH → ZnO(s) + H2O(l) + 2e
At cathode: HgO(s) + H2O + 2e → Hg(1) + 2OH
The net reaction : Zn (amalgam) + HgO(s) → ZnO(s) + Hg(l)

Question 18.
How much copper is deposited on the cathode of an electrolytic cell If a current of 5 ampere is passed through a solution of copper sulphate for 45 minutes?
Answer:
[Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1, IF = 96,500 C mol-1]
Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu(s)
m = Z xI x t
= \(\frac{63.5}{2 \times 96500}\) x 5amp x 45 x 60 = \(\frac { 857250 }{ 193000 }\) = 4.44g

Question 19.
How much time would it take in minutes to deposit 1.18 g of metallic copper on a metal object when a current of 2.0 A is passed through the electrolytic cell containing Cu2+ ions?
Answer:
[Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1, IF = 96,500 C mol-1]
m = Z x I x t
1.18 = \(\frac{63.5}{2 \times 96500}\)
t = \(\frac{1.18 \times 2 \times 96500}{2 \times 63.5}\)
= 1793.23 sec
= \(\frac { 1793.23 }{ 60 }\) = 29.88 min

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 20.
What is a salt bridge? What is it used for?
Answer:
A salt bridge is a U – shaped tube containing concentrated solution of an inert electrolyte like KCl, KNO3, K2SO4, etc., or a solidified solution of an electrolyte such as agar-agar and gelatine. It is used,

  1. To complete the electrical circuit by allowing ions to flow from one solution to the other without mixing the two solutions.
  2. To maintain the electrical neutrality of the solutions in the two half cells.

Question 21.
Calculate emf of the following cell of 25°C.
Answer:
Fe | Fe2+(0.001M) || H+(0.01M) | H2(g) (1 bar) pt
E0(Fe2+/Fe) = – 0.44V
E0(H+/H2) = 0.00V
Cell reaction
Fe + 2H+ Fe2+ + H2
E0cell = E0cathode – E0anode
E0cell = 0.44 – \(\frac{0.0591}{2}\) 10 g \(\frac{\left[10^{-3}\right]}{\left[10^{-2}\right]^{2}}\)
= 0.44 – \(\frac{0.0591}{2}\) 10g 10
= 0.44 – \(\frac{0.0591}{2}\)
E0cell = 0.4105V

Question 22.
What is corrosion? CO2 is always present in natural water. Explain its effect (increases, stops or no effect) on rusting of Fe.
Answer:
Corrosion is a process of slowly eating away of the metal due to the attack of atmospheric gases on thc surface of metal resulting into the formation of compounds such as oxides, suiphides, carbonates, suiphates, etc.

Factors affecting corrosion are:

  1. Reactivity of metal
  2. Presence of impurities
  3. Presence of air and moisture
  4. Strains in metals
  5. Presence of electrolytes

CO2 increases the rusting of iron because greater the number of W ions, faster the rusting will take place.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Electro Chemistry 5 Marks Question

VIII.Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
How would you measure the conductivity of ionic solutions?
Answer:
1. The conductivity of an electrolytic solution is determined by using a wheatstone bridge arrangement in which one resistance is replaced by a conductivity cell filled with the electrolytic solution of unknown conductivity.

2. In the measurement of specific resistance of a metallic wire, a DC power supply is used. Here AC is used for this measurement to prevent electrolysis. Because DC current through the conductivity cell leads to the electrolysis of the solution taken in the cell.

3. A wheatstone bridge is constituted using known resistances P,Q, a variable resistance S and conductivity cell. An AC source (550 Hz to 5 KHz) is connected between the junctions A and C. A suitable detector is connected between the junctions B and D.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-49

4. The variable resistance S is adjusted until the bridge is balanced and in this canditions, there is no current flow through the detector.

5. Under balanced condition
P/Q = R/S
R = P/Q x S ………..(1)
The resistance of the electrolytic solution (R) is calculated from the known resistance values P, Q and the measured S value using the equation (1).

6. Specific conductance (or) conductivity of an electrolyte can be calculated from the resistance value (R) using the following expression

7. The value of cell constant is usually provided by the cell manufacturer. Alternatively the cell constant may be determined using KCI solution whose concentration and specific conductance are known.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 2.
Explain about SHE (Standard Hydrogen Electrode).
Answer:
1. It is impossible to measure the emf of a single electrode, but we can H2 out H2 measure the potential difference between two electrodes (Ecell) using a voltmeter.

2. To calculate the emf of a single electrode, we need a reference electrode whose emf is known. For that purpose, Standard Hydrogen
Electrode (SHE) is used as the reference electrode.

3. SHE has been assigned an orbitary emf of exactly zero volt.

4. It consists of platinum electrode in contact with 1M HC1 solution and 1 atm hydrogen gas.

5. The hydrogen gas bubbled through the solution at 25°C. SHE can act as cathode as well as an anode.

6. The Half cell reactions are given below:
If SHE is used as a cathode, the reduction reaction is
2H2 + 2e + H2(g,1 atm) E°= 0 volt
If SHE is used as an anode, the oxidation reaction is
H2(g, 1 atm) 2H+( aq, 1M) + 2e E° = 0 volt.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-50

Question 3.
How would you determine the reduction potential of Zn/Zn2+(aq)? (or) How will you calculate the reduction potential of Half cell?
Answer:
1. Consider the zinc electrode dipped in zinc sulphate solution using SHE
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-51

2. Step 1:
The following galvanic cell is constructed using SHE
Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq.1M) | H2(g.1atm) | Pt(s)

3. Step 2:
The emf of the above galvanic cell is measured using a voltmeter. In this case the measured emf of the above galvanic cell is 0.76 V

4. Calculation:
We know that.
cell = (E°ox)zn|zn2+ + (E°red)SHE
cell = 0.76 + 0V
= 0.76 V
This oxidation potential corresponds to the below mentioned half cell reaction which takes place at the cathode
Zn → Zn2+ + 2e (oxidation)
(y) The emf of the reverse reaction will give the reduction potential
Zn2+ + 2e → Zn
(E°red)zn2+|zn = – 0.76V

Question 4.
Derive the relationship between Gibb’s free energy and maximum work obtained from galvanic cell and equilibrium constant.
Answer:
1. In a galvanic cell, chemical energy is converted into electrical energy. The electrical energy produced by the cell is equal to the product of the total charge of the electrons and emf of the cell which drives these electrons between the electrodes.

2. If ‘n’ is the number of moles of electrons exchanged between the oxidising and reducing
agent in the overall cell reaction, then the electrical energy produced by the cell is given
as below.
Electrical energy = change of ‘n’ moles of electrons x Ecell ……………..(1)
Charge of I mole of electrons = one Faraday = 1F
Charge of n moles of electrons = nF ……………..(2)

3. Electrical energy = nFEcell …………….(3)
This energy is used to do electric work. Therefore the maximum work that can be obtained from a galvanic cell is
Here the – ve sign is introduced to indicate that work is done by the system on the surroundings.

4. Second law of thermodynamics states that the maximum work done by the system is equal to the change in Gibbs free energy of the system
Wmax = ΔG …………..(5)

5. ΔG = – nFEcell (6)
For a spontaneous cell reactions, the AG should be negative. The above expression indicates that Ecell should be positive to get a negative AG value.

6. When all the cell components are in their standard state, the equation (6) becomes
ΔG° = – nFE°cell …………….(7)

7. The standard free energy change is related to the equilibrium constant as per the following equation.
ΔG° = – RT In Keq …………..(8)
Comparing equations (7) and (8)
nFE°cell = RT In Keq …………..(9)
nFE°cell = \(\frac { 2.303RT }{ nF }\) log Keq ………………(10)

Question 5.
Describe about the working principle of Leclanche cell.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-52
1. Leclanche cell:
Anode: Zinc container
Cathode: Graphite rod in contact with MnO2
Electrolyte: Ammonium chloride and Zinc chloride in water.
emf of the cell = 1.5 V

2. Cell reaction:
Oxidation at anode
Zn(s) → Zn2+(aq) + 2e ……………(1)
Reduction at cathode
2NH+4 (aq) + 2e → 2NH3(aq) + H2(aq)

3. The hydrogen gas is oxidised to water by MnO2
H2(g)+ 2MnO2(s) → Mn2O3(s) + H2O(1) ……(3)
Adding equations 1,2,3 the overall redox reaction
Zn(s) + 2NH+4(aq) + 2MnO2(s) → Zn2+(aq) + Mn2O3(s) + H2O(1) + 2NH3 …………….(4)

4. The ammonia produced at the cathode combines with Zn2+ to form a complex ion [Zn (NH3)4]2+(aq). As the reaction proceeds, the concentration of NH4+ will decrease and the aqueous NH3 will increase which lead to the decrease in the emf of the cell.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 6.
Explain about the construction and uses of mercury button cell.
Answer:
1. Mercury button cell:
Anode: Zinc Amalgamated with mercury
Cathode: HgO mixed with graphite
Electrolyte: Paste of KOH and ZnO.

2. Oxidation occurs at anode:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-70

3. Reduction occurs at cathode
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-71
Hg(s) + 2OH(aq)
Overall reaction is
Zn(s) + HgO(s) → ZnO(s) + Hg(1)

4. Cell emf: about 1.35 V
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-53

5. Uses:
It has higher capacity and longer life. It is used in pacemakers, electronic watches, cameras.

Question 7.
Describe about lead storage battery construction and its uses.
Answer:
Lead storage battery:
1. Anode – Spongy lead
Cathode – Lead plate bearing PbO2
Electrolyte – 38% by mass of H2SO4 with density 1.2 g/ml

2. Oxidation occurs at the anode
Pb(s) → Pb2+(aq) + 2e ………..(1)
The Pb2+ ions combine with SO42- to form PbSO4 precipitate
Pb2+(aq) + SO42- → PbSO4(s)         …………(2)

3. Reduction occurs at the cathode
PbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + 2e → + 2H2O(1)     ……….(3)
The Pb2+ ions also combines with SO42- ions to form sulphuric acid to form PbSO4 Precipitate
Pb2+(aq) + SO2-2+ → PbSO         ………….(4)

4. The overall reaction is,
(1) + (2) + (3) + (4)
Pb(s) + pbO2(s) + 4H+(s) + 2SO2-4(s) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(1)

5. The emf of a single cell is about 2V. Usually six such cells are combined in series to produce 12 volts.

6. The emf of the cell depends on the concentration of H2SO4. As the cell reaction uses SO42- ions, the concentration H2SO4 decreases. When the cell potential falls to about 1.8V, the cell has to be recharged.

7. Recharge of the cell – During recharge process, the role of anode and cathode is reversed and H2SO4 is regenerated. Oxidation occurs at cathode (now anode)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-54
Reduction occurs at anode (now cathode)
PbSO4(s) + 2e → Pb(s) + SO2-4(sq)
Overall reaction
2 pbSO4(s) + 2H2O(1) → pb(s) + pbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + 2SO2-4(aq)
The above reaction is exactly the reverse of redox reaction which takes place while discharging.

8. Uses: Lead storage battery is used in automobiles, trains, inverters.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 8.
Describe about lithium-ion battery and its uses.
Answer:
1. Lithium-ion battery
Anode – Porous graphite
Cathode – Transition metal oxide as CoO2
Electrolyte – Lithium salt in an organic solvent

2. At the anode oxidation occurs
Li(s) → Li+(aq) + e
At the cathode reduction Occurs.
Li+ + CoO2(s) + e → Li CoO2(s)

3. Overall reactions
Li(s) + CoO2 → Li CoO2(s)

4. Both electrodes allow Li ions to move in and out of their structures. During discharge the Li ions produced at the anode moves towards cathode through the non-aquaeous electrolyte.

5. When a potential greater than the emf produced by the cell is applied across the electrode, the cell reaction is reversed and now the Li+ ions move from cathode to anode where they become embedded on the porous electrode. This is known as intercalation.

6. Uses: This Li-ion battery is used in cellular phones, Laptop computer and digital camera.

Question 9.
What is corrosion? Explain about the electrochemical mechanism of corrosion.
Answer:
1. The metal is oxidised by oxygen in the presence of moisture. The redox process which causes the deterioration of metal is called corrosion.

2. Corrosion of iron is known as Rusting and it is an electrochemical process.

3. Electrochernical mechanism of corrosion – The formation of rust requires both oxygen and water. Since it is an electrochemical redox process, it requires both an anode and cathode in different places on the iron. The iron surface and a droplet of water on the surface form a tiny galvanic cell.

The region enclosed by water is exposed to low amount of oxygen and it act as anode. The remaining area has high amount of oxygen and it act as cathode. So based on oxygen amount, an electrochem leal cell is formed.
Fe(s) → Fe2+(aq) + 2e
O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4e → 2H2O(1)

4. At anode:
2Fe(s) → 2Fe2+(aq) + 4e E° = 1.23V
The electrons move through the iron metal from the anode to the cathode area where the oxygen dissolved in water is reduced to water.

5. At cathode:
The reaction of atmospheric carbondioxide with water gives carbonic acid which furnishes the H+ ions for reduction.
O2(s) + 4H+(g) + 4H+(aq) → 2H2O(1)
E° = 1.23 V
= + 1.67V

6. The electrical circuit is completed by the migration of ions through water droplet. The overall redox reaction is
2Fe(s) + O2(g) + 4H+(aq) → 2Fe3+(aq) + 2H2O(1).
E°= 0.44+ 1.23
= + 1.67 V

7. The positive emf value indicates that the reaction is spontaneous.

8. The Fe2+ ions are further oxidised to Fe3+ which on further reaction with oxygen to form rust.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-55

Question 10.
Explain about the various protection methods to prevent corrosion.
1. Coating metal surface by paint

2. Galvanizing – By Coating with another metal such as zinc. Zinc is stronger oxidising agent than iron and hence it can be more easily corroded than iron. i.e., instead of iron, zinc is oxidised.

3. Cathodic protection: In this technique, unlike galvanizing, the entire surface of the metal to be protected need not be covered with a protecting metal instead, metals such as Mg (or) Zn which is corroded more easily than iron can be used as sacrificial anode and the iron material act as cathode. So iron protected but Mg or Zn gets corroded.

4. Passivation – The metal is treated with strong oxidising agent such as Conc. HNO3. As a result, a protective layer is formed on the surface of the metal.

5. Alloy formation – The oxidising tendency of iron can be reduced by forming its alloy with other more anodic metals. Example – Stainless steel, an alloy of Fe and Cr.

Question 11.
(a) Give reasons for the following

  • Rusting of iron is quicker in saline water than in ordinary water.
  • Aluminium metal cannot be produced by the electrolysis of aqueous solution of aluminium salt.

(b) Resistance of a conductivity cell filled with 0.1 M KCI solution is 1oo ohms. If the resistance of the sanie cell when filled with 0.02 M KCI solution is 520 ohms, calculate the conductivity and molar conductivity of 0.02 M KCI solution. Conductivity of 0.01 M KCI solution is 1.29 S m-1.
Answer:
(a)
1. It is because in saline water, there are inore H4 ions. Greater the number of H4 ions, quicker the rusting will take place.

2. It is because aluminium metal is more reactive than hydrogen and it will react with H2O.

(b)
Cell constant = Conductivity (k) x Resistance (R)
= 1.29 S m-1 x 100Ω
= 1.29 m-1 = 1.29 cm-1
λm = \(\frac { 100k }{ M }\)
k = \(\frac { 1 }{ R }\) x \(\frac { l }{ A }\)
k = \(\frac { 1 }{ 520Ω }\) x 1.29 cm-1, where
k = 2.48 x 10-3S cm-1
λm = \(\frac{100 \times 0.248 \times 10^{-2}}{0.02}\)
= 124 S cm2 mol1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 12.
1. State two advantages of H2 – O2 fuel cell over ordinary cell.
2. Silver is electron deposited on a metallic vessel of total surface area 900 cm2 by passing a current of 0.5 amp for two hours. Calculate the thickness of silver metal deposited. [Given: Density of silver = 10.5 g cm-3 Atomic mass of silver = 108 u. IF = 96500 C mol-1].
Answer:
1.

  • It is highly efficient and do not produce pollution.
  • The H2O so produced can be used by astronauts for drinking purpose.

2.
m = Z x l x t
m = \(\frac{108}{96500}\) x 0.5 x 2 x 60 x 60
= \(\frac{108 \times 5}{965 \times 10}\) x 2 x 6 x 6 = 4.03g
4.03g = V x d
4.03 g = V x 10.5 g cm-3
V = Area x thickness
v = 4.03
= 900 cm2 x thickness
Thickness = \(\frac{4.03}{10.5}\)
\(\frac{0.338 \mathrm{cm}^{3}}{900 \mathrm{cm}^{2}}\) = 4.26 x 10-4cm

Question 13.
Distinguish between Leclanche cell and Lead storage battery.
Answer:
Leclanche Cell

  1. It is a primary cell
  2. It is a non-rechargeable cell
  3. Anode : Zinc container
    Cathode : Graphite rod in contact with MnO2
  4. Electrolytes: Ammonium chloride and zinc chloride in water
  5. Emf of the cell = 1.5 V

Lead storage battery

  1. It is a secondary cell
  2. It is rechargeable cell
  3. Anode : Spongy lead
    Cathode : Lead plate bearing PbO2
  4. Electrolytes: 38% by mass of H2SO4 with density 1.2 g/ml
  5. emf of the cell 2 V.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry

Question 14.
Account for the following

  1. Aluminium undergo slow corrosion than iron.
  2. H2 – O2 fuel cell ¡s more useful than other cells.

Answer:
1. Aluminium, copper, silver also undergo corrosion but at a slower rate than iron. For eg., let us consider the reduction of Aluminium
Al(s) → Al3+(aq) + 3e
Al3+ which reacts with oxygen in air to form a protective coating of AI2O3. This coating act as a protective film for the inner surface. So further corrosion is prevented.

2. H2 – O2 fuel cell is more advanced. Because it is highly efficient. it is pollution free. In this, H2 – O2 fuel cell, energy of combustion of fuel is directly converted to electrical energy.

Common Errors

  1. Units of electrical quantities may get confused.
  2. Writing cell notation may be difficult.

Rectifications

1.Resistance – R ohm (Ω)
Potential difference – V = Volt
Amount of current – 1 = ampere
Specific resistance (ohm m) (Ω m)
Conductivity = Siemen = S
Specific conductance – k = S m-1
Molar conductance = S m2 mol-1
Equivalent conductance = S m2 gram equivalent-1
Cell constant = m-1

2. Easy way is (AC)
solid I aqueous solution II aqueous solution I soLid
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Electro Chemistry-56

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 4 English Medium

Students can Download Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 4 English Medium Pdf, Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Papers helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

TN State Board 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 4 English Medium

Instructions:

  1. The question paper comprises of four parts.
  2. You are to attempt all the parts. An internal choice of questions is provided wherever applicable.
  3. All questions of Part I, II. III and IV are to be attempted separately.
  4. Question numbers 1 to 20 in Part I are Multiple Choice Questions of one mark each. These are to be answered by choosing the most suitable answer from the given four alternatives and writing the option code and the corresponding answer.
  5. Question numbers 21 to 30 in Part II are two-mark questions. These are to be answered in about 50 words.
  6. Question numbers 31 to 40 in Part III are three-mark questions. These are to be answered in about 150 words.
  7. Question numbers 41 to 47 in Part IV are five-mark questions. These are to be answered in about 250 words. Draw diagrams wherever necessary.

Time: 3 Hours
Max Marks: 90

Part -I

Choose the correct answer. Answer all the questions: [20 x 1 = 20]

Question 1.
……………. system gives full scope to the Individual strength and Responsibility.
(a) MBO
(b) MBE
(c) MBM
(d) MBA
Answer:
(a) MBO

Question 2.
Capital market do not provide ……………..
(a) Short term funds
(b) Debenture funds
(c) Equity funds
(d) Long term funds
Answer:
(a) Short term funds

Question 3.
……………….. is the oldest stock exchange in the world.
a) London stock exchange
(b) Bombay stock exchange
(c) National stock exchange
(d) Amsterdam Stock Exchange
Answer:
(b) Bombay stock exchange

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 4.
Human resource is a ……………. asset.
(a) Tangible
(b) Intangible
(c) Fixed
(d) Current
Answer:
(b) Intangible

Question 5.
Off the Job training is given ………….
(a) In the class room
(b) On off days
(c) Outside the factory
(d) In the playground
Answer:
(c) Outside the factory

Question 6.
…………………….. is the result of New Industrial Policy which abolished the ‘License system’.
(a) Globalisation
(b) Privatisation
(c) Liberalization
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Liberalization

Question 7.
The initiative was launched to modernize the Indian economy to make all government services available electronically.
(a) Stand up India
(b) Start up India
(c) Digital India
(d) Make in India
Answer:
(c) Digital India

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 8.
A person shall hold office as a director …………….. in companies as per the Companies Act, 2013.
(a) 5
(b) 10
(c) 20
(d) 15
Answer:
(c) 20

Question 9.
Management is an …………….
(a) Art
(b) Science
(c) Art and science
(d) Art or science
Answer:
(c) Art and science

Question 10.
Which of the following is not a main function?
(a) Decision – making
(b) Planning
(c) Organising
(d) Staffing
Answer:
(a) Decision – making

Question 11.
Which is the first step in process of MBO?
(a) Fixing key result area
(b) Appraisal of activities
(c) Matching resources with activities
(d) Defining organizational objectives
Answer:
(d) Defining organizational objectives

Question 12.
Capital market is a market for ……………
(a) Short term finance
(b) Medium term finance
(c) Long term finance
(d) Both short term and medium term finance
Answer:
(c) Long term finance

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 13.
When the NSEI was established …………..
(a) 1990
(b) 1992
(c) 1998
(d) 1997
Answer:
(b) 1992

Question 14.
The headquarters of SEBI is
(a) Calcutta
(b) Bombay
(c) Chennai
(d) Delhi
Answer:
(b) Bombay

Question 15.
Who is supreme in the market?
(a) Customer
(b) Seller
(c) Wholesaler
(d) Retailer
Answer:
(a) Customer

Question 16.
Who is the father of Consumer Movement?
(a) Mahatma Gandhi
(b) Mr. John F. Kennedy
(c) Ralph Nader
(d) Jawaharlal Nehru
Answer:
(c) Ralph Nader

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 17.
Which of the below constitutes the essential element of contract of sale?
(a) Two parties
(b) Transfer of property
(c) Price
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 18.
Negotiable Instrument is freely transferable by delivery if it is a …………. instrument.
(a) order
(b) bearer
(c) Both A & B
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) bearer

Question 19.
How does a person who envisages the idea to form a company called…………. ?
Answer:
(a) Director
(b) Company secretary
(c) Registrar
(d) Promoter
Answer:
(d) Promoter

Question 20.
Who can become a secretary for a company?
(a) Individual person
(b) Partnership firm
(c) Co-operative societies
(d) Trade unions
Answer:
(a) Individual person

Part – II

Answer any seven in which question No. 30 is compulsory. [7 x 2 = 14]

Question 21.
List out the management tools.
Answer:
Tools of management have been developed such as, accounting, business law, psychology, statistics, econometrics, data processing, etc.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 22.
Define – MBO
Answer:
MBO is popularised in the USA by George Odiome. According to him, “MBO is a system wherein the superior and the sub-ordinate managers of an organisation jointly identify its common goals, define each individual’s major area of responsibility in terms of the result expected of him and use these measures as guides for operating the unit and assessing the contribution of each of its members”.

Question 23.
What are the components of organized sectors?
Answer:

  • Regulators
  • Financial Institutions
  • Financial Markets
  • Financial Services

Question 24.
Define the term “Money Market”.
Answer:
According to Crowther, “The money market is the collective name given to the various firms and institutions that deal in the various grades of near money”.

Question 25.
What is meant by Stock Exchange?
Answer:
Stock Exchange is an organized market for the purchase and sale of industrial and financial security, ft is also called stock market or share market.

Question 26.
What is Market?
Answer:
The word market is derived from the Latin word ‘Marcatus’ which means trade, commerce, merchandise, a place where business is transacted.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 27.
Who is a consumer?
Answer:
A consumer is one who consumes goods manufactured and sold by others or created (air, water, natural resources) by nature and sold by others.

Question 28.
Define Business environment.
Answer:
According to Bayard O Wheeler, Business environment is “The total of all things external to firms and industries which affect their organisation and operations”.

Question 29.
Mention any two features of entrepreneurs.
Answer:
Features of Entrepreneurs:

  • Spirit of Enterprise: Entrepreneur should be bold enough to encounter risk arising from the venture undertaken.
  • Self Confidence: Entrepreneur should have a self confidence in order to achieve high goals in the business.

Question 30.
Who is called as Promoters?
Answer:
Promotion stage begins when the idea to form a company comes in the mind of a person. The person who envisage the idea is called a ‘promoter’.

Part – III

Answer any seven in which question No. 31 is compulsory. (7 x 3 = 21]

Question 31.
Define the term management.
Answer:
“To manage is to forecast, to plan, to organise, to command, to co-ordinate and to control.” -Henry Fayol. It attempts to describe management in terms of what a manager does, and not what management is.

Question 32.
Write the features of MBO.
Answer:

  • An attempt is made by the management to integrate the goals of an organisation and individuals. This will lead to effective management.
  • MBO tries to combine the long run goals of organisation with short run goals.
  • Management tries to relate the organisation goals with society goals.

Question 33.
What are the limitations of Stock exchange?
Answer:

  • Lack of uniformity and control of stock exchanges.
  • Absence of restriction on the membership of stock exchanges.
  • Failure to control unhealthy speculation.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 34.
Define the term Recruitment.
Answer:
According to Edwin B. Flippo, “It is a process of searching for prospective employees and stimulating and encouraging them to apply for jobs in an organisation.”

Question 35.
What are the objectives of marketing?
Answer:
Baker and Anshen say,“The end of all the marketing activities is the satisfaction of human wants”.The following are the objectives of marketing:

  • Intelligent and capable application of modem marketing policies.
  • To develop the marketing field.
  • To develop guiding policies and their implementation for a good result.

Question 36.
What is B2B and B2C type of E-Commerce?
Answer:
B2B is an online business model that facilitates online sales transactions between two businesses. E-tailing is a business to consumer (B2C) transaction model. E-tailing is also called online retailing.

Question 37.
Explain the natural environment of business.
Answer:
Geo-physical environment – The natural, geographical and ecological factors have a bearing on the business. These are as follows:

  • The availability of natural resources like minerals oil .etc, since setting up of industries requires availability of raw materials.
  • The weather and climatic conditions and availability of water and other natural resources is essential for the agricultural sector.
  • Topographical factors like the terrain impacts type of business since the demand and consumption pattern may vary in these regions.
  • Location of certain industries is influenced by the geographical conditions.
  • Availability of natural harbours and port facilities for transporting goods.

Question 38.
Explain the meaning of Agreement to sell.
Answer:
The property (ownership or title) in the goods has to pass at a future time or after the fulfilment of certain conditions specified in the contract.

Question 39.
What is political environment?
Answer:
To commence business, various factors are needed. Apart from all other factors, political environment is also essential. It means that the concessions, incentives provided by the government drive them to enter into venture. The government also provides support in the form of loans, subsidies and other taxes.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 40.
What is Special Resolution?
Answer:
A special resolution is the one which is passed by not less than 75% of majority. The number of votes, cast in favour of the resolution should be three times the number of votes cast against it.

Part – IV

Answer all the following questions. [7 x 5 = 35]

Question 41(a).
Explain the features of Stock Exchange. (Any 5)
Answer:
There are various features of a stock exchange. They are given below:

  • Market for Securities: Stock exchange is a market, where securities of corporate bodies, government companies are bought and sold.
  • Deals in Second Hand Securities: It deals with shares, debentures bonds and securities already issued by the companies.
  • Regulates Trade in Securities: Stock exchange does not buy or sell any securities on its own account. It regulates the trade activities so as to ensure free and fair trade.
  • Allows Dealings only in Listed Securities: In the stock exchange only listed securities are purchased and sold. Unlisted securities cannot be traded in the stock exchange.
  • Association of Persons: A stock exchange is an association of persons or- body of individuals which may be registered or unregistered.

[OR]

(A) Explain the different methods of recruitment.
Answer:
Recruitment means selecting the right person for the right job. There are basically two ways by which an organisation can recruit its employees – Internal and External sources. External sources can further be classified into Direct and Indirect sources.
Internal Sources – Transfer, Upgrading, Promotion, Demotion, Recommendation by existing Employees, Job rotation, Retired employees, Dependants, Previous applicants, Acquisitions and Mergers.

External Sources:

  • Direct – Advertisements, Unsolicited applicants, Walk-ins, Campus Recruitment, Recruitment at Factory gate, Rival firms, e-Recruitment.
  • Indirect – Employee referral, Govemment/Public Employment Exchanges, Employment Agencies, Employment Consultancies, Professional Associations, Deputation, Word of mouth, Labour Contractors, Job Portals, Outsourcing, Poaching.

Question 42(a).
Explain the management process in detail.
Answer:
The substance of management should be identified as a process. A process is something that what a person does in the context of his individual duties and responsibilities assigned by his or her immediate higher authority.
There are twin purposes of the management process:

  • Maximum productivity or profitability
  • Maximum human welfare and satisfaction.

There are five parts of management as a process:

  • Co-ordination of resources: The manager of an enterprise must effectively coordinate all activities and resources of the organisation, namely, men, machines, materials and money, the four M’s of management.
  • Management is a Process: The manager achieves proper coordination of resources by means of the managerial functions of planning, organising, staffing, directing (or leading and motivating) and controlling.
  • Management is a Purposive Process: It is directed toward the achievement of predetermined goals or objectives. Without an objective, we have no destination to reach or a path to follow to arrive at our destination, i.e. a goal, both management and organisation must be purposive or goal-oriented.
  • Management is a Social Process: It is the art of getting things done through other people.
  • Management is a Cyclical Process: It represents planning-action-control-replanning cycle, i.e., an ongoing process to attain the planned goals.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

[OR]

(b) Distinguish between new issue market and secondary market.

Basis For Comparison New Issue Market Secondary Market
Meaning The market place for new shares is called primary market.(Initial Issues Market) The place where formerly issued securities are traded is known as Secondary Market. (Resale Market)
Buying Direct Indirect
Financing It supplies funds to budding enterprises and also to existing companies for expansion and diversification. It does not provide funding to companies.
How can securities be sold? Only once Multiple times
Buying and Selling between Company and Investors Investors
Gained person Company Investors
Intermediary Underwriters Brokers
Price Fixed price Fluctuates, depends on the demand and supply force.
Organizational
difference
Not rooted to any specific spot or geographical location. It has physical existence.

Question 43(a).
Discuss about the evolution of marketing.
Answer:
Marketing is one of the business functions. The development of marketing is evolutionary rather than revolutionary.
Evolution of Marketing:

  • Barter System: The goods are exchanged against goods, without money.
  • Production Orientation: This was a stage where producers, instead of being concerned with the consumer preferences, concentrated on the mass production of goods.
  • Sales Orientation: The selling became the dominant factor, without any efforts for the satisfaction of the consumer needs.
  • Marketing Orientation: Customers’ importance was realised but only as a means of disposing of goods produced.
  • Consumer Orientation: Under this stage only such products are brought forward to the markets which are capable of satisfying the tastes and preferences of consumers.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

[OR]

(b) Explain advantages and disadvantages of E-tailing.
E-tailing or electronic retailing refers to selling of goods and services through a shopping website:
Advantages:

  • Customer can buy the product at anytime from anywhere.
  • Direct contact of end consumer by the manufacturer cuts down the cost.
  • Customer can buy whatever they want by browsing the various sites.

Disadvantages:

  • E-tailing needs a strong advertisement and for which it has to spend large amount.
  • It is not suitable for small size business.

Question 44(a).
What are the rights of consumers?
Answer:
As a consumer, everyone should know the basic rights as well as about the counts and procedures to be followed.
The rights of consumers as per Consumer Protection Act are given below:
(1) Right to Protection of Health and Right of Safety: There may be products that cause physical danger to consumers’ health, lives and property. The health hazards which are likely to arise have to be eradicated or reduced altogether.

(ii) Right to be Informed: Consumers should be given all the relevant facts about the products. The manufacturer and the dealer should disclose all the material facts relating to the product.

(iii) Right to choose: Consumer satisfaction can be increased by giving the consumer the widest choice. From the widest range of products in quality and brand as well as price, the consumer can choose the goods.

(iv) Right to be Heard: Consumers have every right to ventilate and register the dissatisfaction, disagreements and get the complaint heard and aired.

(v) Right to Seek Redressal: The aggrieved party is to be granted compensation within a reasonable time.

(vi) Right to Consumer Education: The consumer has a right to acquire knowledge and stay well-informed all through his life.

[OR]

(b) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of liberalization.
Liberalization means relaxation of various government restrictions in the areas of social and economic policies of the country.
Advantages of Liberalization:

  • Increase in foreign investment: If a country liberalizes its trade, it will make the country more attractive for inward investment.
  • Increase the foreign exchange reserve: Relaxation in the regulations covering foreign investment and foreign exchange has paved way for easy access to foreign capital.
  • Increase in consumption: Liberalization increases the number of goods available for consumption within a country

Disadvantages of Liberalization:

  • Increase in unemployment: Due to liberalization some industries grow, some decline. Therefore, there may be unemployment from certain industries closing.
  • Increased dependence on foreign nations: Trade liberalization means firms will face greater competition from abroad.
  • Unbalanced development: Trade liberalization may be damaging for developing economies which cannot compete against free trade.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

Question 45(a).
Mention the presumptions of Negotiable Instruments.
Answer:
Presumptions of Negotiable Instrument:

  • Every negotiable instrument is presumed to have been drawn and accepted for consideration.
  • Every negotiable instrument bearing, a date is presumed to have been made or drawn on such a date.
  • It is presumed to have been accepted within a reasonable time after the date and before its maturity.
  • The transfer of a negotiable instrument is presumed to have been made before maturity,
  • When a negotiable instrument has been lost, it is presumed to have been duly stamped
  • The holder of a negotiable instrument is presumed to be a holder in due course.

[OR]
(b) Explain in detail on classification according to the type of business.
Classification of Entrepreneur according to the type of business:

  • Business Entrepreneur: He is called solo entrepreneur. He is the one who finds out an idea for a new product or service and establish a business enterprise.
  • Trading Entrepreneur: Trading entrepreneurs are those who restrict themselves to buying and selling finished goods.
  • Industrial Entrepreneur: These are entrepreneurs who manufacture products to cater to the needs of the consumers.
  • Corporate Entrepreneur: He is called as promoter. He takes initiative necessary to start an entity under corporate format.
  • Agricultural Entrepreneur: These entrepreneurs are those who raise farm products and market them.

Question 46(a).
Explain any five Government Entrepreneurial schemes.
Answer:
To support and strengthen the Start-up culture in India, the Government has launched various schemes. They are as follows:
(i) The Modified Special Incentive Package Scheme (M-SIPS): The M-SIPS scheme provides capital subsidy of 20% in SEZ and 25% subsidy in non-SEZ for business units engaged in manufacturing of electronic goods.

(ii) New Gen Innovation and Entrepreneurship Development Centre (New Gen IEDC):
It provides a limited one time non-recurring financial assistance to entrepreneurship up to Rs.25 lakhs in the fields of chemicals, technology, health care, defence, etc.

(iii) Dairy Entrepreneurship Development Scheme: Dairy Entrepreneurship Development Scheme aims at helping entrepreneurs in the fields of agriculture, pets and animals and dairy farms.

Tamil Nadu 12th Commerce Model Question Paper 2 English Medium

(iv) Single Point Registration Scheme: A great scheme for micro and small enterprises which provides an exemption from payment of Earnest Money Deposit.

(v) Atal Incubation Centres (AIC): The Government of India has set up the Atal Innovation Mission (AIM) at NITI Aayog in 2016 with the overarching purpose of promoting a culture of innovation and entrepreneurship in the country.

[OR]
(b) Who are the KMP?
Answer:
Companies Act, 2013 has introduced many new concepts and Key Managerial Personnel (KMP) is one of them. KMP covers the traditional roles of managing director and whole time director and also includes some functional heads.

Key Managerial Personnel: The definition of the term Key Managerial Personnel is contained in Section 2(51) of the Companies Act, 2013. This Section states:

  • The Chief Executive Officer
  • The Managing Director or Manager
  • The Company Secretary
  • The Whole-time Director
  • The Chief Financial Officer
  • Such other officer as may be prescribed

Question 47(a).
Discuss the liabilities of Company Secretary.
Answer:
As an officer, a company secretary has extensive duties and liabilities. The success of the company depends upon his efficient functions and capacity to perform.
Liabilities:

  • It is duty of the secretary to arrange for Board meetings and shareholders annual general meeting.
  • The secretary controls and supervises the day-to-day activities of the company.
  • Also he should prepare details for issue of allotment letters, share certificates and dividend warrants.
  • To arrange for filing statement in lieu of prospectus.
  • The secretary should send notice of general meeting to every member of the company.
  • Being a principal officer, a company secretary can sign contracts and proceedings of company meetings.
  • He is liable to maintain share registers and register of directors and contracts.
  • To prepare minutes of every general meeting and Board meetings within 30 days.

[OR]
(b) Explain the role of business in consumer protection.
Business enterprises should do the following towards protecting consumers.

  • Avoidance of Price Hike: Business enterprises should desist from hiking the price in the context of acute shortage of goods.
  • Avoidance of Hoarding: Business enterprises should not indulge in hoarding and black marketing to earn maximum profit.
  • Guarantees for Good Quality: Business enterprises should not give false warranty for the products.
  • Product Information: Business enterprises should disclose correct, complete and accurate information about the product viz. size, quality, quantity, weight etc.
  • Truth in advertising: Business enterprises should not convey false, untrue, bogus information relating to the product through the advertisement.
  • Money Refund Guarantee: Where the product becomes defective, business enterprises should replace it with new one or refund the purchase price.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Students can Download Bio Botany Chapter 9 Plant Breeding Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Plant Breeding Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Assertion: Genetic variation provides the raw material for selection.
Reason: Genetic variations are differences in genotypes of the individuals.
(a) Assertion is right and reason is wrong.
(b) Assertion is wrong and reason is right.
(c) Both reason and assertion is right.
(d) Both reason and assertion is wrong.
Answer:
(c) Both reason and assertion is right.

Question 2.
While studying the history of domestication of various cultivated plants recognized earlier.
(a) Centres of origin
(b) Centres of domestication
(c) Centres of hybrid
(d) Centres of variation
Answer:
(a) Centres of origin

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 3.
Pick out the odd pair.
(a) Mass selection – Morphological characters
(b) Purline selection – Repeated self pollination
(c) Clonal selection – Sexually propagated
(d) Natural selection – Involves nature
Answer:
(a) Mass selection – Morphological characters

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding
Answer:
(b) i – III, ii – I, iii – IV, iv – II

Question 5.
The quickest method of plant breeding is __________
(a) Introduction
(b) Selection
(c) Hybridization
(d) Mutation breeding
Answer:
(d) Mutation breeding

Question 6.
Desired improved variety of economically useful crops are raised by __________
(a) natural selection
(b) hybridization
(c) mutation
(d) biofertilisers
Answer:
(b) hybridization

Question 7.
Plants having similar genotypes produced by plant breeding are called __________
(a) clone
(b) haploid
(c) autopolyploid
(d) genome
Answer:
(a) clone

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 8.
Importing better varieties and plants from outside and acclimatising them to local environment is called __________
(a) cloning
(b) heterosis
(c) selection
(d) introduction
Answer:
(d) introduction

Question 9.
Dwarfing gene of wheat is __________
(a) pall
(b) Atomita 1
(c) Norin 10
(d) pelita 2
Answer:
(c) Norin 10

Question 10.
Crosses between the plants of the same variety are called __________
(a) interspecific
(b) intervarietal
(c) intravarietal
(d) intergeneric
Answer:
(c) intravarietal

Question 11.
Progeny obtained as a result of repeat self pollination a cross pollinated crop to called __________
(a) pure line
(b) pedigree line
(c) inbreed line
(d) heterosis
Answer:
(a) pure line

Question 12.
Jaya and Ratna are the semi dwarf varieties of __________
(a) wheat
(b) rice
(c) cowpea
(d) mustard
Answer:
(b) rice

Question 13.
Which one of the following are the species that are crossed to give sugarcane varieties with high sugar, high yield, thick stems and ability to grow in the sugarcane belt of North India?
(a) Saccharum robustum and Saccharum officinarum
(b) Saccharum barberi and Saccharum officinarum
(c) Saccharum sinense and Saccharum officinarum
(d) Saccharum barberi and Saccharum robustum
Answer:
(b) Saccharum barberi and Saccharum officinarum

Question 14.
Match column I (crop) with column II (Corresponding disease resistant variety) and select the correct option from the given codes.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding
Answer:
(b) ii, i, iii, iv

Question 15.
A wheat variety, Atlas 66 which has been used as a donor for improving cultivated wheat, which is rich in __________
(a) iron
(b) carbohydrates
(c) proteins
(d) vitamins
Answer:
(c) proteins

Question 16.
Which one of the following crop varieties correct matches with its resistance to a disease?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding
Answer:
(a) Pusa Komal – Bacterial blight

Question 17.
Which of the following is incorrectly paired?
(a) Wheat – Himgiri
(b) Milch breed – Sahiwal
(c) Rice – Ratna
(d) Pusa Komal – Brassica
Answer:
(d) Pusa Komal – Brassica

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 18.
Match list I with list II:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding
Answer:
(b) i-d, ii-c, iii-a, iv-b

Question 19.
Differentiate primary introduction from secondary introduction
Answer:

  1. Primary Introduction: Primary introduction – When the introduced variety is well adapted to the new environment without any alternation to the original genotype.
  2. Secondary Introduction: Secondary introduction – When the introduced variety is subjected to selection to isolate a superior variety and hybridized with a local variety to transfer one or a few characters to them.

Question 20.
How are microbial innocnlants used to increase the soil fertility?
Answer:

  • Rhizobium biofertilizer culture will fix the atmospheric nitrogen by which the paddy field yield will increase by 15-40 %
  • Azolla will get quickly decomposed in soil and increase the yield of rice crop.
  • Arbuscular mycorrhizae have the abitity to dissolve phosphates found in the soil.
  • Sea weed Liquid fertilizer will provide carbohydrate for plants. Thus the microbial innoculants used to increase the soil fertitty.

Advantages :

  • They are efficient in fixing nitrogen solubilising phosphate and decomposing cellulose.
  • They are designed to improve the soil fertility plant growth and also the member and biological activity of beneficial microoganisms in the soil.
  • They are eco-friendly organic agro inputs and are more efficient and cost effective than chemical fertilizers.

Question 21.
What are the different types of hybridization?
Answer:
Types of Hybridization
According to the relationship between plants, the hybridization is divided into.

  1. Intravarietal hybridization – The cross between the plants of same variety. Such crosses are useful only in the self-pollinated crops.
  2. Intervarietal hybridization – The cross between the plants belonging to two different varieties of the same species and is also known as intraspecific hybridization. This technique has been the basis of improving self-pollinated as well as cross pollinated crops.
  3. Interspecific hybridization – The cross between the plants belonging to different species belonging to the same genus is also called intragenic hybridization. It is commonly used for transferring the genes of disease, insect, pest and drought resistance from one species to another.

Question 22.
Explain the best-suited type followed by plant breeders at present?
Answer:

  • It develops new plant varieties by the process of selection and seeks to achieve the expression of genetic material which is already present within the species.
  • Conventional plant breeding methods resulting in hybrid varieties had a tremendous impact on agriculture productivity over the last decades.

Methods of plant breeding :

  • plant introductions method
  • Hybridization
  • Heterosis
  • mutation
  • ploidy
  • Tissue culture
  • Green revolution
  • Biotechnological Technique

Question 23.
Write a note on heterosis.
Answer:
The superiority of the F1 hybrid in performance over its parents is called heterosis or hybrid vigour. Vigour refers to increase in growth, yield, greater adaptability of resistance to diseases, pest and drought. Vegetative propagation is the best suited measure for maintaining hybrid vigour, since the desired characters are not lost and can persist over a period of time. Many breeders believe that its magnitude of heterosis is directly related to the degree of genetic diversity between the two parents. Depending on the nature, origin, adaptability and reproducing ability heterosis can be classified as:

  1. Euheterosis- This is the true heterosis which is inherited and is further classified as
  2. Mutational Euheterosis – Simplest type of euheterosis and results from the sheltering or eliminating of the deleterious, unfavourable often lethal, recessive, mutant genes by their adaptively superior dominant alleles in cross pollinated crops.
  3. Balanced Euheterosis – Well balanced gene combinations which is more adaptive to environmental conditions and agricultural usefulness.
  4. Pseudoheterosis – Also termed as luxuriance. Progeny possess superiority over parents in vegetative growth but not in yield and adaptation, usually sterile or poorly fertile.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 24.
List out the new breeding techniques involved in developing new traits in plant breeding.
Answer:
In the milestones of plant breeding methods Genetic Engineering, Plant tissue culture, protoplasmic fusion or somatic hybridization molecular marking, and DNA fingerprinting are some of the modern plant breeding tools used to improve the crop varieties.

New plant engineering Techniques / New Breeding Techniques (NBT): NBT is a collection of methods that could increase and accelerate the development of new traits in plant breeding.

The various methods of achieving these changes in traits include the following.

  • Cutting and modifying the genome during the repair process by tools like CRISPR / Cas
  • Genome editing to introduce changes in few base pairs using a technique called oligonucleotide, directed mutagenesis (ODM)
  • Transferring a gene from an identical or closely related species (cisgenesis)
  • Organising processes that alter gene activity without altering the DNA itself (epigenetic methods)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Plant Breeding Additional Questions and Answers

1 – Mark Questions

Question 1.
____________ is the process of bringing a plant species under human control.
(a) Emasculation
(b) Hybridization
(c) Domestication
(d) Acclimatization
Answer:
(c) Domestication

Question 2.
Which of the following scientist developed the world’s first cotton hybrid?
(a) Dr. B.P. Pal
(b) C.T. Patel
(c) Dr. K. Ramiah
(d) N.G.P. Rao
Answer:
(b) C.T. Patel

Question 3.
Identify the incorrect statement:
(a) Bio-inoculants are efficient in solubilizing phosphate
(A) Bio-inoculants are eco-friendly organic agro outputs
(c) Bio-inoculants are obtained from dead organic matters
(d) Bio-inoculants are designed to improve soil fertility
Answer:
(c) Bio-inoculants are obtained from dead organic matters

Question 4.
Which is not a free-living nitrogen-fixing species?
(a) Azotobacter
(b) Clostridium
(c) Nostop
(d) Anabaena
Answer:
(d) Anabaena

Question 5.
Arbuscular mycorrhizae is a symbiotic association between ________
(a) Algae and fungi
(b) Angiosperm roots and fungi
(c) Blue-green algae and Azolla fern
(d) Cyanobacteria and corolloid root
Answer:
(b) Angiosperm roots and fungi

Question 6.
Azolla is best suited biofertilizer for ____________
(a) Sugar cane cultivation
(b) Paddy cultivation
(c) Wheat cultivation
(d) Cotton cultivation
Answer:
(A) Paddy cultivation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 7.
Assertion (A): SLF promotes vigorous growth and provide resistance against diseases.
Reason (R): SLF is made from kelp containing more than 70 minerals.
(a) Both A and R are true. R explains A.
(A) A is true R is false
(c) A is false R is true
(d) Both A and R are false
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are true. R explains A.

Question 8.
Assertion (A): Pure line varieties show homozygosity.
Reason (R): Pure line species are obtained through cross-pollination.
(a) Both A and R are true. R explains A.
(b) A is true R is false
(c) A is false R is true
(d) Both A and R are false
Answer:
(b) A is true R is false

Question 9.
Assertion (A): Hybrids show increased growth and elevated yield.
Reason (R): F1 hybrids show Heterosis.
(a) Both A and R are true. R explains A.
(b) A is true R is false
(c) A is false R is true
(d) Both A and R are false
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are true. R explains A.

Question 10.
Statement (1): Trichoderma species is a free-living bacteria.
Statement (2): It acts as a potent biocontrol agent
(a) Statement 1 is correct and Statement 2 is incorrect
(b) Statement 1 is incorrect and Statement 2 is correct
(c) Both the statements are correct
(d) Both the statements are incorrect
Answer:
(b) Statement 1 is incorrect and Statement 2 is correct

Question 11.
Statement (1): Clonal selection is carried out in asexually propagating plants.
Statement (2): Clones show similar genotypes.
(a) Statement 1 is correct and Statement 2 is incorrect
(b) Statement 1 is incorrect and Statement 2 is correct
(c) Both the statements are correct
(d) Both the statements are incorrect
Answer:
(c) Both statements are correct

Question 12.
Removal of anthers from a flower to overcome self-pollination and the phenomenon is.
Answer:
Emasculation

Question 13.
Identify the proper sequence of the hybridization techniques.
(a) Emasculation → Selection → Bagging → Crossing → Harvesting
(b) Harvesting → Selection → Crossing → Emasculation → Bagging
(c) Selection → Harvesting → Crossing → Emasculation → Bagging
(d) Selection → Emasculation → Bagging → Crossing → Harvesting
Answer:
(d) Selection → Emasculation → Bagging → Crossing → Harvesting

Question 14.
Intraspecific hybridization is also termed as
(a) Intravarietal hybridization
(b) Intervarietal hybridization
(c) Interspecific hybridization
(d) Intergeneric hybridization
Answer:
(b) Intervarietal hybridization

Question 15.
The period of opening of a flower is ________
Answer:
Anthesis

Question 16.
The superiority of hybrids over parents only in vegetative growth not in yield. This phenomenon is termed as ________
(a) Euheterosis
(b) Balanced euheterosis
(c) Luxuriance
(d) Mutational heterosis
Answer:
(c) Luxuriance

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 17.
The term green revolution was coined by ________
(a) William S Gaud
(b) M.S. Swaminathan
(c) Dr. B.P. Pal
(d) Dr. N.E. Borlaug
Answer:
(a) William S Gaud

Question 18.
Which is the second gamma garden in India?
Answer:
Indian Agricultural Research Institute (IARI)

Question 19.
Match the following:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding
Answer:
(a) A – ii, B – i, C – iv, D – iii

Question 20.
Who is popularly called the “father of the green revolution in India”?
(a) Nel Jeyaraman
(b) Dr. M.S. Swaminathan
(c) Dr. Nammalvar
(d) N.G.P. Rao
Answer:
(a) Dr. M. S. Swaminathan

Question 21.
Pusa swamim variety of Brassica species show resistance to ________
(a) White rust
(b) Leaf curl
(c) Black rot
(d) Hill bunt
Answer:
(a) White rust

Question 22.
The first established Atomic Garden in India was ________
(a) Bhabha Atomic Research Institute
(b) Indira Gandhi Centre for Atomic Research
(c) Indian Agricultural Research Institute
(d) Bose Research Institute
Answer:
(d) Bose Research Institute

Question 23.
Triticale is polyploid breed of ________
(a) Triticum cereale x Secale sativus
(b) Triticum durum x Secale cereale
(c) Triticum cereale x Secale sativus
(d) Triticum sativus x Secale cereale
Answer:
(b) Triticum durum x Secale cereale

Question 24.
Raphanobrassica is an example for ________
(a) Autopolyploid
(b) Allopolyploid
(c) Polyploid
(d) Polysomy
Answer:
(b) Allopolyploid

Question 25.
Atlas 66 is a improved variety of ________
(a) Rice
(b) Maize
(c) Wheat
(d) Spinach
Answer:
(c) Wheat

Question 26.
Pusa Sawani variety of okra is resistant against ________
(a) Aphids
(b) Fruit borers
(c) Shoot and fruit borers
(d) Jassids
Answer:
(c) Shoot and fruit borers

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 27.
________ was the first person to develop the world’s first hybrid of sorghum.
Answer:
N.G.P. Rao

Question 28.
Identify the incorrect statement:
(i) SLF is obtained from Kelps – a brown algae
(ii) Azolla is a fern
(iii) Rhizobium is found in association with root nodules
(iv) AM forms symbiotic relation with angiosperm roots
(a) i only
(b) ii, iii, and iv only
(c) none of the above
(d) all the above
Answer:
(c) none of the above

Question 29.
Damping-off of tomato is controlled by ________
(a) Beauveria species
(b) Trichoderma species
(c) Acacia species
(d) Pseudomonas species
Answer:
(a) Beauveria species

Question 30.
Match the following:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding
Answer:
(a) A – ii, B – iv, C – i, D – iii

Question 31.
Identify the correct symbiotic association
(a) Rhizobium × Corolloid roots
(b) Arbuscular Mycorrhizae × Angiospermic roots
(c) Azolla × Amantia
(d) Azospirillum × Azolla
(b) Arbuscular Mycorrhizae × Angiospermic roots
Answer:
(b) Arbuscular Mycorrhizae × Angiospermic roots

Question 32.
Atomita 2 – rice is a product by.
(a) Polyploid breeding
(b) Hybridization
(c) Mutation breeding
(d) Clonal selection
Answer:
(c) Mutation breeding

Question 33.
Luxuriance is the term used on par with ________
(a) Heterosis
(b) Anthesis
(c) Hybrids
(d) Mutant breeds
Answer:
(a) Heterosis

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 34.
The term pure line was coined by.
Answer:
Johannsen

2 – Mark Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by the domestication of plants?
Answer:
Domestication is the process of bringing a plant species under the control of humans and gradually changing it through careful selection, genetic alteration, and handling so that it is more useful to people.

Question 2.
Mention any two free-living nitrogen fixing bacteria.
Answer:
Azotobacter and Clostridium.

Question 3.
What are bio-pesticides? Why they are considered better than synthetic pesticides?
Answer:
Bio-pesticides are biologically based agents used for the control of plant pests. They are in high use due to their non-toxic, cheaper and eco-friendly characteristics as compared to chemical or synthetic pesticides.

Question 4.
Name any four plants used in Green leaf manuring.
Answer:

  1. Cassia fistula
  2. Sesbania grandiflora
  3. Azadirachta indica
  4. Pongamia pinnata

Question 5.
What is plant breeding?
Answer:
Plant breeding is the science of improvement of crop varieties with a higher yield, better quality, resistance to diseases, and shorter durations which are suitable to a particular environment.

Question 6.
Define acclimatization.
Answer:
The newly introduced plant has to adapt itself to the new environment. This adjustment or adaptation of the introduced plant in the changing environment is called acclimatization.

Question 7.
Who coined the term “pure line”? Define it.
Answer:
Johannsen in 1903 coined the word pure line. It is a collection of plants obtained as a result of repeated self-pollination from a single homozygous individual.

Question 8.
Define the following terms:
Answer:
(a) Emasculation
(b) Bagging
Emasculation: It is a process of removal of anthers to prevent self-pollination before anthesis (period of opening of a flower).
Bagging: The stigma of the flower is protected against any undesirable pollen grains, by covering it with a bag.

Question 9.
What is Heterosis?
Answer:
The superiority of the F1 hybrid in performance over its parents is called heterosis or hybrid vigour. Vigour refers to an increase in growth, yield, greater adaptability of resistance to diseases, pest and drought.

Question 10.
What does the term ‘luxuriance’ stand for in plant breeding? Explain.
Answer:
Pseudoheterosis – Also termed as luxuriance. Progeny possesses superiority over parents in vegetative growth but not in yield and adaptation, usually sterile or poorly fertile.

Question 11.
Mutagens are substances that induce mutation. Name any two physical and chemical mutagens.
Answer:

  1. UV short waves, X-rays – Physical mutagens.
  2. Nitromethyl, Urea – Chemical mutagens.

Question 12.
Write in brief about Atomic Garden.
Answer:
Atomic Garden: This is a form of mutation breeding where plants are exposed to radioactive sources typically cobalt-60 or cesium-137 in order to generate desirable mutation in crop plants.

Question 13.
State any one advantage and one disadvantage of polyploid breeding.
Answer:

  1. Advantage: Polyploidy often exhibits hybrid vigour and increased tolerance to biotic and abiotic stresses.
  2. Disadvantage: Polyploidy results in reduced fertility due to meiotic error resulting in seedless varieties.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 14.
What are polyploids? Mention its nature.
Answer:
The majority of flowering plants are diploid (2n). The plants which possess more than two sets of a chromosome are called polyploids. Polyploidy often exhibits increased hybrid vigour, increased heterozygosity, increase tolerance to both biotic and abiotic stresses and buffering of deleterious mutations.

Question 15.
Name any two allopolyploid plant species.
Answer:

  1. Triticale (Triticum durum x Secale cereale).
  2. Raphanobrassica (Brassica oleraceae x Raphanus sativus).

Question 16.
What is Biofortification?
Answer:
Biofortification is breeding crops with higher levels of vitamins and minerals or higher protein and healthier fats. It is the most practical means to improve public health.

Question 17.
Name the insect-resistant varieties developed in the following crops.

  1. Okra
  2. Rapeseed mustard.

Answer:

  1. Okra: Pusa Sawani and Pusa A-4 varieties of Okra are resistant to shoot and fruit borers.
  2. Rapeseed mustard: Pusa Gaurav variety of rapeseed mustard shown

Question 18.
In which plant, and by whom the first natural hybridization was performed?
Answer:
The first natural hybridization was done by Cotton Mather in maize.

3 – Mark Questions

Question 19.
In 1926, Vavilov initially proposed eight main geographic centres of crop origin. Mention any six of them.
Answer:
China, India, South America, Mediterranean, Mesoamerica and South East Asia.

Question 20.
Name any three eminent plant breeders of Indian origin.
Answer:

  1. Dr. M.S. Swaminathan
  2. C.T. Patel
  3. Dr. B.P. Pal

Question 21.
How does Rhizobium act as an efficient bio-fertilizer?
Answer:
Bio-fertilizers containing rhizome bacteria are called rhizome bio-fertilizer culture. Symbiotic bacteria that reside inside the root nodules convert the atmospheric nitrogen into a bio-available form to the plants. This nitrogen-fixing bacterium when applied to the soil undergoes multiplication in billions and fixes the atmospheric nitrogen in the soil. Rhizobium is best suited for the paddy fields which increase the yield by 15 – 40%.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 22.
Azolla increases the yield of paddy crop – support your answer.
Answer:
Azolla is a free-floating water fern that fixes the atmospheric nitrogen in association with nitrogen-fixing blue-green alga Anabaena Azolla. It is used as a bio-fertilizer for wetland rice cultivation and is known to contribute 40 – 60 kg/ha/crop. The agronomic potential of Azolla is quite significant particularly for increasing the yield of rice crop, as it quickly decomposes in the soil.

Question 23.
Mention any three advantages of Arbuscular mycorrhizal association.
Answer:

  1. Arbuscular mycorrhizae have the ability to dissolve the phosphate found in soil.
  2. Provides resistance against diseases, germs, and unfavourable weather conditions.
  3. It assures water availability.

Question 24.
What makes the Trichoderma and effective bio-pesticide?
Answer:
Trichoderma species are free-living fungi that are common in soil and root ecosystems. They have been recognized as bio-control agent for

  1. the control of plant disease
  2. ability to enhance root growth development
  3. crop productivity
  4. resistance to abiotic stress and
  5. uptake and use of nutrients.

Question 25.
Write a note on Green manuring.
Answer:
Green manuring is defined as the growth of green manure crops and the use of these crops directly in the field by ploughing. One of the main objectives of green manuring is to increase the content of nitrogen in the soil. Also, it helps in improving the structure and physical properties of the soil. The most important green manure crops are Crotalaria juncea, Tephrosia purpurea and Indigofera tinctoria.

Question 26.
Point out the objectives of plant breeding.
Answer:

  1. To increase yield, vigour and fertility of the crop.
  2. To increase tolerance to environmental conditions, salinity, temperature, and drought.
  3. To prevent the premature falling of buds and fruits, etc.
  4. To improve synchronous maturity.
  5. To develop resistance to pathogens and pests.
  6. To develop photosensitive and thermos-sensitive varieties

Question 27.
Give an account on clonal selection.
Answer:
In an asexually propagated crop, progenies derived from a plant resemble in genetic constitution with the parent plant as they are mitotically divided. Based on their phenotypic appearance, the clonal selection is employed to select an improved variety from a mixed population (clones). The selected plants are multiplied through vegetative propagation to give rise to a clone. The genotype of a clone remains unchanged for a long period of time.

Question 28.
Write a short note on autopolyploidy with an example.
Answer:
When chromosome number is doubled by itself in the same plant, is called autopolyploidy.
Example: A triploid condition in sugarbeets, apples, and pear has resulted in an increase in vigour and fruit size, large root size, large leaves, flowers, more seeds, and sugar content in them. It also resulted in seedless tomatoes, apples, watermelon, and orange.

5-Mark Questions

Question 29.
Give a comparative account on Seaweed liquid fertilizer.
Answer:
Seaweed liquid fertilizer (SLF) contains cytokinin, gibberellins, and auxin apart from macro and micronutrients. Most seaweed-based fertilizers are made from kelp (brown algae) which grows to length of 150 meters. Liquid seaweed fertilizer is not only organic but also eco-friendly. The alginates in the seaweed reacts with metals in the soil and form long, cross-linked polymers in the soil. These polymers improve the crumbling in the soil, swell up when they get wet and retain moisture for a long time.

They are especially useful in organic gardening which provides carbohydrates for plants. Seaweed has more than 70 minerals, vitamins and enzymes. It promotes vigorous growth. Improves resistance of plants to frost and disease. Seeds soaked in seaweed extract germinate much rapidly and develop a better root system.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 30.
Explain the steps involved in hybridization.
Answer:
The steps involved in hybridization are as follows:

  1. Selection of Parents: Male and female plants of the desired characters are selected. It should be tested for their homozygosity.
  2. Emasculation: It is a process of removal of anthers to prevent self-pollination before anthesis (period of opening of a flower).
  3. Bagging: The stigma of the flower is protected against any undesirable pollen grains, by covering it with a bag.
  4. Crossing: Transfer of pollen grains from the selected male flower to the stigma of the female emasculated flower.
  5. Harvesting seeds and raising plants: The pollination leads to fertilization and finally seed formation takes place.
    The seeds are grown into a new generation which is called hybrid.

Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTs) Questions

Question 1.
Given below are the examples of symbiotic association in which one partner was mentioned. Write the name of the mutual co-partners.
(a) Azollafem + ______________
(b) Root nodules of legume plants + ______________
(c) phycomycetous fungi + ______________
(a) Anabaena azolla (blue green alga)
(b) Rhizobium
Answer:
(c) Angiosperm roots

Question 2.
Provide an example for each of the following agricultural components.

  1. Biopesticide
  2. Green manure crop
  3. Bio-Fertiliser

Answer:

  1. Bio pesticide – E.g. Trichoderma species
  2. Green manure – E.g. Crotalariajuncea
  3. Biofertilizer – E.g. Azolla

Question 3.
State the objective of using green manuring.
Answer:
Green manuring helps to increase the content of nitrogen soil and also improves the structure and physical property of soil.

Question 4.
Why plant Breeding is carried out by farmers and scientists?
Answer:
Plant breeding is a proposal manipulation of plant species in order to develop improved crop varieties with a higher yield, better quality, resistance to disease and quick maturation.

Question 5.
Yesterday, Ramu visited his friend’s Orchard, wherein he noticed few flowers of certain guava trees are covered using thin paper bags.

  1. Name the process carried out there.
  2. Why it was done so?

Answer:

  1. The process is referred to as bagging in plant hybridization.
  2. It is done after emasculation to protect the contact of the stigma of the flower against any other pollen grain.

Question 6.
Who am I?

  1. Father of the Green Revolution.
  2. Father of Indian Green Revolution.

Answer:

  1. Dr. Norman E. Borlaug.
  2. Dr. M.S. Swaminathan.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Plant Breeding

Question 7.
A plant breeder developed hybrid sugarcane by grafting two different varieties with desirable characters. The resultant hybrid showed excellent growth and productivity with increased sucrose content compared to its parental forms.

  1. What does this phenomenon refer to?
  2. How this condition can be maintained through further generation?

Answer:

  1. Heterosis or Hybrid vigour
  2. Vegetative propagation is the best-suited measure to maintain the vigourisity of hybrid.